Army Regulation 710-1

20 September 2007

Effective date: 20 October 2007


Inventory Management

Centralized Inventory Management of the Army Supply System


AR 710-1
Centralized Inventory Management of the Army Supply System

This rapid action revision, dated 20 September 2007—

* Aligns new battle/operational loss procedures (paras 1-9 and 1-10).

* Establishes the U.S. Army Joint Munitions Command Centralized Ammunition Management Office as the primary agent for the Army to manage wholesale and retail ammunition stocks (para 3-20).

* Makes administrative changes throughout.

Chapter 1

Section I

1-1. Purpose

This regulation prescribes Department of the Army (DA) policies, responsibilities, and procedures for integrated inventory management of Army materiel. It covers the management of secondary and major items and conventional ammunition.

1-2. References

Required and related publications and prescribed and referenced forms are listed in appendix A .

1-3. Explanation of abbreviations and terms

Abbreviations and special terms used in this regulation are explained in the glossary .

Section II

1-4. Deputy Chief of Staff, G-4

The Deputy Chief of Staff, G-4 (DCS, G-4) will —

a. Set policies and procedures for centralized inventory management of Army materiel.

b. Act as the Headquarters, Department of the Army (HQDA) Staff proponent and coordinator for equipment distribution planning by the Total Army Equipment Distribution Program (TAEDP), for special distribution alternative analysis exercises, and for distribution execution by the Equipment Release Priority System (ERPS). Set policies on equipment distribution, supply, and maintenance support, and —

(1) Approve section III of the modification tables of organization and equipment (MTOE) and tables of distribution and allowances (TDA) for the Active Army and the Reserve Component.

(2) Publish information in coordination with DAMO-FD on one-for-one conversion line item number (LIN) changes and selective LIN changes that require item analysis for application to The Army Authorization Documents System (TAADS) documents.

(3) Determine the capability of HQDA to support the distribution, supply, and maintenance of fielded equipment documented in TAADS.

(4) Establish policy to integrate automatic identification technologies (AIT) through automation information systems (AIS) for all supply functions and processes.

c. Establish and approve dedicated equipment distribution policy guidance and direction.

(1) Review all dedicated procurement programs (DPP) and proposed purchases to ensure compatibility with existing distribution plans.

(2) Ensure that the equipment distribution system contains current equipment distribution plans for DPP in an AIT environment.

d. Provide guidance, staff coordination, and final approval of the DA missile and munitions distribution program.

e. Provide Selected Item Management System-Expanded (SIMS-X) policy and planning guidance (see chap 3 ).

f. Provide policy and program guidance for controlled reclamation management and related financial functions for implementation Armywide see chap 3 ).

g. For Army Prepositioned Sets (APS), including prepositioned brigade and unit sets, operational projects, war reserve sustainment (both major items and war reserve secondary items) and war reserve support for allies (WRSA), as follows:

(1) Provide guidance used to develop, preposition, and maintain APS assets to ensure that APS assets are combat-ready for deploying units by maintaining assets at authorized levels and in ready-for-use condition per serviceability standards set by HQDA. (Assets must be issuable to deploying units within the timeframes set by the applicable operation plan (OPLAN).)

(2) Evaluate major changes and revisions to ensure compliance with Department of Defense (DOD), Joint Chiefs of Staff (JCS), and HQDA policy and congressional mandates.

(3) Function as Master Equipment List code (MELCODE) proponent. Staff, consolidate, and coordinate MELCODE changes.

(4) Develop and forecast funding requirements for Army prepositioned sets (APS).

h. Along with the Deputy Chief of Staff, G-3 (DCS, G-3), provide HQDA staff guidance for all DA Army war reserve operational projects (OPROJs), as follows:

(1) Review and approve all new, changed, or revised OPROJs, and compare to currently approved projects for equal or similar mission requirements.

(2) Coordinate OPROJs and changes with the ODCS, G-3 and elsewhere with HQDA staff to prevent duplication of equipment authorizations, validate materiel requirements, and decide whether materiel should be supplied from the continental United States (CONUS) or outside the continental United States (OCONUS).

(3) Review the proposal along with approved operations, contingency plans, logistics plans, operation plans (OPLANs), and Army Prepositioned Stocks (APS) assets to ensure that the OPROJ requirement does not duplicate other available assets.

(4) Advise the proponent and Headquarters , United States Army Materiel Command (AMC) if the proposed OPROJ is disapproved or approved for release to the AMC integrated materiel manager (IMM) and secondary inventory control activity (SICA) within 15 workdays after receipt from the proponent.

(5) Send the approved OPROJs to U.S. Army Information Systems Command-Pentagon (USAISC-P)(ASQNS-OP-MO-C) for distribution, after the applicable AMC IMM has performed a technical edit of a revised OPROJs and within 10 days after the receipt of that OPROJs from AMC.

(6) Publish an annual list of all authorized OPROJs.

(7) Direct the U.S. Army Force Management Support Agency (USAFMSA) to furnish the proposed OPROJs to the AMC IMM and SICA, if required.

(8) Coordinate funding, and provide a statement of resourcing for the OPROJs (materiel, current year PA or Supply Management, Army (SMA), or future funding).

(9) Approve maintenance float factors and submit approved factors to U.S. Army Logistics Support Activity (LOGSA) (AMXLS-M) for placement in Standard Study Number System and Replacement Factors (SSNS&RF) contained in FEDLOG under Army view.

(10) Provide guidance, in coordination with ODCS, G-3 for sustainment of the force by war reserve sustainment stocks (both major items and war reserve secondary items) to AMC, OTSG and DLA for computation of requirements.

i. Provide assistance, as needed, in the final approval process of the HQDA aircraft distribution programs by ODCS, G-3.

j. Resolve major item requirement and authorization data differences for claimants other than MTOEs or TDAs.

k. Provide AMC with DA distribution policy and guidance for controlling equipment substitution for national stock numbers (NSN) not assigned under the required LIN.

l. Provide Army order of precedence (AOP) guidance to AMC or LOGSA (AMXLS-M) for all non-DCS, G-3-managed LINs for out-of-Department of the Army Master Priority List (DAMPL) distribution.

m. Provide guidance through AMC to LOGSA (AMXLS-M) on matters regarding distribution, utilizing AIT technologies to improve materiel readiness.

n. Decide priority of support where requests from HQDA Staff, AMC, or the U.S. Army Training and Doctrine Command (TRADOC) exceeds the TAEDP support capability.

o. Provide distribution guidance in the materiel distribution policy and guidance letter to ensure AIT compliance and to support force packaging decisions developed by the Army Staff in response to program objectives of the Office of the Secretary of Defense (OSD) and DA.

p. Analyze and describe impacts of planned activations or reorganizations to the force structure by reviewing the equipment supportability implications of the proposed changes on the distribution/redistribution of major items in an AIT environment.

q. Approve all variances to the data interchange (DI) process, to include the 2-year fencing of DI assets and AIT devices held on the procuring IMM account.

r. Provide technical details and advice for structuring information on secondary items and spare and repair parts (see chap 15 ).

1-5. Deputy Chief of Staff, G-3

The Deputy Chief of Staff, G-3 (DCS, G-3) will —

a. Set the priority for distributing major items, the Army Order of Precedence (AOP) as well as the Army Equipping Policy (AEP).

b. Exercise Army Staff responsibility for processing and approving basis-of-issue plans (BOIP).

c. Act as Army Staff proponent for TAADS by developing TAADS policies and procedures and managing the TAADS documentation of the Army force structure.

d. Approve or disapprove OPROJ requirements, and ensure that the requirements do not duplicate existing capabilities (see chap 6 ).

e. Allow for constraints imposed by the existing organization of units scheduled for deployment to receive APS by —

(1) Designing APS force structure that is compatible with the structure of the type unit which will deploy to use equipment.

(2) Reviewing the APS MTOE during the applicable MOC-windows. ODCS, G-3 will also minimize changes to standard requirements codes (SRC), which cause re-warehousing turbulence in the APS.

(3) Fielding force modernization items to APS within 6 months after fielding like items to a CONUS unit that has an APS mission (given funding constraints.)

f. Appoint a single point of contact (POC) within each element of the HQDA Staff to coordinate APS actions.

g. Provide approved force objectives to the Army Staff and incorporate objectives into Joint Strategic Planning System (JSPS), Joint Strategic Capabilities Planning Document (JSCPD), JPAM, the Planning, Programming, and Budgeting Execution System (PPBES), and in the Defense Planning Guidance (DPG).

h. Update the Structure and Composition System (SACS) and the Master Equipment List (MEL).

i. Develop and forecast funding requirements for APS.

j. Approve the assignment of unit identification codes (UICs) to APS.

k. Develop APS readiness reporting procedures.

l. Develop APS modernization plans (DAMO-FD). Evaluate major changes and revisions to APS to ensure compliance with DOD policy and congressional mandates.

m. Maintain, consolidate, and request information from Army Commands (ACOMs), Army Service Component Commands (ASCCs), and Direct Reporting Units (DRUs) to evaluate efforts to meet APS objectives.

n. Approve wartime active replacement factors and changes to the base period for computing peacetime replacement factors (see chap 10, section IV) for use in war reserve computations.

o. Resolve major item authorization data differences for MTOE and TDA claimants (see chap 11 ).

p. Review TAADS documents to assure compatibility of the mission of the unit with capabilities, organization, and allocation of equipment.

q. Provide ODCS, G-4 with BOIP impacted Logistics Structure and Composition System (LOGSACS).

r. Provide LOGSA (AMXLS-M) with unit fill sequence criteria for computing the distribution alternatives for achieving phased equipment modernization.

s. Provide AMC and LOGSA (AMXLS-M) unit requirement and authorization data (tables of organization and equipment (TOE)/TDA) through the SACS products that incorporate the DAMPL priority sequence.

t. Maintain audit trails in the LOGSACS process of the BOIP and shorthand note (SHN) changes that affect the initial issue quantity (IIQ) and authorization requirement of LINs for use by ODCS, G-4 in the TAEDP audit subsystem.

u. On request, provide ODCS, G-4 and LOGSA (AMXLS-M) with force audit trail data from SACS to battalion level.

v. Approve requests for changes to equipment requirements and authorizations submitted by the ACOMs, ASCCs, and DRUs.

w. Update SACS annually.

x. Serve as the approval authority for AMIS (see chap 15 ).

y. Serve as the approval authority for missiles and munitions distribution plans.

z. Provide special guidance on distribution priorities for specific major items or equipment. This includes out-of-priority distribution or diversions from DAMPL priority sequence. The guidance is furnished to ODCS, G-4 by the ERPS for DAMO-FD managed items.

aa. Develop, with ODCS, G-4 and the Assistant Secretary to the Army (Acquisition, Logistics, and Technology) (ASA(ALT)), LIN and SSN data to analyze and verify IIQ requirements and authorizations before release of LOGSACS.

ab. Provide ODCS, G-4 and ASA(RDA) with authenticated force deployment schedules and changes for use in the acquisition and equipment distribution planning process.

ac. Provide ODCS, G-4 and AMC with the highest possible accuracy resolution for both authorization and requirements with the SACS.

ad. Integrate the TAEDP projections of equipment fill dates (expressed as of the end of a quarter) into TAADS semiannual change review process and assure that these dates are included in SACS.

ae. Ensure equipment fill dates are compared with proposed effective dates by ODCS, G-3; ODCS, G-4; and other HQDA Staff elements to assure that unit documentation is consistent with AIT distribution projection.

af. Coordinate the review of emergency out-of-cycle TAADS change requests, and provide ODCS, G-4 with guidance for distribution of assets out-of-DAMPL or DA Planning and Programming List priority sequence to implement HQDA-approved distribution.

ag. Ensure that AMC and LOGSA (AMXLS-M) have the most recent TAADS data for use in the monthly Requisition Validation (REQ-VAL) System and Equipment Release Priority System (ERPS) for all scheduled as well as out-of-cycle TAADS publications.

ah. Provide ODCS, G-4 special missile allocations for the various ACOMs, ASCCs, and DRUs in a form that can be used to prepare missile TAEDP products.

ai. Ensure that DPP acquisitions support force programs and approve DPP equipment lists.

aj. Ensure that distribution plans contained in the Force Modernization Master Plan reflect applicable DPP quantities for the RC.

1-6. Assistant Secretary of the Army Acquisition, Logistics and Technology

The Assistance Secretary of the Army Acquisition, Logistics and Technology (ASA(ALT)) will —

a. Act as HQDA Staff proponent for the standard study number (SSN) file.

b. Develop and implement acquisition programs for procurement-funded major items for approved APS.

c. Provide overall staff supervision for type classification of major items.

d. Identify SSNs requiring DA control (see chap 10 ).

e. Provide AMC and USAMMA with Army procurement objectives (APO) for SSN data.

f. Provide ODCS, G-4 and AMC with approved program budget decisions (PBD) for major items that result from the Army, OSD, and Office of Management and Budget (OMB) budget resolution. The frequency and the timing for providing PBDs are coordinated with ODCS, G-4.

g. Separately identify APS stock for allies' requirements and acquisition quantities by program year with the Five-Year Defense Program (FYDP) Procurement Annex.

h. Assist ODCS, G-3 in developing SSN data for analysis and verification of IIQ requirements and authorizations before distribution of LOGSACS.

i. Provide ODCS, G-4 and AMC with the most recent procurement data for use in the TAEDP.

j. Provide technical details and advice on the component major items (CMI) and associated support items of equipment (ASIOE) to be included in AMIS definitions.

k. Provide oversight of dedicated procurement programs for the Reserve Component.

(1) Review proposed DPP acquisitions for procurability and costing. This will be done through the U.S. Army Materiel Command (AMC) customer order process when it involves non-Army Department of Defense (DOD) appropriations.

(2) Request release of funds for DPP acquisitions for the APA.

(3) Ensure program execution and coordinate program savings with ACOMs, ASCCs, and DRUs that procure DPP equipment except those appropriated in non-Army DOD accounts.

(4) Provide guidance on proper procurement appropriation management upon request.

(5) Release program or savings to appropriate ACOM, ASCC, and DRU.

l. Provide oversight of DCS, G-4's AIT program to ensure OSD compliance.

1-7. Commanding Generals of Army Commands, Army Service Component Commands, and Direct Reporting Units

Commanding General (CG)s of ACOMs, ASCCs, and DRUs will —

a. Ensure that DA policy is uniformly implemented.

b. Recommend improvements to inventory management policies and procedures.

c. Advise DA when resource deficiencies limit mission accomplishment.

d. Regulate supply levels to meet actual needs and authorizations.

e. Provide stock status data and forecasts of significant changes in operations and plans, as required by AMC major subordinate commands (MSC) or Secondary Inventory Control Activities (SICAs) for inventory management.

f. Ensure that subordinate commanders comply with ARI policy and procedures.

g. Provide LOGSA with distribution lists and required output products for subordinate elements.

h. Maintain and furnish information required for Army financial inventory reporting systems.

i. Maintain programs to expedite the return of excess serviceable, reparable, and recoverable items.

j. Submit changes to equipment requirements and authorizations to ODCS, G-3.

k. Request changes in maintenance repair time from the appropriate IMM.

l. Develop the operational readiness float (ORF) distribution plan and notify the IMM where the assets will be positioned.

m. Report major assets on the property or stock record account.

n. Assist the IMMs in overall planning, coordinating, distributing, and redistributing major items of equipment to the UIC or claimant level (see chap 13 ).

o. Execute equipment redistribution actions as directed by HQDA Staff.

p. Implement HQDA Staff decisions on distribution and redistribution of major items, and coordinate with the IMMs to ensure supportability before distribution.

q. Ensure accurate and prompt submission of on-hand asset data to Continuing Balance System-Expanded (CBS-X) per AR 710-3 .

r. Maintain strict controls in reporting excess items to the applicable IMM (see chap 15 ).

s. Ensure that subordinate activities screen all major items in serviceable or reparable condition before reporting them as excess.

t. Control the transfer or redistribution of major items per HQDA ODCS, G-3 direction.

u. Provide protection to avoid further deterioration or damage to major items reported as excess.

1-8. The Commanding General, U.S. Army Materiel Command

The CG, Army Materiel Command (AMC), will —

a. Provide procedures for the AIT enabled Automatic Return Item (ARI) program.

b. Integrate inventory management and AIT functions under the DOD single manager concept.

c. Maintain liaison between inventory management, intra-service, and inter-service functions (for example, manpower and budget).

d. Control the centralization of worldwide asset visibility and inventory functions exercised by AMC MSCs.

e. Ensure that security assistance program commitments are met.

f. Ensure that forecasts of special program requirements (SPRs) are provided to the appropriate AMC MSCs, other military services, and the Defense Logistics Agency (DLA) in sufficient time to enable acquisition of assets to meet the scheduled requirement.

g. Maintain up-to-date contingency plans for integrated materiel management operations at dispersed or alternate locations.

h. Provide policy, procedures, plans, and other guidance, including latest FYDP and mobilization stockage data, for management of major items.

i. Exercise staff supervision over the effectiveness and efficiency of Selected Item Management System-Expanded (SIMS-X) (see chap 3 ).

j. In connection with special commodity control programs (see chap 3, sec V ) —

(1) Incorporate the requirements for conventional ammunition (see chap 3 ) into all automated procedures.

(2) Coordinate all conventional ammunition requirements that cross command lines.

(3) Provide all commands with lists of ammunition items to be rotated from APS, contingency stocks, and basic load because of obsolescence, age, or degradation of performance.

(4) Dispose of conventional ammunition stock in excess of foreseeable training requirements within a particular command or geographic area. Disposition may include movement to another area for training, military sales, maintenance, or demilitarization.

(5) Monitor the worldwide conventional ammunition rotation program.

k. Ensure that controlled reclamation is supported by current and future demands or other prescribed criteria through the periodic re-computation of quantitative levels (see chap 3, sec VI ).

l. Ensure maximum reclamation of excess stocks before initiating disposal action.

m. Set procedures for controlled reclamation within the Army supply system and ensure AIT components are integrated in the controlled reclamation inventory.

n. Provide reclamation program information and forecasts to ODCS, G-4 (DALO-RMI), Washington, DC 20310-0500, to support annual AWCF-SMA programs and budgets.

o. Provide staff guidance on APS to subordinate activities, and overall management of command and control through the Field Support Command (FSC).

p. Provide overall management and accountability for all APS units. Exercise staff responsibility with AMC activities to ensure that APS data are developed, status reports are prepared, and requests from higher headquarters are answered on time.

q. Ensure that APS authorizations are used to develop APS stockage levels and distribution plans approved by HQDA (DALO-FPP).

r. Exercise staff supervision and provides policy guidance to subordinate activities on developing and processing an OPROJ (see chap 6 ).

s. Exercise overall staff responsibility to review, process, and develop required data, status reporting, and other information on OPROJ required by higher headquarters.

t. Coordinate OPROJ and notify proponents if the materiel is not stored as requested.

u. Maintain assets for OPROJ stored in Defense distribution depots (DDD) in a ready-for-issue condition.

v. Program, manage, acquire, account for, fund, maintain, and provide for care of supplies in storage (COSIS) for OPROJ stockpile.

w. Develop issue plans to meet the required times set for shipment of materiel to specific sites for APS.

x. Provide sustainment or national level management of repair cycle float (RCF) assets (see chap 8 ).

y. Develop logistics doctrine for the use and maintenance of RCF materiel.

z. Add items selected for maintenance float support to the Mission Profile Development List (MPDL) to ensure that they are considered for APS stockage.

aa. Prepare HQDA policy and procedures for type classification of major items.

ab. Control the end item code (EIC) program.

ac. Control the development and maintenance of the SSNS (see chap 10, sec II ).

ad. Ensure that major item LIN and Department of Defense ammunition code (DODAC) coverage in the SSNS include central item management requirements of HQDA and AMC.

ae. Approve peacetime replacement factors (PTRF) for all AMC-managed items (see para 10-10a ).

af. Ensure that IMMs and project managers provide comments and recommendations on gross requirements to HQDA staff (see chap 12 ,sec I ).

ag. Provide assistance to the IMMs and other subordinate commands to identify and resolve procedural problems on the determination of gross requirements.

ah. Ensure that IMMs and project managers provide responsive distribution and redistribution planning to the HQDA staff (see chap 13 ).

ai. Help the IMMs in clarifying distribution and redistribution policies and developing special procedures and systems.

aj. Set and enforce the use of standard and singular data sources for such AMC-initiated data as procurement delivery schedules, peacetime losses, projected unserviceable data, and catalog data.

ak. Ensure that IMMs use TAEDP for out-year distribution coordination and planning and use the ERPS for near-term distribution execution.

al. Use TAEDP and ERPS as the source documents to plan and execute distribution to support total package fielding (TPF).

am. Conduct reviews at the IMMCs and other subordinate commands to find and solve procedural problems on major item distribution management.

an. Ensure that basis-of-issue plan feeder data (BOIPFD) is maintained accurately.

ao. Ensure that the IMMs carry out force packaging decisions concerning distribution or redistribution of equipment in the timeframes set by HQDA ODCS, G-3.

ap. Provide representation to the joint HQDA, ACOM, ASCC, DRU, AMC, and IMM review sessions for equipment distribution.

aq. With appropriate Army Staff elements, resolve program issues and problems with DI; and advises the requiring and procuring commands of corrective actions taken.

ar. Analyze quarterly DI performance reports and confirm the requiring command's performance by AMC-signed correspondence.

as. Serve as executive agent for all AMIS applications and, as materiel developer, recommends the AMIS management codes. For systems managed by a program executive officer (PEO), AMC coordinates, as appropriate, with the PEO. The PEO serves as materiel developer.

at. Maintains overall control of the Part Number Conversion Program (PNCP).

au. For the DPP program, will —

(1) Establish procurement request order numbers for the DPP.

(2) Issue project codes to facilitate tracking equipment issues.

(3) Ensure that components are procured and available for assembly of DPP systems.

(4) Report DPP savings to DCSRDA and/or appropriate program director.

(5) Ensure that components of major items being procured under DPP are tracked for distribution with the major item.

1-9. Commanders of U.S. Army Materiel Command major subordinate commands

Subject to the policies, programs, and controls over principal and secondary items directed by higher authority, commanders of AMC major subordinate commands (MSCs) will —

a. Use approved provisioning techniques to support items being introduced into the supply system.

b. Identify assigned items, update and maintain DA manuals to include assignment of NSNs for items in these manuals.

c. Compute the requirements objectives (RO) for support of customers or projects by using stock status data (see AR 710-3, chap 6 ), forecasts of requirements furnished by ACOMs, ASCCs, and DRUs and other users, and demand data.

d. Develop and provide materiel requirements to support budget requests, and justify adjustments to obligation authority.

e. Issue procurement directives, within the limitations of approved programs and direction from higher authority.

f. Forecast quantities of items requiring overhaul and adjust depot maintenance programs to balance inventory positions against requirements.

g. Maximize use of excess stocks before starting disposal actions. Ensure that disposal of modification kits has the express permission of HQDA DALO-SM.

h. Ensure the integration of security assistance programs into the total materiel requirements. Set controls to make sure that commitments to security assistance customers are met.

i. Furnish timely forecasts of special program requirements to the AMC MSCs, other military services, and DLA.

j. Review and select SIMS-X items semiannually (see chap 3 ); and identify each selected item by assigning reportable item control code (RICC) 8.

k. Identify selected items to LOGSA by 1 September of each year for the October FEDLOG update and by 1 March of each year for the April FEDLOG update. FEDLOG is Federal logistics data on compact disc. FEDLOG replaced ARMYLOG, and ARMYLOG replaced the Army Master Data File (AMDF).

l. Set up and maintain a database of retail support level assets and requirements for SIMS-X.

m. Control SIMS-X additions and deletions during the semiannual review.

n. Provide LOGSA input for SIMS-X performance evaluation reports per in paragraph 3-7 .

o. Provide a central office to receive monthly NSN candidates from LOGSA.

p. Be responsible for the management of major items, and will —

(1) Designate the depot to receive RCF assets during materiel fielding (see chap 8 ).

(2) Submit LIN requests for major items to LOGSA (AMXLS-ML).

(3) Request the assignment of an EIC to a major item before fielding.

(4) Ensure assignment of the proper RICC for major items requiring the reporting of on-hand asset data.

(5) Ensure that major item cataloging data are submitted correctly and promptly.

(6) Properly define the relationship between component major items (CMI) and assemblages (see chap 10, sec II ).

(7) Use SSN identification and file data to develop acquisition and TAEDP reports and documents.

(8) Direct and coordinate all questions and discussions on the SSNs to LOGSA.

(9) Assign numeric SSNs to non-major item LINs for which requirements and distribution data are required.

(10) Ensure that numeric SSNs are entered into the LOGSA database.

(11) Develop planned major item repair programs.

(12) Develop and update maintenance float factors for selected items per AR 700-127 and AR 750-1 , and submit those factors to ODCS, G-4 for approval.

(13) Provide maintenance factors to LOGSA for CMI, by LIN, for inclusion in SSNS&RF.

(14) Provide replacement factor data for all major item LINs in SB 700-20, Army Adopted/Other Items Selected for Authorization List of Reportable Items, and for secondary item LINs for which requirements and distribution data are essential.

(15) Develop repair cycle float (RCF) and maintain operational readiness float (ORF) factors (see chap 12, sec I ) and reviews and updates the float factors annually.

(16) As a wholesale logistics operator of the equipment distribution program (see chap 13, sec I ), provide IMM of major items for assigned commodities.

(17) Take part in major item distribution and redistribution management reviews, analyses, and studies as directed by AMC and HQDA.

(18) Use TAEDP, REQVAL, and ERPS as the baseline for final planning, coordinating with the gaining ACOM, ASCC, DRU, and distributing major item equipment to the UIC or claimant level.

(19) Ensure the accuracy of asset data reported by CBS-X ( AR 710-3 ) and provides transactional data for items in the "CBS-X Puller" tape provided by LOGSA.

(20) Ensure supportability before distributing new or product improvement program equipment and PA modification work order kits. Such equipment must meet AR 750-10 requirements prior to issue.

(21) Coordinate distribution and redistribution planning actions required to support force packaging decisions with the ACOM, ASCC, and DRU to ensure supportability before execution.

(22) Prepare major item distribution plans for missiles and selected missile-peculiar ground support equipment pending inclusion of missile data in the LOGSA database.

(23) Distribute Army aircraft per chapter 13, sec IV .

(24) Receive and process reports of excess within the set timeframes (see chap 15 ).

(25) Provide reporting units with disposition instructions on excess major items.

q. Ensure accurate and prompt submission of catalog data, delivery schedules from procurement, depot maintenance programs, and/or other receipts and monthly loss schedules on all major items.

r. Obtain copies of reported battle/operational losses from LOGSA and conduct a weekly validation and reconciliation of reported battle losses/operational losses. This validation is due each Wednesday by 3 p.m. Central Standard Time of each week to HQDA, DCS, G-4 and LOGSA.

s. Ensure the weekly battle loss tracker report is validated prior to posting battle loss reports onto the Logistics Information Warehouse (LIW) Web site.

t. Leverage the automated capabilities resident in LOGSA LIW to maximize the use of data already provided by the maintenance and supply STAMIS to automatically fill out data elements required in the battle loss tracker. The LIW will also continue to be a source for reporting and obtaining battle loss data.

1-10. Executive Director, U.S. Army Materiel Command Logistics Support Activity

The Executive Director, Logistics Support Activity (LOGSA) will —

a. Develop policy and guidance on the Army's participation in the Federal Catalog System and on the Army's cataloging operations.

b. Provide a central logistics management data operation for DA.

c. Identify SIMS-X (RICC 8) items semiannually (October and April) to the user through the FEDLOG update (see chap 3 ).

d. Provide retail supply activities additions and deletions to previously identified SIMS-X items.

e. Assign LINs and notifies the IMMs of LIN assignments (see chap 9 ).

f. Update the file containing SB 700-20 every June (see chap 10, sec II ).

g. Develop, maintain, and support TAEDP, Total Asset Visibility (TAV), the Distribution Execution System (DES), and APS. (DES integrates REQVAL, CBS-X, ERPS, Logistics TAADS (LOGTAADS), REQVAL Plus, REQVAL Redistribution System (RVARS), and Unique Item Tracking (UIT) and Joint Medical Asset Repository (JMAR).

h. Produce the REQVAL and ERPS products to support the major item requisitioning, review, validation, and distribution execution processes.

i. Assure the accuracy of the major item worldwide on-hand asset position by using CBS-X (see AR 710-3 ).

j. As AMC's executive agent for functional management of the AMP/Major Item System Map (MISM) network, including management and control of all application software —

(1) Provide customer support for the operation and maintenance of MISM.

(2) Serve as assigned system developer for the design, programming, and maintenance of MISM.

(3) Prepare and maintain user documentation and technical operating instructions for MISM.

(4) Maintain current catalog data in the Master Item Data Reference (MIDR) database in support of MISM requirements.

(5) Ensure that component major items are correctly identified with the assemblage within an SSN on the MIDR per paragraph 10-5 for use by the MISM database.

(6) Ensure timely update of AR 71-32 , using the MISM database.

k. Manage the PNCP.

l. Design, maintain, and administer unique and sensitive item reporting and tracking systems, as well as centralized automated databases, for serial number and quantity control of selected items per AR 710-3 .

m. Develop, maintain, and distribute the Prepositioned Authorization Document (PAD).

n. Design and maintain standard automated logistics management systems, including those applicable to depot operations, in compliance with policies and procedures in this regulation.

o. Set up and maintain computer programs to ensure accuracy of the standard study number cross reference (SSN X-REF) file by use of the MIDR database (see chap 10, sec II ).

p. Assign SSNs to DODACs for which requirements and distribution data are essential.

q. Update the SSN X-REF file as required under the database concept.

r. Publish EM 0007 semiannually, containing SSN data. Guidance for the development of EM 0007 is in paragraph 10-11 .

s. Coordinate SSN assignment and report errors to the responsible IMM.

t. Provide SSN X-REF file transaction analyses of all SSN changes for distribution.

u. Provide changes in the SSNS to the U.S. Army Research, Development, and Acquisition Information System Agency (RDAISA) for use in the research, development, and acquisition information system.

v. Assign a pseudo LIN for SSN identification when requested by the IMM.

w. Assign, along with ASA(RDA), SSNs for items and programs not requiring an approved acquisition objective (AAO)/Army procurements requirement (APR) computation.

x. Ensure that all active SSNs in the procurement database (PDB) are also in the LOGSA SSNS. Procedures for assigning SSNs for the PDB are in paragraph 10-11 .

y. Ensure that the changes made to the SSNs in the PDB are coordinated with the appropriate HQDA analyst or DA system coordinator (DASC).

z. Provide the SSN X-REF file to ODCS, G-3/5/7 for use in SACS development.

aa. Compute and publish a major item planning price by LIN for inclusion in the SSNS&RF.

ab. Update the SSN data and provide information monthly and quarterly (February, May, August, and November) to users and customers of the SSNs.

ac. Take the appropriate actions to delete an SSN if it is inactive or not present in the PDB.

ad. Notify the IMM to verify a deletion of an SSN if both assets and requirements exist and the SSN is not in the PDB.

ae. Retain the SSN file for 2 years.

af. Develop detailed backup data of stratified SACS forces and IIQs, and provide the data to the IMMs and other agencies or commands as directed by CG, AMC (see chap 11 ).

ag. Develop, maintain, and support TAEDP, REQVAL, AEP, ERPS, and APS (see chap 13, sec I ).

ah. Maintain the above systems for PA major and other selected LINs of equipment for distribution management planning and execution.

ai. Provide TAEDP products to HQDA to coordinate the documentation and distribution planning processes.

aj. Produce the REQVAL and ERPS products to support the major item requisitioning, review, validation, and distribution processes.

ak. Add all CMIs approved by USAFMSA to the SSN X-REF file.

al. Update assigned automated databases per current DI policy.

am. Develop and maintain an effective Web-based Army equipment loss database and query capability using battle loss data provided by the ASCCs and the DRUs. Ensure battle loss data submitted weekly by the ASCCs and DRUs are reconciled by the LCMCs prior to posting that information into the LIW.

1-11. Director, U.S. Army Communications Security Logistics Activity

The Director, Communications Security Logistics Activity (CSLA) will —

a. Design and maintain standard automated logistics management programs to manage classified communications security (COMSEC) equipment and COMSEC-related software items in the COMSEC Materiel Control System (CMCS), per AR 380-40 and AR 710-2 . CSLA-developed automated programs will comply with policies and procedures in these regulations.

b. Perform all IMM responsibilities in paragraph 1-9 for the wholesale management of both classified and unclassified COMSEC items, including controlled cryptographic items (CCI).

c. Manage and administer information systems security (INFOSEC) equipment programs, including developing acquisition strategies and long range procurement and distribution programs, to support Army fielding programs.

d. Provide technical assistance to HQDA and serve as executive agent for the Office of the Director of Information Systems for Command, Control, Communications, and Computers (ODISC4), in the development of COMSEC materiel management concepts, policies, and procedures.

1-12. Commandant, U.S. Army Quartermaster Center and School

The Commandant, Quartermaster Center and School (QMC&S) will —

a. Set requirements for food service equipment for all enlisted personnel dining facilities. (see chap 2 .)

b. Recommend approval of deviations to authorized allowances set in common tables of allowances (CTA) 50-909, chapter 9, including officers field and noncommissioned officers (NCO) open messes designated as essential feeding facilities. Hospital food service is excluded.

c. Set the type, style, class, and dimension for all food service equipment used in each type of enlisted personnel dining facility.

d. Represent DA on the DOD Food Service Facilities and Equipment Planning Board.

e. Control Modern Food Service System Operation and Maintenance, Army (OMA) funds for mobile and portable food service equipment and items of decor (if budgeted for at the QMC&S Army Center of Excellence, Subsistence) for approved Military Construction, Army (MCA) projects for building or modernizing enlisted personnel dining facilities.

f. Set food service equipment schedules for each type and size of enlisted personnel dining facility under an approved MCA project.

1-13. Chief of Engineers

The Chief of Engineers (COE) will —

a. Review OPROJs for applicability (see chap 6, sec III ).

b. Through the Office of the Chief of Engineers, provide technical details and advice on facility-related data to be included in AMIS definitions.

1-14. The Surgeon General

The Surgeon General (TSG) will —

a. Review OPROJs that contain medical materiel to ensure the requirements are valid.

b. Perform a technical review of the medical items to ensure that the type and quantity are adequate.

c. Resolve problems directly with the proponents.

d. With the CG, AMC, provide procedures for the ARI program.

e. Prepare and submit the list of items and summary data sheet for medical materiel selected for OPROJs to USAFMSA.

1-15. Commander, U.S. Army Joint Munitions Command

The Commander, U.S. Army Joint Munitions Command (JMC), will —

a. Manage the Standard Study Numbering System (SSNS) for AMC (see chap 9 ).

b. Develop supplemental gross requirements (see chap 12, sec I ).

c. Provide records (magnetic tape) to RDAISA for input to the AAO computations.

d. Maintain a file for all additive OPROJs and provides ASA(ALT) an updated tape each November.

1-16. Assistant Secretary of the Army (Financial Management & Comptroller

The Assistant Secretary of the Army (Financial Management & Comptroller (ASA(FM&C)) will —

a. Assist the ASA(ALT) and DCS, G-4 in providing budget decisions that can be easily related to equipment distribution plans (see chap 13 , sec I).

b. Provide technical details and advice on costing that can be applied to the definition of AMIS.

c. Provide codes for AMIS management and incorporates them into the finance and accounting structure and Planning, Programming, Budgeting, and Execution System processes.

d. Interpret appropriation legislation concerning DPP in conjunction with the appropriation director.

(1) Allocate DPP funds for appropriation purchases account (APA) through existing fund distribution systems.

(2) Monitor financial execution and coordinate approval of all APA program deviations.

1-17. Chief, National Guard Bureau

The Chief, National Guard Bureau (NGB), will coordinate the National Guard (NG) excess through Objective Supply Capability Adaptive Redesign (OSCAR), equipment directives, and the NG asset status reports, with the CBS-X (see chap 13 , sec I). He will also:

a. Serve as program director for that portion of DPP provided for the Army National Guard through Office of the Secretary of Defense (OSD).

b. Develop long-range equipment plans that support unit readiness.

c. Coordinate with DCS, G-3/5/7; DCS, G-4; and DCSRDA the proposed lists of equipment acquired under a DPP to determine availability, procurability, costing, and requirements.

d. After coordination with the appropriate Army Staff agencies, provide Office of the Assistant Secretary of Defense (Comptroller)(OASD(C)) and Congress with proposed lists of equipment to be procured with DPP funds.

e. Develop unit level equipment distribution plans.

f. Track program execution.

g. Requisition DPP and track issues through the logistics control activity to unit/line item level of detail using project codes.

h. Program for adequate storage, maintenance, and support equipment for items procured under the DPP.

i. Report any deviations in program to the DCS, G-4; DCS, G-3; Appropriation Director for APA; and, when required, Congress.

1-18. Chief Army Reserve

The Chief Army Reserve (CAR) will —

a. Serve as program director for that portion of the DPP pertaining to the U.S. Army Reserve.

b. Assist the Commanding General, U.S. Army Forces Command (CG, FORSCOM) in developing long-range equipment plans that support unit readiness.

c. Provide CG, FORSCOM assistance in developing proposed lists of equipment for purchase under DPP.

d. Coordinate with DCS, G-3/5/7; DCS, G-4; and DCSRDA the proposed lists of equipment to be acquired under a DPP to determine availability, procurability, costing, and requirements.

e. After coordination with appropriate Army Staff agencies, provide OASD(C) and Congress proposed lists of equipment to be procured with DPP funds.

f. Coordinate program execution in conjunction with CG, FORSCOM.

g. Report deviations in program to DCS, G-4; DCS, G-3/5/7; Appropriation Director for APA; and when required, to Congress.

1-19. Heads of designated secondary item control activities

Heads of designated secondary item control activities (SICAs) will —

a. Compute requirements for general or limited war mobilization, oversea APS, logistics and contingency plans, and contingency support stocks.

b. Perform supply control functions associated with requisitioning, receipt, storage, inventory, and issue of APS in CONUS depots, excluding class III, bulk petroleum.

c. Maintain, consolidate, and furnish information required for Army financial inventory reporting systems, excluding class III, bulk petroleum.

d. Maintain DA liaison with DLA and the General Services Administration (GSA) for introducing new items, issuing procurement directives for specific approved programs, and solving supply problems.

e. Identify potential supply problems and assist suppliers and customers.

f. Participate in APS planning and requirements determination (see chap 6 ).

g. Coordinate with the IMM to implement approved supply plans for introduction of new items and phaseout of replaced items.

h. Assist the IMM in the provisioning process and attend the provisioning conference.

i. Develop and provide the IMM with special Army program data, such as projections of a one-time, nonrecurring, or irregular programmed requirement.

j. Provide repair parts interchangeability and substitutability data for DA-introduced items.

k. Prepare and coordinate type classification proposals for items in the Army system per AR 70-1 .

l. Participate in conferences, inactive item reviews, and item reduction studies affecting non-DA IMM items, as required.

m. Develop applicable APS consumption rates for new item requirements, contingency and mobilization plans, and assigned projects.

o. Prepare and review for conformance with DOD and DA policy those publications and documents that affect assigned items, excluding class III, bulk petroleum.

p. Perform financial management and budget support by preparing and justifying budget and apportionment requests for CONUS APS prepositioned requirements, special item support, and special Army programs, excluding class III, bulk petroleum.

q. Apply excess stocks to fill APS prepositioned requirements.

r. Help schedule and develop end item maintenance support plans and help prepare maintenance and technical publications. Participate in conferences held for maintenance evaluation, maintenance allocation, and allocation of repair parts. Coordinate equipment improvement reports with the appropriate IMM or Army activities.

s. Review CTAs and OPROJs to ensure that correct allowances and basis of issue for standard, contingent, or related items are included. They will determine the need for assignment of LINs for use in authorization documents. They will obtain LINs as required for type-classified and nontype-classified items for use in authorization documents.

t. Process materiel deficiency reports to the IMM per AR 702-7 .

u. Conduct technical reviews and submit recommendations for proposed OPROJs (see chap 6 ).

v. Perform supply functions for effective Army support not specifically included as the responsibility of another agency.

1-20. The Army Materiel Command supply coordinator at the U.S. Army Tank-Automotive Life Cycle Management Command for obsolete or excess end items

The AMC supply coordinator at U.S. Army Tank-Automotive Life Cycle Management Command (TACOM LCMC) (AMSTA-FR) for obsolete or excess end items will —

a. Coordinate all supply actions for obsolete or excess end items.

b. Consolidate requirements.

c. Distribute obsolete or excess end items.

d. Develop a 5-year forecast of requirements.

e. Identify the three types of end items (see para 3-21a(1) ).

f. Develop an allocation plan for distributing end items and notifying users of end item availability.

1-21. The Project Manager for instrumentation, targets, and threat simulators

The project manager for instrumentation, targets, and threat simulators (PM ITTS) will manage the research, development, design, acquisition, fielding, modification, and capability accounting of targets used for development and operational test and evaluation and training for the U.S. Army.

1-22. Users of threat representative targets

Users of threat representative targets will —

a. Coordinate with the PM ITTS during the concept exploration phase, or as soon as the requirement is identified, on possible threat representative target requirements.

b. Include the PM ITTS (ATTN: AMCPM-ITTS-T, 12350 Research Parkway, Orlando, FL 32826-3276) on the Test Integration Working Group (TIWG) distribution list.

c. Coordinate requirements with PM ITTS as program changes occur.

1-23. Commander, U.S. Aviation Missile Command U.S. Army Aviation and Missile Life Cycle Management Command

The commander , U.S. Aviation Missile Command U.S. Army Aviation and Missile Life Cycle Management Command will —

a. Coordinate and publish an annual AIMI supply bulletin outlining negotiation procedures, requisitioning and requisition processing, and stockage and excess disposition criteria to comply with current regulations.

b. Develop Army aircraft distribution plans per the worldwide aircraft logistics conference.

c. Advise ACOMs, ASCCs, and DRUs of advanced or delayed distribution forecasts.

d. Program, coordinate, and provide funds for distributing first and second destination aircraft between ACOMs, ASCCs, and DRUs.

e. Provide the proper fiscal year fund citation for delivering first and second destination transportation Army aircraft.

f. Issue instructions and arrange for delivery of new production, overhaul, and other aircraft.

g. Coordinate with affected ACOMs, ASCCs, and DRUs or major subordinate commands to obtain flight crews to deliver aircraft.

h. Set up maintenance and supply assistance for aircraft being flight delivered overseas or within CONUS.

i. Designate storage facilities, when required, for serviceable and unserviceable aircraft on ATCOM records.

j. Provide for funds and maintain aircraft in storage and on AMCOM records.

k. Recommend aircraft for international logistics requirements.

l. Provide guidance and management for the Army aircraft flying hour program.

m. Redistribute within the Army excess DLA- and GSA-managed items owned by the Army.

1-24. Commander, U.S. Army Safety Center and the responsible command

The U.S. Army Safety Center (USASC) and the responsible command will report and investigate aircraft delivery mishaps per AR 385-40 .

1-25. Commanding General, U.S. Army Training and Doctrine Command

The CG, U.S. Army Training and Doctrine Command (TRADOC), will —

a. Be proponent for TOEs.

b. Maintain the TOE master file.

c. Maintain the BOIP master file.

1-26. Deputy Chief of Staff, G-1

The Deputy Chief of Staff, G-1 (DCS, G-1) will provide technical details and advice on personnel-related data to be included in AMIS definitions.

1-27. Director, Program Analysis and Evaluation, Office of the Chief of Staff

The Director, Program Analysis and Evaluation, Office of the Chief of Staff (OCS), will —

a. Include directive guidance in the Army planning program guidance memorandum.

b. Analyze the TAEDP projected distribution of major items to assure POM requirements and Chief of Staff, U.S. Army, guidance have been satisfied.

c. Review the overall program execution of the approved Army equipment distribution plans by IMMs and the ACOMs, ASCCs, and DRUs.

1-28. Heads of Army staff agencies, commanding generals of major Army commands , and program executive officers

Heads of Army staff agencies, CGs of ACOMs, ASCCs, and DRUs, and program executive officers (PEOs) will assist the DCS, G-3 concerning the content of AMIS.

1-29. Headquarters, Department of the Army, Chief Information Officer/G-6

The Headquarters, Department of the Army, Chief Information Officer/G-6 (CIO/G-6) will ensure that AMIS agrees with both the Army Information Architecture and the Army Information Management Program ( AR 25-1 ).

1-30. Commander, U.S. Army Medical Materiel Agency

Subject to policies, programs, and controls over principal and secondary items as directed by HQDA and OTSG, U.S. Army Medical Materiel Agency (USAMMA).

a. Provides logistics support for health care mission worldwide.

b. Develops and implements innovative logistics concepts and technological advances.

c. Acts as the primary Army focal point for acquisition and sustainment of medical materiel and technology.

d. Functions as the Army service item control center (SICC) for medical, dental and veterinary equipment and supplies. As the SICC, performs those functions delineated in all chapters of this regulation relative to medical, dental and veterinary materiel.

e. Performs medical materiel functions assigned by the Surgeon General (TSG), MEDCOM, and USAMRMC to support medical supply operations.

f. Serves as the medical logistician and non-developmental item mission assignee for the medical materiel acquisition process.

g. Provides automatic data processing (ADP) in support of USAMMA unique systems.

h. Manages the MEDCASE Program based on policy and guidance from TSG, MEDCOM, and USAMRMC.

i. Manages Army Medical Department major assemblage programs for medical materiel.

j. Monitors readiness of field medical units.

k. Executes the International Logistics and Security Assistance Programs. Including assistance to the Agency for International Development. USAMMA is the Army point of contact for the sale of medical materiel.

1-31. Director, product manager, sets, kits, outfits, and tools

The director, product manager, sets, kits, outfits, and tools, will prepare and maintain DA components list for sets, kits and outfits (SKO) for DLA/GSA-managed items. The address is Director, PMSKOT, AMSTA-AC-CTPM, ROCK ISLAND, IL 61299-7630.

1-32. Defense Logistic Information Services, Army Cataloging Directorate

The Defense Logistic Information Services, Army Cataloging Directorate (DLIS-A) will perform cataloging functions according to AR 708-1 and ensure that national stock numbers (NSNs) are assigned for Service item control center (SICC)-type, DLA/GSA-managed items, and that Army interest is recorded. The address is: Defense Logistic Information Services, Army Cataloging Directorate, ATTN: DLIS-A, 74, Washington Ave N, STE 7, Battle Creek, MI 49017-3084.

Section III

1-33. Deviation

Deviate from the requirements of this regulation only with the prior approval of HQDA. Send requests for deviation through command channels to HQDA (DALO-SMP), Washington, DC 20310-0500.

1-34. Management control review

Appendix B contains an Army management control review checklist to help inventory managers evaluate key management controls per this regulation.

Chapter 2
Integrated Materiel Management and Stockage Policy

Section I
Integrated Materiel Management Assignment

2-1. Overview

Integrated materiel management (IMM) provides that a single agent will manage an NSN. The integrated materiel manager (IMM) may be a Service, DLA or GSA. Management responsibility will be determined by the Federal Supply Classification (FSC) and the item management code (IMC) assigned.

a. An IMM is assigned for all items that are:

(1) Assigned NSNs,

(2) Items pending NSN assignment, and

(3) New items entering the supply system with FSCs listed in DA PAM 708-1, table 2-2 .

b. All consumable items will be assigned to DLA or GSA for management unless they are eligible for exemption in accordance with the criteria for item management coding in paragraph 2-3 .

c. Only those secondary items that fully conform to contract specifications will enter the supply system.

2-2. Integrated materiel management

a. The Component or Agency introducing the item will designate a Federal Supply Classification (FSC) assignment in accordance with DOD 4100.39-M, Volume 4.

b. Assignment of an item management code (IMC) will be in accordance with DOD 4140.26-M, chapter 2.

c. Nonconsumable items with multi-service use or interest will be assigned to the Service designated as the IMM. The IMM for these items will be designated as the Primary Inventory Control Activity (PICA). Other Services having an interest in the item will assign a central focal point to represent their interests, the secondary item control activity (SICA). Responsibilities of the IMM and the SICA are based on the nonconsumable item materiel support code (NIMSC) (AMC-R 700-99). The IMM and the SICA will choose the NIMSC jointly.

2-3. Criteria for assigning item management codes

The following codes are set by DOD 4140.26-M, and are used to identify whether items of supply will be managed by DLA/GSA, or retained by a Service or other DOD component for management.

a. IMC B - special waivers . Items, which have been, approved by the Deputy Undersecretary of Defense (DUSD) as special waivers to consolidation of IMM. Each group of items that meets this criteria will be called out in the explanation. This criteria permits retention by the US Army CECOM LCMC of items used exclusively on the Mobile Subscriber Equipment (MSE). Items that qualify under this criteria on the MSE system are all listed in the CECOM LCMC/GTE K023 contract.

b. IMC D - major end items of equipment . Items of such importance to the operating readiness of using units that continuing centralized, individual item management and asset control are required at all commands and support levels.

c. IMC E - reparables . Centrally managed recoverable items designated as reparable because the inventory manager considers repairing unserviceable items before deciding to procure to fill requirements (that is, repair is the preferred source of supply).

d. IMC F - single agency . Items controlled by a single agency for all Federal applications. These items include materiel controlled by the Energy Research and Development Administration or the National Security Agency (NSA).

e. IMC J - design unstable .

(1) Items in one of the following categories:

(a) Determined by technical decision to be subject to either design change of the item itself or replacement by modification of the next higher assembly.

(b) Requiring engineering source approval by the design control activity, pre-production testing, and procurement only from approved sources.

(c) Designated as an "altered item" on the drawing(s).

(2) Review these items for re-coding when —

(a) Another Service begins using the item.

(b) The design becomes stable.

(c) The item has been in operational use for 2 years.

f. IMC L - fabricated or reclaimed .

(1) Items fabricated at a military industrial activity for local use or direct issue to customers including the Military Assistance Program (MAP). This code allows management to be retained by the Service deciding to fabric the item at the user or support level.

(2) Items designed at and fabricated at Service industrial activities and not subject to procurement from civilian industrial sources. This code applies when the Service has design control of an item and possesses the only known industrial capability to fabricate the item, or has been unable to develop adequate documentation to permit procurement from commercial sources.

(3) Items obtained only by reclamation. This code allows the Service to retain those items for which reclamation, when needed, is the only source of supply.

g. IMC N - modification/alteration/conversion set or kits intended for one-time use . Items procured for one-time use in modifications, alterations, or conversions, with no replenishment planned. This code applies even for items with phased procurement. It allows the Service programming use of those sets or kits to retain management of them.

h. IMC P - nuclear propulsion . Items used in nuclear power plants or associated systems that require stringent technical or quality control.

i. IMC W - Foreign military sales (FMS) only . Items used only by security assistance (SA) program customers (that is, foreign countries and international organizations). These items are often called nonstandard or FMS unique items.

j. IMC Z - integrated management . Relinquishment of Service management of an item in designated commodity-oriented FSCs to the IMM (FSC manager) for management.

2-4. Interchangeability and substitutability

a. An item existing or entering into the DOD inventory may be interchangeable with or substitutable for another item.

b. Items will be grouped into "families" based on their interchangeability and substitutability (I&S) relationships. An I&S family is an entity of items which possess physical and functional characteristics such as to provide comparable performance for a given requirement under given conditions. If two items can be used in all applications, then the items are interchangeable. An item is substitutable if capable of being exchanged for another item only under specified conditions or for particular applications. One NSN will be designated as the "master" or "preferred" item or "head of family". Other items in the family will be designated as "related".

c. Each I&S family will be assigned to a single management activity (IMM).

d. The IMM may not establish or change I&S relationships without collaborating the proposed change with all other registered users of the item. The relationship will be recorded in the Total Item Record (TIR).

e. The IMM will ensure that new items that will be related to existing items will not be fielded until the family relationship has been established in the PMR and NSNMDR and broadcast in FEDLOG.

f. I&S family structures and coding will be in accordance with AMC-R 700-30. Cataloging will be in accordance with AR 708-1 .

g. Cryptologic and nuclear items are excluded from the DOD I&S System.

2-5. Defense Inactive Item Program

Inactive items in the Federal Cataloging System will be deleted in accordance with the Defense Inactive Item Program in AR 708-1, paragraph 9-2 .

Section II
Stockage Criteria

2-6. Stockage review frequency

Wholesale stockage levels will be reviewed at least annually.

2-7. Part-numbered items

Part-numbered items will not be stocked or centrally managed. When a part-numbered item is requisitioned two or more times in 6 months, request the national item manager to review the item to determine if it qualifies for NSN assignment. For those items that qualify for NSN assignment, the request for NSN assignment will be sent to DLIS-A, Battle Creek, MI.

2-8. Part Number Conversion Program

a. Part-Number Conversion Program (PNCP) is the source of the demand data for determining NSN candidates. The PNCP will include the following:

(1) Document identifier code (DIC) A05/A0E or A0B/A02 requisitions recorded at LOGSA.

(2) Local purchase part number demand data gathered by the central demand database (CDDB) at LOGSA.

b. Responsibilities —

(1) LOGSA will —

(a) Determine candidate part numbers for NSN assignment from the CDDB.

(b) Provide monthly listings to the MSCs on the part numbers meeting selection criteria.

(c) Provide special reports and data extracts as required.

(d) Maintain and input monthly status updates to the PNCP master file.

(e) Maintain remote terminal access to the PNCP through the Customer Information Control System (CICS).

(f) Prepare monthly management reports and listings.

(g) Validate input from the MSCs.

(h) Maintain a status code index.

(2) AMC MSCs will —

(a) Identify candidates with NSNs already assigned.

(b) Ask for additional data from requisitioners when a part number cannot be initially identified.

(c) Include responses from requisitioners in the data package for the part number.

(d) Determine part numbers to be assigned NSNs.

(e) Update computer records to reflect item changes.

(f) Develop technical data for part numbers to be assigned NSNs.

(g) Request NSN assignment from DLIS.

(h) Provide monthly status and update to LOGSA for all part numbers under review.

(i) Monitor local implementation of PNCP.

(j) Evaluate timeliness of actions taken by the command.

(k) Record Army interest in the Defense Integrated Data System for all part number demands that are identified to a valid NSN.

(3) Headquarters, AMC will —

(a) Evaluate responsiveness of program participants.

(b) Review monthly management reports from LOGSA.

(c) Request appropriate corrective action from program participants.

c. Criteria for NSN request. An NSN will be requested for a part number identified through the PNCP when any of the following conditions are met:

(1) Two valid recurring demands are received in 180 days.

(2) The item is essential for stockage at any level.

(3) The item has source code P.

(4) NSN assignment is required for other logistics support requirements.

2-9. Local purchase items

a. Local purchase is the preferred method of supply for the following:

(1) Parts for commercial non-tactical vehicles (CONUS, Alaska, and Hawaii only).

(2) Parts for nonstandard training equipment.

(3) Parts for office machines and equipment and expendable supplies.

(4) Parts, with unit cost under $1,000, for closed-circuit television networks.

(5) Parts and supplies for roadside repair of Army vehicles and equipment.

(6) Repair parts for other nonstandard items of equipment that are not supported by the wholesale supply system.

(7) Commercial commissary equipment and supplies.

(8) Commercial parts, supplies, and non-cataloged tools and equipment for real property maintenance, repair, and construction projects.

(9) Non-cataloged drugs and medical supplies per AR 40-61, chapter 3 .

(10) Non-cataloged supplies and equipment for chemical warfare and other special training.

(11) Courtesy card purchases, toll tickets and tokens, books, magazines, periodicals, and decals for privately owned vehicles.

(12) Materiel to meet bona fide emergencies when delivery from wholesales sources will not meet emergency needs.

(13) Parts required for support of nontactical oriented management information systems.

(14) Items specifically authorized by HQDA for local purchase under special oversea programs (for example, Buy U.S. Here (BUSH) contract items).

(15) Repair parts in support of commercial construction equipment (CCE) and materials handling equipment (MHE) (CONUS only).

(16) Commercially developed audiovisual software products (for example, audio records, cassettes, or disks; films or filmstrips; slide sets; video-cassettes or disks), commercial computer software, or art objects or prints for libraries established by AR 735-17 .

b. MSCs, the U. S. Army Support Activity, Philadelphia (USASPTAP), or the U.S. Army Medical Materiel Agency (USAMMA) may authorize an item for one-time local purchase when it meets all of the following criteria:

(1) Stock is not and will not be available for issue within 18 months.

(2) The item is required immediately, and the requirement can be satisfied sooner through local purchase than by requisition through central management and procurement.

c. Procurement appropriation funds will be provided when the MSC authorizes an Army customer to purchase PA-funded items locally.

d. Local purchase authorizations only (not funds) will be provided for SMA items.

e. Local purchase authority may be granted for OMA items. The customer must provide funding.

f. The Chief of the Product Center or the Hardware Director is the approval authority at the MSC for one-time local purchases.

g. AR 710-2 governs local purchases at retail levels.

2-10. Management determination logic schematic

Items not eligible for automatic local purchase will be matched against the management determination logic schematic (see fig 2-1 ) to determine if an item can be stocked at the sustainment or national level. Once an item is identified as eligible for stockage, the COSDIF model (see para 2-11 ) will be used for further analysis.

a. Items may be stocked at the sustainment or national level, if they meet any of the following management logic:

(1) They are acquired with Government-controlled specifications or drawings.

(2) The item is terminal. Terminal items are those that are being replaced and have no additional DA users or security-assistance program requirements. These items are issued until stock is exhausted. Acquisition is not authorized for terminal items. Each MSC will ensure that such items are used or eliminated from the supply system as quickly and economically as possible. If a terminal item is stocked only for security assistance programs, it may be offered for a life-of-type buy (see para 2-13 ) to FMS customers.

(3) The item is classified as confidential, secret, or top secret.

(4) It is a Special program item, such as those controlled by the Nuclear Regulatory Commission (NRC), NSA, or the Defense Nuclear Agency (DNA) project management offices because of design characteristics or special test, inspection, or quality control requirements.

(5) Its source, maintenance, and recoverability code indicates repair/disposition above field maintenance level.

(6) Its conformance to technical requirements can only be determined by inspection at the supply source.

(7) It requires special packaging beyond normal commercial practice that cannot be obtained through local purchase. However, special-packaging requirements for shipment overseas cannot be the sole basis for wholesale stockage.

b. Items will not be eligible for wholesale stockage if the source of supply is "fabricate as needed."

c. Items offered or sold by a supplier to the civilian market or to industry for civil use are commercial items. The following criteria apply:

(1) Commercial items for which delivery to local purchase offices through the commercial distribution system is longer than 30 days may be stocked at the sustainment or national level.

(2) Commercial items that are normally available to local purchasing offices in sufficient quantities within 30 days and that have an annual demand amounting to less than $2,000 will not be stocked at the sustainment or national level.

Figure 2-1. Management Determination Logic Schematic

2-11. Cost differential

The cost differential (COSDIF) model is designed to make stockage decisions automatically based on economic and supply performance factors. The COSDIF model shows whether an item is economical to stock by comparing the cost of stocking an item to the cost of not stocking it and later needing it. An implied shortage cost attributable to delay in satisfying a demand will be included in the cost of being out of stock. Important variables in the COSDIF model are described below.

a. The variable cost to procure.

(1) The variable cost to procure is the sum of costs associated with determining requirements, processing purchase requests, and completing contract actions. This cost must be accurate since understating or overstating its value can cause large variances in the COSDIF model.

(2) To assist in identifying the variable cost to procure, all applicable cost elements and a method for developing and updating this cost are shown in appendix C, sec I . Each MSC must develop separate costs for each type of procurement action identified below.

(a) Call-type contracts (active contracts requiring only placement of an order to fill a requirement rapidly) and basic-ordering agreements that have prices negotiated in advance.

(b) Contracts with a value of less than $100,000 that use negotiated, advertised, or other procurement methods.

(c) Contracts with a value of $100,000 or more.

(3) Use only variable costs to determine the variable cost to procure. These costs include all associated costs that are not fixed. Fixed costs are those judged to remain constant if 50 percent of the workload is eliminated. Examples of fixed costs are as follows:

(a) Costs of setting up the basic file and maintaining the follow-on file.

(b) Negotiation costs related to call-type contracts.

(c) Cost of the mechanized system used to select items in a reorder position; however, output from these machines is considered a variable cost.

(4) Do not exclude costs from the cost computation because of unknowns. When firm data are not available, support all estimates with valid assumptions and indicate that you have done so.

(5) Review elements within the variable cost to procure at least annually (15 Nov) or whenever a significant change occurs. Use increases in labor costs to update that portion of the variable cost to procure. AMC (AMCLG-LS) will approve changes to the variable cost to procure.

b. The variable cost to hold.

(1) The variable cost to hold is the sum of costs associated with inventory losses, storage, obsolescence, and return on investment lost by the private sector when the Government invests capital in inventory. Identify these costs in detail.

(2) The MSC will review elements within the variable cost to hold at least annually (15 Aug) or whenever a significant change in the obsolescence rate occurs. AMC (AMCLG-LS) will approve changes to the variable cost to hold.

(3) Base the cost of losses from obsolescence or other losses on a smoothed rate. The base period will be no less than 3 and no more than 5 years' historical data.

(4) The functional elements and a method of calculation for the variable cost to hold are in appendix C, sec II .

c. Demand frequency and cost decision policy. Items receiving 12 or more demands per year migrate to stocked inventory management processing codes and are automatically stocked at the sustainment or national level. Items receiving fewer than 12 demands per year will be stocked as demand-supported if the COSDIF model produces a negative COSDIF value. Items for which the cost of being out of stock is equal to or exceeds the cost of holding stock shall be stocked at the sustainment or national level. Categorize such items as "demand based" because the forecast of demands forms the basis for determining that stockage is economical.

d. Unique elements.

(1) Issue cost. The cost of picking, packing, containerizing, and second-destination freight charges.

(2) Receipt cost. The cost of the depot receiving operation including unloading, receiving, quality assurance, and stock locating operations.

(3) Probability of demand. The probability of a demand being received during a 2-year period.

e. Calculation of implied stockage costs (Delta).

(1) The implied stockage cost (Delta) is the COSDIF model tool that varies the demand accommodation rate. Develop Delta values by each AMC MSC for an overall accommodation target of 85 percent. Update Delta values at least annually (15 Nov).

(2) AMC MSCs may also develop separate values for any weapon system or end item requiring worldwide operational readiness above a target of 85 percent. These weapon systems and end items are listed in AR 220-1, appendixes B and C .

f. The COSDIF model. This model is also used to decide if an item will be kept or deleted from the wholesale stockage list. The following criteria are used:

(1) Delete items from the wholesale stockage list when their cost differential (cost of stocking minus cost of not stocking) is greater than $10.

(2) Keep items on the wholesale stockage list if their cost differential is less than $10.

(3) Screen items not qualifying for stockage against security assistance programs and maintenance overhaul requirements. If no requirement exists and the item has been in the system for 3 years, change it to a non-stocked category. Process non-qualifying items with a demand frequency of three or more per year offline for review as numeric stockage objective (NSO) or insurance candidates. Apply non-stocked items against the economic retention model (see chap 4 ) and contingency retention requirements (see chap 4 ), transfer them (see chap 2, sec IV , or dispose of them (see chap 3, sec VI ).

2-12. Numeric stockage objective and insurance items

Numeric stockage objective (NSO) and insurance items are stocked and controlled at the sustainment or national level, regardless of COSDIF results. These items fall into one of the following categories:

a. NSO1 items include one-time or nonrecurring requirements. Examples are as follows:

(1) Modification kits.

(2) Set assemblies.

(3) High-cost items used only in maintenance overhaul programs.

(4) Life-of-type (LOT) buys (see para 2-12 ).

(5) Items that support low-density equipment.

b. NSO2 items are essential to accomplish a military mission, readiness-oriented, or required for personal safety or legal reasons that are not qualified for stockage under the COSDIF model. These items must be stocked, since non-availability would affect the readiness condition of essential weapon systems or end items.

c. Insurance items are mission-essential or readiness-oriented systems or end items and facilities equipment that maintenance engineers do not expect to fail (with source code PB). These items must be stocked because if they did fail, their non-availability because of long lead times would significantly affect the readiness of essential weapon systems or end items.

2-13. Diminishing manufacturing sources and materiel shortages

Diminishing manufacturing sources and materiel shortages (DMSMS) is the loss or impending loss of manufacturing sources, or suppliers of items, or raw materiels. DMSMS can occur at any point in the life cycle of a weapon system. It occurs when the last known manufacturer ceases production on an item required to repair or build an Army system. Army policy on DMSMS is contained in AR 700-90, chapter 3 .

a. Each AMC MSC will identify and act to reduce the impact on DOD acquisition and logistics support effectiveness when a system's development, production, or post-production support capability is endangered by non-availability. Non-availability can include failure, safety alerts, improper calibration and DMSMS.

b. AMC (AMCRDA) will designate a focal point to plan and coordinate Army actions to reduce the impact of DMSMS in accordance with DODI 5000.2 .

c. Each AMC MSC will designate a point of contact that has responsibilities for DMSMS projects in accordance with AR 700-90 , AMC PAM 5-23, and DOD 4140.1-R. Such actions include, but are not limited to, the following:

(1) Participating in post-production support planning conducted as part of the Integrated Logistics Support (ILS) program and documented in the ILS Plan (ILSP).

(2) Promoting technical efforts (for example, the use of emulation and generic arrays) and non-technical efforts (for example, sharing Government and industry reports on DMSMS) that will neutralize or reduce DMSMS.

(3) Ensuring, as much as practical through parts screening for potential technology obsolescence, that identified DMSMS items are not included in DOD systems during design, redesign, or production. This includes screening parts for current obsolescence, and for items that may be obsolete within the near future (1-5 years) and assessing the vulnerability of the parts to become obsolete. If an identified DMSMS item cannot be eliminated during these stages, the procuring activity must ensure that there is continuous part availability and post-production support.

(4) Implement the most cost-effective solution consistent with mission needs when an item is identified as DMSMS.

(5) Ensuring effective communication and exchange of DMSMS information within DOD, with other Government organizations, and with industry through maximum use of the Defense Supply Center - Columbus's (DSCC) alerts and warnings, the Naval Avionics Center's Microcircuit Obsolescence Management (MOM) Program, and the Government Industry Data Exchange Program (GIDEP). At a minimum, pass to these systems all information about the discontinuance of manufacturers' products and item identification, technical specifications, the name of the manufacturer, when the product will be discontinued, and if known where the product is used.

2-14. Life-of-type buys

A life-of-type (LOT) buy is one sustainment strategy for parts that are DMSMS. LOT buys must be approved by HQDA ODCS, G-4, SAFM-BUR. Items resulting from an LOT will be identified in the database with the appropriate codes (IMPC 1F and source code PG) to ensure LOT stratification of requirements and inventory will occur automatically in the wholesale system.

a. Consider and make LOT buys for secondary items required to support an end item when all other more economical alternatives to materiel shortages or manufacturing phase-outs have been exhausted.

b. Assign secondary items eligible for LOT buys that are not assigned for IMM to the IMM of the end item or system they support.

(1) The IMM will fund the portion of the buy needed for initial spares after the DOD component support date and for replenishment stockage for the life of the end item.

(2) The end item program manager will fund the portion of the buy that covers Government-furnished material (GFM) for new production of end items and initial spares before the DOD component support date. The end item program manager will pass the funded requirement to the IMM, who will include these requirements in the LOT buy. If no IMM is assigned, the end item program manager will make the LOT buy.

c. Identify LOT buy requirements for GFM used in support of new production equipment separately from requirements to support maintenance.

d. The IMM will notify the requiring DOD components (sponsoring DOD component for FMS customers) of a planned LOT buy. The IMM will provide item usage by DOD component, any known application data, and a required response date for submitting LOT buy requirements. Base the response time for DOD components on the last order deadline given to the IMM by the manufacturer of the item.

e. The end item manager will validate maintenance requirements or GFM requirements before submitting them to the IMM.

f. Using DOD components will provide the IMM detailed data required for budget purposes and include justification for requirements.

g. The IMM will control the issue of LOT buy stocks. However, issues to DOD components may not be restricted or rejected based on original user requirements.

h. Fill FMS requirements by defined sales cases or CLSSAs, not by LOT buys.

i. Material may be placed in EXTRO to minimize the effects of excessive levels of inventory.

j. IMMs and supply components will estimate LOT requirements so that a one-time procurement of enough material can be made to last until the end items being supported are no longer in use. LOT procurements will include sufficient material to be provided as GFM for repair and for piecework applications in the procurement of additional systems, equipment, spare assemblies, and sub-assemblies. Before adopting the alternative, IMMs should consider the potential for criticism of excessive levels of on-hand inventory.

2-15. Assignment of the acquisition advice code

The acquisition advice code (AAC) is a one-position alphabetic code that tells the requisitioner how an item is acquired and identifies any restrictions on that acquisition. This code is used for field maintenance level acquisition only. AR 708-1 covers the assignment of AACs. These codes are in appendix D .

Section III
Materiel Support Requests

2-16. Supply support requests

A supply support request (SSR) is a document or group of documents submitted by a user or potential user of a consumable item of supply to an IMM to obtain IMM support. The SSR initiates user registration and obtains NSNs for new items of supply. Based on the SSR, the IMM must record the submitting activity as a user of the item in the Federal Logistics Information System (FLIS) Total Item Record (TIR) at DLIS.

a. Functions.

(1) The Service item control center (SICC) performs three functions:

(a) Before preparing SSRs, the SICC will correctly identify items of supply. Identifying information includes the commercial and governmental entity code, reference number, unit of issue, item name, and supplementary provisioning technical documentation. Screen the item with DLIS per DOD 4100.38-M and review match conditions to determine the correct NSN and IMM.

(b) The SICC will justify the need for new NSNs by using the appropriate reference number justification code when probable or possible matches from the total item record are not technically acceptable. Justification is also needed when an item is source or quality controlled or when non-definitive reference number conditions apply.

(c) The using SICCs may recommend that the IMM assign AAC J to items that have low predicted demands, that are known to be commercially available, and that are not required for system support of high-priority weapons, support systems, or equipment. Acceptance by an IMM (DLA or GSA) of the SICC requirement submitted by SSRs constitutes item management coding for such items.

(2) The IMM performs two functions:

(a) When the SSR is received, the IMM will perform item entry control using available resources (for example, provisioning screenings, internal files, catalogs, and technical information from the SICC). When possible, use the result of item entry control to accept, offer a substitute for, or reroute the SSR to the correct IMM rather than returning it to the submitter for resubmission. If possible, reactivate or reinstate inactive and terminal items if a standard, replacement, or substitute item is not available.

(b) The IMM will prepare Federal item identification descriptions for items new to the supply system using the technical information from the SICC, its own files, or from contractors. Obtain NSNs and provide them to the SICC. Record IMCs, user interest registration, and catalog management data in the total item record for all items.

(3) The SICC will determine requirements for items coded for integrated materiel management and will generate funded requisitions at least an acquisition lead time in advance to the IMM. The IMM will no longer honor SSRs for new items without funded requisitions. SSRs will be considered by the IMM for existing items already under their management. When acting as the executive Service during joint Service provisioning, the SICC will also include quantities needed to support participating Service requirements. Submit subsequent SSRs as initial or change transactions to cover —

(a) Equipment design changes.

(b) Follow-on provisioning of the same equipment from the same contractor under a different contract.

(c) Reprovisioning of the same equipment from a different contractor under a different contract.

(d) Requirements for the same equipment from the same contractor under the same contract with equipment deliveries spread over 2 or more years.

(e) Requirements for items not originally provisioned that are generated from requisition processing or requests for support from field activities.

(f) Requirements for different equipment that uses the same parts.

(4) The IMM will determine the range and quantity of items to be stocked in the wholesale supply system based on the forecast of retail and wholesale quantities and other information provided in the SSR. This determination will comply with chapter 4. The AAC will reflect the method of support. After assignment of the AAC, the IMM will determine the projected support date and requirements to meet the level of support needed for the SSR. Include the date of support in the acceptance sent to the SICC when the IMM date of support is different from the requested date of support. The IMM will acquire stock, if needed, to support the SSR requirement upon receipt of a funded requisition received an acquisition lead-time in advance of need.

(5) Budgeting and funding involves both the SICC and the IMM.

(a) The SICC will send funded requisitions to the IMM for retail quantities of items. The SICC will also budget for and procure retail quantities, if required, to support fielded equipment until the support date indicated in the accept advice transaction.

(b) The IMM will budget and fund requirements for items that are stocked in the distribution system of the IMM. The IMM will procure retail quantities of centrally procured non-stocked items only on receipt of a funded requisition.

b. Items not subject to SSRs.

(1) Medical materiel ( AR 10-64 ).

(2) Clothing and textiles ( AR 32-4 ).

(3) Subsistence items ( AR 30-22 ).

(4) Fuels ( AR 710-2 , DA Pams 710-2-1 , and 710-2-2 ).

(5) Ammunition.

(6) Items used only by a foreign country.

(7) Nonconsumable items (AMC-R 700-99).

(8) Nuclear ordnance items.

c. Items subject to SSRs. Items subject to SSRs are consumable items subject to integrated materiel management, including —

(1) Provisioning and non-provisioning items.

(2) Items already managed by an IMM.

(3) New items being assigned to an IMM for the first time.

(4) Initial and follow on supply support requirements.

(5) Items once used only by a foreign country but now needed by U.S. Forces.

d. Supplementary provisioning technical documentation.

(1) Supplementary provisioning technical documentation is required for —

(a) Technical identification of items for maintenance support considerations.

(b) Preparation of item identification for assigning NSNs.

(c) Review for item entry control.

(d) Standardization.

(e) Review for potential I&S.

(f) Assignment of IMC.

(g) Preparation of allowance and issue lists.

(h) Initial procurement from contractor, original manufacturer, or other identified source.

(2) Order of precedence of supplementary provisioning technical documentation is as follows:

(a) Government or recognized industry specifications or standards.

(b) Engineering drawings at least equal to levels 3, 2, or 1. One or more document identifier code (DIC) CXG (additional reference number) transactions will accompany unapproved drawings submitted as supplementary provisioning technical documentation to show all other known references.

(c) Commercial catalogs or catalog descriptions.

(d) Sketches or photographs with brief descriptions of dimensional, material, mechanical, electrical, or other descriptive characteristics.

(e) DIC CXF (item name).

(3) When available, submit supplementary provisioning technical documentation for all SSRs or offers involving items without NSNs or permanent system control numbers assigned. Also, submit supplementary provisioning technical documentation when the item is not identified by a Government specification or standard that completely describes it (including the physical, material, dimensional, mechanical, electrical, and functional characteristics). When supplementary provisioning technical documentation is not available, identify the item at least by commercial and governmental entity code and a definitive reference number, item name, and unit of issue to permit NSN assignment. Assignment of the technical data justification code in the request transaction indicates the reason documentation is not provided.

(4) Special requirements are as follows:

(a) When new items require control or quality assurance exceeding normal practices called for by the drawings and inspection specifications are submitted, includes a complete statement of the specialized requirements with the technical documentation for the item. A DIC CXT transaction can be used for this purpose when an item has critical quality requirements.

(b) When IMM contracting officers decide against sole source procurement, they will coordinate that decision with the SICC before starting procurement.

(c) When the unit of issue for a new item is nondefinitive, the technical documentation will show the quantitative measure for the configuration. For example, if the unit is a tube and the tube contains 5 ounces, the technical documentation will show that the tube contains 5 ounces. If a nondefinitive unit of issue is received without the required quantitative measure, the SSR is rejected with action taken code 70.

(d) When the reference number submitted for a new item is nondefinitive (reference number variation code 1), the technical documentation will provide descriptive information (as required by the ordering data section of the specification) for the IMM to assign an NSN. Do not change nondefinitive reference numbers to identify the descriptive characteristics part of the reference number.

(5) Note the contract number under which the technical documentation was procured, if appropriate, and the right to use (or any restrictions) on drawings and other documentation before submission (DOD Federal Acquisition Regulation (DFARS) Subpart 227.71). Also give the SICC and IMM activity codes, provisioning control code, item serial number, and date of request to speed filing and matching of technical documentation with SSR transactions.

e. Control of SSRs.

(1) SICCs and IMMs will use the same data elements for controlling SSR transactions, in order to detect or prevent duplicate SSR submissions. A SICC will not duplicate a provisioning control code-item serial number-date of request combination while the provisioning control code resides in any SSR files at the SICC. Required control elements are as follows:

(a) DIC - columns 1-3.

(b) Activity code to - columns 4-5.

(c) Item serial number - columns 43-48.

(d) Date of request - columns 49-52.

(e) Provisioning control code - columns 57-59.

(f) Activity code from - columns 67-68.

(g) Essentiality code - column 55 (Army managers enter).

(2) Objectives for completing each key event are in table 2-1 .

(3) SICC and IMM processing systems will allow external and internal functional followups when processing actions are overdue. Generate and transmit external functional followups within the timeframes in table 2-1 . Internal functional followups or notifications will require action to correct the error condition, provide the required advice, or take other action to process for any exceptional conditions.

f. Transmission of SSRs and supplementary provisioning technical documentation.

(1) If practical, transmit SSR transactions by automatic digital network (AUTODIN). When DIC CXBs are transmitted by AUTODIN, a DIC CXF card is required.

(2) The SICC will forward supplementary provisioning technical documentation required for part numbered SSRs (DIC CXB) to the IMM as soon as possible. Mark documentation per d(5), above.

(3) IMMs will send supplementary provisioning technical documentation to another IMM when passing the SSR. If the IMM decides not to support or pass the SSR, return the supplementary provisioning technical documentation to the submitting SICC.

(4) When an IMM must provide supplementary provisioning technical documentation for a part numbered item that is offered as a substitute, mark the technical documentation with the applicable SSR control elements before sending the offer to the SICC. This ensures matching the offer to the correct technical documentation at the SICC.

g. SSR processing instructions. Detailed instructions on processing SSRs are in DOD 4140.26-M, chapter 4.

Table 2-1. Supply support request (SSR) timeframe objectives
Supply support request (SSR) event Start Stop Objective (in days)
Deliver SSR to integrated materiel manager (IMM) Date of Request (See note 1.) Date received by IMM. (IDIQ) 15
Final advice, part numbered supply request Date SSR received by IMM Date advice received by service item control center (SICC) 60 (See notes 2, 3, and 4.)
Final advice, national stock numbered SSN Date SSR received by IMM Date advice received by SICC 25
Offer Date SSR received by IMM Date offer received by SICC 30
SICC's reply to offer Date offer (YL/YQ) received by IMM Date CX2 advice received 75
SICC's followup to a part numbered SSR Date of request Date followup generated 65
SICC's followup to a national stock numbered SSR Date of request Date followup generated 30
IMM's followup to an offer Date of advice Date followup generated 55

1. Request date will not be earlier than 15 days before the IMM receives the SSR.
2. Add 30 days to the objective if the SSR is rerouted (interim YC, YK).
3. Add 75 days to the objective if an alternate/substitute item is offered (interim ATC YL, YQ).
4. Add 300 days to the objective if a request for national stock number must be submitted to a North Atlantic Treaty Organization country other than the United States (interim ATC YH).

2-17. Stockage alternatives

a. Policies:

(1) Use only commercial distribution systems that employ AIT processes whenever possible as an alternative to both wholesale and retail stockage. At sustainment or national level, use direct vendor delivery from vendor to customer whenever cost effective and responsive to the user. At field maintenance level, use established supply sources (for example, DLA) when feasible. If not, then consider using local purchase authority for "just-in-time" arrangements.

(2) Consider items that may be good candidates for stockage alternatives. Such items may include, but are not limited to, the following:

(a) Consumables that are commercially available, bulky, hazardous, fragile, have a short shelf life, or have high turnover.

(b) Non-consumables available through existing contracts such as indefinite quantity contracts or GSA Federal Supply Schedules.

(3) Use market research to determine vendor interest and market availability, and to identify stockage alternatives such as —

(a) Commercial distribution systems in place.

(b) Commercial systems that distribute commercial items suitable for substitute for MILSPEC items.

(4) Expand application of indefinite delivery contracts when they will:

(a) Reduce Government liability for demand fluctuations.

(b) Decrease response time to the customer.

b. Consider all applicable costs (for example, second destination transportation charges and inventory holding costs) in deciding cost effectiveness. To determine responsiveness, consider timeliness and conformance with mission needs. Review these analyses at least once a year to ensure updated cost factors are used.

c. When estimating savings from inventory reductions, consider any additional costs of using commercial distribution (for example, increased item price and higher administrative costs).

d. Adjust depot replenishments to allow for decreased stockage requirements caused by direct vendor delivery programs.

e. Reduce intermediate and retail stocks by referring user requisitions to wholesale supply sources when consistent with mission needs.

f. Consider contract negotiation and administration costs when deciding whether local purchases are more cost effective than using established supply sources.

g. In deciding cost effectiveness of stockage, consider storage and shipment costs. These costs may include breakage, shelf life expiration, hazardous materiel storage facilities, and disposal.

h. Only minimum quantities of commercially available items should be stocked, and then only if cost effective or for readiness (for example, AWR).

i. Before starting a new contract decide whether administrative and lead-time cost reductions would make the new contract more cost effective than an existing contract. Also, consider responsiveness to user needs in deciding if a new contract is in the Government's best interest.

j. Do not duplicate existing commercial distribution capabilities unless necessary, cost effective, and responsive to mission needs.

k. Use commercial items when such items best meet user needs, even if current needs are met by MILSPEC items.

l. Use "family buy" approaches when feasible to make indefinite delivery solicitations more attractive to prospective bidders.

m. Consider delivery timeframes, responsiveness to user needs, and cost effectiveness in negotiating and awarding indefinite delivery contracts.

2-18. Special program requirements

a. Using special program requirements (SPRs). Policy on SPRs applies to AMC MSCs, SICAs, AMC overseas facilities, and ACOM, ASCC, and DRU project management offices responsible for controlling and initiating SPRs for materiel requirements. It does not apply to materiel requirements for which an AMC MSC is the SICA. This paragraph and appendix provides policy and procedures for forecasting intra-Army or interservice requirements for special programs or projects that —

(1) Are nonrepetitive.

(2) Cannot be forecasted by the wholesale item manager or ACOMs, ASCCs, and DRUs by using demand history.

(3) Are likely to result in submission of requisitions.

b. SPR objectives. The objectives of the SPR system are —

(1) Provide a uniform, Armywide system for providing requirements to the item manager to improve supply planning and support.

(2) Set controls and mandatory requirements for processing requisitions related to the SPR forecasts.

(3) Ensure quantities requisitioned are identified to and represent items within advance requirements forecasts made to the IMM.

(4) Provide an automated system compatible with other Services and DLA systems.

c. Preparing SPR forecasts.

(1) Forecast SPRs for programs meeting any of the following criteria:

(a) One-time training exercises or maneuvers.

(b) Nonrecurring repair or rebuild programs that are seldom or irregularly programmed or increased by 25 percent or more over the previous year's program. Forecast AMC maintenance programs monthly by depot procurement request order number.

(c) New construction (for example, prototypes, buildings).

(d) One-time alterations, modifications, or conversion programs.

(e) Initial issue of existing items (for example, outfittings, activations, and changes in authorized allowances).

(f) Initial requirements for special operational projects.

(g) Requirements for initial testing.

(h) Requirements for GFP.

(i) Requirements for infrequently planned support operations such as Arctic and Antarctic resupply missions.

(j) Nonrecurring support of authorized CLSSA programs (for example, initial pipeline stockage requirements in support of approved CLSSAs).

(2) Exclude the following types of requirements from identification as SPRs:

(a) Provisioning.

(b) AWR.

(c) Requirements for which the Service or agency has a recurring demand.

(d) Subsistence (all categories).

(3) Do not submit SPRs for items with the following AACs:

(a) F - fabricate and assemble.

(b) G - GSA-managed.

(c) L - local purchase item.

(d) K - stocked for overseas support (unless the requisitioner is overseas).

d. Submission of SPR forecasts.

(1) Limit submission of SPRs to materiel required neither less than 90 days nor more than 5 years before the support date. The support date is the first day of the month in which it is anticipated materiel will be requisitioned for the program indicated on the forecast document. If AMC MSC procurement is needed, delivery for an early support date may not be possible due to acquisition lead times (AQLT). Therefore, provide SPR forecasts to the wholesale item manager as far in advance of the support date as practical.

(2) Submit SPR forecasts on DD Form 1348M (DOD Single Line Item Requisition System Document (Mechanical)) by message or by letter. DICs and instructions for SPR transactions are in E-1 ; instructions for SPR forecasts are in table E-2 . When an item is required in phases (for example, 100 each per month), prepare a separate SPR forecast transaction for each phase and forward them to the wholesale item manager.

(3) Route SPR requests submitted by DD Form 1348-M to the wholesale item manager by the Defense Automatic Addressing System (DAAS). The DAAS will edit, pass, route, or reject these transactions and will send status or reject notifications to the originators using DIC DZ9 (status notification) or DIC DZG (transaction rejects).

e. Wholesale item manager processing of SPR forecasts.

(1) Item managers will evaluate SPR forecast quantities in terms of the following criteria:

(a) Risk of long supply assets being generated.

(b) Funding requirements.

(c) Supply status of the item being requested.

(d) Accuracy of past forecasts.

(2) Item managers will include SPR forecast quantities in the Requirements Determination and Execution System (RD&ES) computations. Acquisition of materiel to support SPR will begin one AQLT before requirement date.

(3) Item managers will respond to SPR forecasts within 15 calendar days by providing the forecasting activity an SPR status transaction per table E-3 .

(4) Item managers will use an SPR status code, as shown in table E-4 , to advise the forecasting activity of acceptance, rejection (other than for correction and resubmission), or other action required on the SPR forecast. By assigning the appropriate status code, the item manager can inform the forecasting activity when a funded requisition, DIC AO_, should be submitted for the forecast requirement.

(5) If the item manager receives an SPR forecast that cannot be processed due to wrong or missing data, the document will reject for correction and resubmission with appropriate status.

f. Follow-up on SPR forecasts.

(1) The forecasting activity may submit a followup to the item manager, per table E-5, when status or reject notification is not received within 21 calendar days of the date submitted.

(2) Where no record exists of the original SPR forecast, the item manager will process the followup as an original SPR forecast and reply to SPR followups with the appropriate status code shown in table E-4 .

g. Modifying SPR forecasts.

(1) The forecasting activity may submit changes to replace data in the original forecast document. Use the SPR modifier document to change the quantity, supplementary address, project code, coast designation, support date, and routing identifier, as shown in table E-6 .

(2) Item managers will respond to SPR modifier documents by preparing an SPR status transaction with the appropriate status code using the instructions in table E-3 .

h. Canceling SPR forecasts.

(1) The forecasting activity may submit an SPR cancellation transaction for a previously submitted forecast. Requests for cancellation will be for the total quantity applicable to the SPR. See table E-7 .

(2) Item managers will respond to SPR cancellation documents by preparing an SPR status transaction per table E-3 using the appropriate status code in table E-4 .

i. Accepting and rejecting a substitute item.

(1) Forecasting activities will take the following actions when the item manager offers a substitute item:

(a) When the substitute is acceptable, transmit to the item manager an SPR substitute item acceptance document as shown in table E-8 .

(b) When the substitute is unacceptable, transmit to the item manager an SPR substitute item rejection document as shown in table E-9 .

(2) Upon receipt of an unacceptable substitute transaction, the item manager will provide status to the forecasting activity on the item originally requested.

j. Item manager retention of SPR forecasts. Item managers will retain SPR forecasts until —

(1) The support date of requirements for which status code PA was furnished or until a requisition is received for all or a part of a particular SPR quantity.

(2) One AQLT or assembly time away from the support date when procurement or assembly is required (SPR status code PB).

(3) Assembly time before support date for requirements needing extra time for assembly is required (SPR status code PC).

k. Follow-on status. Item managers will provide revised status if the support situation changes significantly (for example, if the AQLT changes or procurement is required for materiel originally anticipated being available). In these unusual situations, changes are generally processed offline. The item manager will prepare status documents for the forecasting activity.

l. Preparation of SPR requisitions by forecasting activity.

(1) Requisitions (DIC AO_) for which an SPR forecast status code of PA is received from the item manager will contain demand code P in card column 44. Submit these requisitions in time to be delivered within time standards set by Uniform Materiel Movement and Issue Priority System (UMMIPS). Demand code P allows the item manager to control and apply the correct logic to the demand base.

(2) Upon receipt of SPR status code PR (SPR requirement is being deleted and the item is one AQLT or assembly time away from the support date), the forecasting activity will immediately submit a requisition if the requirement is still valid. Enter demand code 0 in column 44 and advice code 2L in columns 65-66. When materiel is not required to be released by 50 calendar days before expiration of the extended required delivery date, enter S in column 62. The S is perpetuated, and the estimated shipping date is the last day of the month in columns 63-64. In columns 63-64, indicate the number of months from the requisition date the materiel is required.

m. SPR document identifier/status codes. Table E-1 contains a complete list of SPR DICs and associated explanations. Table E-4 contains SPR status codes.

n. SPRs affected by logistical reassignments.

(1) When logistics management is transferred to an IMM of another Service or agency, the losing item manager will send an SPR status card with status code PV to the forecasting activity. Status code PV indicates that the item is involved in a logistical reassignment; the requester should submit a new SPR to the gaining activity.

(2) When the logistical transfer is to an item manager within the same Service or agency, the SPR record is forwarded to the gaining manager. A status to the forecasting activity is not required.

2-19. Nonconsumable item materiel support requests

AMC-R 700-99 tells how to obtain materiel support of nonconsumable items.

Section IV
Transfers of Assets

2-20. Transfers within the Army

Supply ASF assets excess to the approved acquisition objective (AAO) for a SMA division and a mobilization materiel category to fill AWRPS. Transfers are nonreimbursable.

2-21. Transfers between the Army and other Services

a. Transfer AAO assets as follows:

(1) Such transfers are reimbursable.

(2) MSCs will offer for transfer those assets that exceed the sum of AWRPS, requisite on-hand and on-order peacetime supply levels, and current fiscal year net issue requirements. Offer these transfers to Services with a current fiscal year procurement or repair requirement for them. DOD 4160.21-M gives instructions on offering assets.

(3) When an emergency requirement exists, the requiring Service will ask other Service managers for materiel availability on items not coded to a DOD IMM (DOD 4160.21-M). When materiel is available, the requiring Service will submit a priority designator 01-03 requisition and process the requisition on a fill-or-kill basis.

b. Transfer assets excess to the AAO as follows:

(1) Such transfers are nonreimbursable.

(2) Make assets within a Service's retention limit (other than assets controlled by DOD IMMs) available to fill deficiencies in the AAO. Report and identify such assets per DOD 4160.21-M.

(3) Make assets under the control of an IMM available to fill prepositioned AWR stock deficiencies as follows:

(a) The requesting Service must certify that the items are required to meet valid AWRPS requirements.

(b) Do not return items for credit to the IMM within 2 years after the date of transfer.

c. Make potential excess stock, except assets controlled by a DOD IMM, available to other Services for retention requirements when —

(1) Stocks so obtained will not exceed requirements for the program life of the end item supported.

(2) The managing Service will continue to store and maintain the materiel for economic reasons.

2-22. Transfers to allied forces

a. Transfer of assets within the sum of the AAO and approved force retention stock (AFRS) is reimbursable unless exempted by special acts specifically allowed by law.

b. Assets excess to the sum of the AAO and AFRS may be transferred as authorized to security assistance programs on a reimbursable basis at full standard price subject to (2) below.

(1) Transfer of potential excess and DOD excess materiel may be made in whatever quantities are determined by the receiving country and approving U.S. authority as most economical to the total extended requirements.

(2) From the appropriate funds, reimburse accessorial costs and costs to repair, rehabilitate, or modify assets not prestocked for specific security assistance programs. (See DFAS-IN Regulation 37-1.)

c. Transfer assets within economic retention stock (ERS), or contingency retention stock (CRS) strata only when —

(1) Such a transfer is required to restore normal U.S. support levels of equipment and stockage.

(2) Such a transfer best serves the interests of DOD.

d. Do not furnish commercial-type assets to MAP or Grant Aid countries without approval of the DOD Director for the Defense Security Assistance Agency (DSAA).

e. Assets may be made available under the FMS program.

f. The transfer of excess shelf life items is nonreimbursable.

2-23. Transfers to Federal agencies outside the Department of Defense

With the exception of the Department of Defense (DOD) excess materiel, the transfer of assets to agencies outside DOD is reimbursed at full standard price except when reduced prices are appropriate. Exceptions are as follows:

a. The transfer of appropriation financed materiel to agencies authorized by law to receive property on a nonreimbursable basis.

b. The transfer of excess shelf life items to civil agencies, which is nonreimbursable.

2-24. Logistical transfers

Logistical transfers will comply with AR 725-50,chapter 5 .

2-25. Transfers of cryptological materiel

Transfers of cryptological and communications security materiel will comply with NSA and Central Security Service regulations, AR 380-40 , DA Pam 25-380-2 , and TB 380-41.

Chapter 3
Inventory Management Control Programs

Section I
Component Items of Equipment Assemblages

3-1. Assemblage and component policy

a. This section sets DA policy for component items centrally managed by one activity but included in equipment assemblages managed by other activities. Examples are set assemblies assigned a separate NSN identification, such as common tool sets, radio installation kits, and vehicle winterization kits. Assign management responsibility for an assemblage to a single commodity manager. Medical assemblages and component policy is furnished in AR 40-61 .

b. Finance all secondary assemblages by the Army Working Capital Fund (AWCF). AWCF components of AWCF-funded kits or assemblages are issued free when the component is also managed by the kit manager. If the component is managed by another manager, it must be requisitioned on a funded requisition and paid for by the kit manager's AWCF. Medical assemblages may be financed with either AWCF or O&M appropriations.

c. Assemblages adopted for military use will include components that are standard items of issue whenever practical.

3-2. Managing assemblages and components

Management will assign logistic responsibility for equipment assemblages per AR 708-1, chapter 5 . When an assemblage contains components managed by activities other than the manager of the assemblage (table 3-1 ), the assemblage manager will:

a. Determine, program, and budget requirements.

b. Provide information to other IMMs on:

(1) Component spare or repair parts required.

(2) Changes in net requirements and the number of fielded assemblages.

c. Requisition from IMMs items required in initial and replacement issues of the assemblage.

d. Coordinate maintenance support requirements with component IMMs.

e. Initiate the recording of user interest in DLIS total item record files for components managed by another Service or agency.

f. Develop and coordinate assembly and disassembly actions with JMC, including funding depot workload requirements.

g. Medical assemblages are managed by USAMMA under the guidance of AR 40-61 , OTSG.

Table 3-1. Army focal points for items managed by other Services or agencies
SICA or SICC Items (DA Pam 708-1, table 2-2 ) IMM
U.S. Army Medical Agency, Ft. Detrick, MD 21701-5000 Medical, dental materiel, and veterinary equipment and supplies. Instruments and laboratory equipment. Defense Personnel Support Center (DPSC)
U.S. Army Petroleum Command, New Cumberland, PA 17070-5000
General supplies, ground support materiel, oils, lubricants, waxes, and chemical materiel.

Defense Energy Support Center (DESC)

U.S. Army Support Activity, Philadelphia, PA 19145-5000
Clothing, textiles, heraldry, and subsistence.
Nonmedical toiletries.
Electronic or electrical equipment and components
Electrical Wire, Photographic Supplies
Industrial supplies.
Automotive components
Laboratory equipment
Construction equipment

Defense Supply Center- Columbus (DSCC)
Defense Industrial Supply Center - Richmond (DISC-R)

U.S. AMC MSCs Consumable items and applicable MSCs are in DA Pam 708-1,table, 2-2 , and nonconsumable items are in AMC-R 700-99. U.S. Air Force/U.S. Navy/U.S. Marine Corps

Section II
Selected Item Management System-Expanded

3-3. Purpose of the Selected Item Management System-Expanded

The Selected Item Management System-Expanded (SIMS-X) implements OSD directives concerning vertical management and critical supply management of selected secondary items. SIMS-X applies to AWCF-funded spare and repair parts. A SIMS-X item is identified with a RICC D, E, F, or 8 in the AMDF. SIMS-X provides the wholesale item manager with visibility of assets and requirements for RICC D, E, F, and 8 items accounted for on retail supply activity stock record accounts. SIMS-X is designed to improve the use of assets in the supply system. The wholesale item manager can redistribute SIMS-X assets above the requisitioning objective on hand at field maintenance level Director of Logistics (DOL) supply accounts, when those assets have been reported to the IMMC for excess disposition instructions. Wholesale item managers may also redistribute SIMS-X items reported as excess by retail activities under Materiel Returns Program (MRP) procedures (AR 725-50, chap 7 ). SIMS-X reduces inventory in long supply and locates unserviceable reparables for overhaul programs.

3-4. Selection criteria

a. The AMC MSCs will consider including an item in the program if it is a controlled cryptographic item (CCI) SC IX or when all of the following criteria are met:

(1) The SC is II, VIII, or IX.

(2) The Automatic Return Items (ARI) code is C, E, R, or S (table 3-2 ).

b. Except for CCIs, exclude items meeting the above criteria from SIMS-X consideration if they are items —

(1) Individually type classified with assigned line item numbers in SB 700-20 and cited in authorization documents.

(2) With a shelf life of 1 year or less.

(3) Designated as obsolete or phase-out.

Table 3-2. Automatic Return Item codes
Code Description Definition
E Expedite - assignment criteria Priority 03 return authorized for serviceable to DDD and unserviceable per ARIL
C Critical - asset position below RO Priority 06 return authorized for serviceable to DDD and unserviceable per ARIL
R Regular - any item with repair as the only source of supply, regardless of asset position Priority 13 return authorized for serviceable to DDD and unserviceable per ARIL
S Special - special projects requirement Priority 06 return authorized for both serviceable and unserviceable to one location per ARIL
N NIMSC 5 items - Army is SICA Priority 03 return authorized for unserviceable ARIL
M NIMSC 5 items - Army is SICA Priority 06 return authorized for unserviceables per ARIL
D Delete - asset position is above retention limit quantity  

3-5. Selected Item Management System-Expanded reporting

AR 710-3,chapter 3 , governs SIMS-X asset reporting.

3-6. Selected Item Management System-Expanded actions

a. Item managers will use SIMS-X data to validate requirements and determine availability of items for —

(1) Not mission capable-supply (NMCS).

(2) Depot rebuild program stoppages.

(3) Retail requisitions.

b. If SIMS-X items are used for NMCS requisitions or depot rebuild program stoppages, take the following steps:

(1) Locate SIMS-X assets.

(2) Decide if the condition of those assets is acceptable.

(3) If there is more than one requirement (for example, multiple requisitions), decide which requirement to fill. Give preference to any requisitioner within the same theater of operation. Also, consider the force activity designator and the cost of transportation.

(4) Verify reported asset data (for example, quantity, location, DOD activity address code (DODAAC), and condition) with the retail supply activity. Verification may be made by telephone.

(5) Direct redistribution using authorized transactions per AR 725-50 and using AIT technologies if necessary.

(6) Ask the retail activity holding the assets to adjust the records.

c. If SIMS-X data are used to verify retail requisitions over the requisitioning objective —

(1) The item manager will compare that requisition quantity with the requisitioning objective and reported assets.

(2) The item manager will challenge requisitions using automated transactions and telecommunication messages, if necessary.

(3) If that quantity is justified, the item manager will fill the requisition after receiving a DIC DZA transaction to adjust the requisitioning objective.

3-7. Performance evaluation reports

LOGSA will prepare and distribute SIMS-X performance evaluation reports (RCS CSGLD-1874) containing the following information:

a. Part I - By ACOM, ASCC, and DRU (quarterly).

(1) The number of reporting accounts.

(2) The dollar value of assets available for referral.

b. Part II - By AMC MSC (quarterly).

(1) The number of referral actions initiated.

(2) The retail response to referral actions.

(3) The dollar value of referral actions confirmed.

c. Part III - By AMC MSC (semiannually).

(1) The list of SIMS-X items.

(2) The dollar value of annual demands.

Section III
Positioning of Stocks

3-8. Secondary item assets

a. AMC MSCs will position and manage assets within the national distribution system based on the following support requirements:

(1) OPROJs. Account for items required for OPROJs or contingency plans in the appropriate ownership or purpose code. Storage will be determined based on the requirements and purpose of the OPROJ. USAMMA will account for medical OPROJ.

(2) Depot maintenance.

(a) Just-in-Time (JIT) or other vendor-based methods will be used to provide secondary items required to support depot maintenance programs. Parts ordered from the DLA may be prepositioned at the maintenance depot to support the next 30-day maintenance program. These items will be placed on accountable records in purpose code F.

(b) Store unserviceable, economically reparable items at the appropriate maintenance depot. Store items repaired at maintenance depots at the maintenance depot. When backorders exist, ship repaired items directly to customers.

(3) Set assembly/basic issue items (BII).

(a) Just-in-time (JIT) component delivery is the preferred method of supporting set assembly/BII programs at depots.

(b) When JIT or other vendor-based support methods are not viable, secondary items required to support up to 30 days of an approved assembly program may be prepositioned at the assembly depot or depot activity. These assets will be reserved in purpose code F or W.

(c) On-hand quantities above the 30-day requirement will be positioned at the appropriate DDC in purpose code A.

(4) Initial provisioning. Initial provisioning items that are part of a total package fielding will be stored at the consolidation point for that fielding. Depot level reparables will be stocked at the national level only unless an exception to policy is requested and approved from HQDA. Stock positioning of those assets will be at the discretion of the item manager and the decision must consider transportation access as well as operational concerns and user locations.

(5) Issue to field customers. Susquehanna, Red River, and San Joaquin DDDs are DLA's primary distribution centers (PDCs) for the Army. Demand data dictate the range and quantity of items positioned at the PDC. MSCs will consider transportation access and AIT technologies, and so forth (for example, dedicated trucks) in conjunction with demand array to determine appropriate stockage locations for national assets. When appropriate, use direct vendor shipments to meet high-priority backorder requirements. MSCs will instruct vendors to ship direct to the DDD consolidation or containerization point supporting the oversea customers or to the installation central receiving point supporting CONUS customers. Vendors must include appropriate data (document number, NSN or part number, unit of issue, priority, "marked for" address) on shipping documentation and 2d bar code, OMC, RFID or some other AIT device per AR 725-50 . Rotate APS or contingency stock by normal issue based on instructions in Army operational plans.

b. These instructions do not apply to cryptological and COMSEC materiel. Except for major weapon systems and CE systems containing embedded COMSEC devices, all classified COMSEC materiel and unclassified CCI are stocked, stored, overhauled, issued, and disposed of by Tobyhanna Army Depot for all condition codes. Do not return these items to any other Defense distribution depot (DDD).

3-9. Ammunition

a. Position ammunition at storage sites to provide rapid, efficient movement to combat theaters in wartime and to training and prepositioning sites in peacetime. Storage sites must provide complete physical security for stored munitions and must comply with explosive safety standards.

b. Position ammunition from new production at plants, depots, and activities based on —

(1) Space availability.

(2) Mobilization outloading capability.

(3) Surveillance and maintenance capability.

(4) Response to customers.

(5) Dispersion of stocks.

(6) Storage and transportation economics.

(7) Compliance with security and explosive safety standards.

3-10. Requirements for additional storage facilities and services

AMC MSCs needing storage and handling services at facilities under the control of other agencies, within or outside DA, will send requests to AMC (AMCSM-MTI), 5001 Eisenhower Avenue, Alexandria, VA 22333-0001.

Section IV
Automatic Return Items

3-11. Applicability of automated return items

This section applies to wholesale and retail components of the Active Army, U.S. Army Reserve (USAR), and the Army National Guard (ARNG), and may be applied to —

a. CLSSAs with allied countries.

b. Interservice supply support agreements stipulated in individual negotiations.

3-12. Automated return item policy

a. AMC MSCs identifies items for the ARI program. They build an initial Automatic Return Item List (ARIL) with LOGSA (AMXLS-CIA). They also update and replace the total ARIL file quarterly. AMC MSCs must indicate on the ARIL the depot maintenance and storage activities to receive ARI unserviceable shipments. Table 3-3 shows the data requirements for update of the quarterly ARIL. Field level reparables (FLR) can only be added to the ARIL in October. Medical items for inclusion in the ARI will be identified by USAMMA, which also will manage the ARIL for medical items. All AIT devices will be integrated into the ARI program.

(1) Delete FLR only from the ARIL effective with the first quarter of the fiscal year.

(2) Request optional ARILs only when needed. An AMC MSC may request LOGSA (AMXLS-CIA) publish an optional ARIL (that is, between mandatory monthly ARIL inputs) when economically feasible.

(a) The request must specify the month for which the ARIL is needed. The requesting MSC must provide input to LOGSA by the 15th of the prior month. Late inputs will not be accepted.

(b) The requesting MSC must notify ARIL customers worldwide and LOGSA (AMXLS-CIA) that an optional ARIL is being requested.

(c) MSCs not providing optional input will have their portions of the optional ARIL drawn from the existing ARIL database by current automated systems.

b. Retail supply activities —

(1) Return ARIs per AR 710-2 and AR 725-50 .

(2) Expedite the return of ARIs per table 3-2 .

(3) Provide shipment notice transactions required by AR 725-50 .

c. Commanders of DLA depots and AMC repair facilities process ARI receipts per AR 725-50 .


(1) Accumulates input from each AMC MSC.

(2) Consolidates ARIL inputs into a single ARIL.

(3) Publishes and distributes ARIL quarterly along with the AMDF broadcast.

(4) Provides ARIL data required in table 3-3 .

e. DAAS provides LOGSA with an image of all ARI receipts per AR 725-50 .

Table 3-3. Automatic Return Item list input and output guidance
Column Description
1-3 Automatic return designator (enter "ARI").
4 Blank
5 Automatic Return Item code from table 3-2
6-7 Blank
8-20 NSN
21 Blank
22-40 ARI nomenclature
41 Blank
42-46 Materiel category code
47 Blank
48-66 RIC (DOD 4000.25-1-M) of "ship to" storage or maintenance depot(s) (Leave one blank space between depots if listing more than one depot.)
67-68 Blank
69-72 Julian date
73-80 Blank

. Add field level repairables (FLR) to the ARIL only in Oct.

3-13. Automatic return item objectives

The objectives of the automatic return item (ARI) program are to —

a. Speed the return of recoverable secondary items and selected repair parts to the wholesale system.

b. Maximize Army materiel readiness.

c. Provide responsive and economical supply support.

d. Avoid over-procurement and costly changes in depot maintenance programs.

e. Ensure the return of ARIs, regardless of value.

3-14. Automated return item selection criteria

a. The ARI program speeds the return of critical items (excluding ammunition). An item is selected as an ARI based on its availability and critical need to Army users. Table 3-2 contains ARI codes, selection criteria, and shipping procedures.

b. The criteria for selecting items for the ARI program are as follows:

(1) The recoverability code is D or L and the stock level is within authorized retention levels (AAO, AFRS, economic retention stock (ERS), and CRS). Depot level reparables (DLR) with stock levels above or expected to be above authorized retention levels may be on the ARIL if the only source of supply is repair. AR 725-50 , chapter 7, governs excess or unserviceable DLRs not on the ARIL.

(2) The recoverability code is other than D or L, and a scheduled (funded) repair program exists. Do not return unserviceable items with recoverability code Z to the sustainment or national level.

(3) There are critical requirements for the item.

(4) The item is special. Examples of special items are aircraft bearings and empty reusable shipping containers (para 3-23 ).

(5) The AMC MSC is the SICA for NIMSC 5 items. Return NIMSC 5 unserviceable (condition codes E and F) items automatically using priority 03-06 with project code 3AL or blank (table 3-2 ).

3-15. Field maintenance level retention criteria for automated return items

a. Serviceables. No ARIs are authorized for retention above the requisitioning objective per AR 710-2 . Do not retain non-authorized stockage list (NSL) items.

b. Unserviceables. Return items with recoverability code D or L, when determined to be not reparable this station (NRTS), regardless of asset position. ARI criteria apply if —

(1) Items are beyond the capability of direct or general support repair resources (for example, funds, skills, tools, and equipment).

(2) Items exceed the authorized levels of maintenance in AR 700-82 .

c. Items identified as Flight Safety Critical Aircraft Parts (FSCAP) should be identified by criticality code. Criticality codes for FSCAP are "F" for FSCAP items and "E" for FSCA-nuclear hardened items. Organizations turning in Army aviation items with one of the above listed criticality codes must request disposition instructions from the managing commodity command using the materiel returns program process. These items must have DEMIL action performed prior to being offered for sale at the DRMO.

3-16. Automatic return procedures

a. Ship serviceable ARIs to the nearest DDD. Ship unserviceable ARIs to the designated maintenance facility.

b. The retail supply activity will return the item as directed by the ARIL.

c. Sources of supply (SOS) or IMMCs will program, budget, and fund for second destination transportation costs of secondary items.

d. Policy for OCONUS second destination transportation for return of secondary items (second position of the MATCAT is 2) is as follows:

(1) The SOS or IMMC (SMA) will program, budget, and fund for over-ocean second destination transportation (SDT), port handling and charges from the CONUS port to the distribution depot. The SOS or IMMC will not finance OCONUS line-haul.

(2) The OCONUS ACOM, ASCC, and DRU will program, budget, and fund for SDT costs for OCONUS line-haul (that is, from installation to OCONUS port.)

e. HQDA ODCS, G-4 (DALO-RMI) will provide the following information at the beginning of each fiscal year to each CONUS and OCONUS ACOM, ASCC, and DRU:

(1) The appropriate fund cite to be used for the CONUS portion of SDT (SMA).

(2) The appropriate transportation account code (TAC) for the over-ocean portion of the SDT (SMA).

3-17. Receipt of automated return items at sustainment or national level

In addition to normal receipt procedures, activities receiving ARIs will —

a. Process returns with project code ARI ahead of normal receipts. Process unserviceable NIMSC 5 items with project code 3AL as ARIs.

b. Copy the project code ARI or 3AL and the fund code from the DD Form 1348-1A (Issue Release/Receipt Document) or the 2d bar code label to DD Form 1486 (DOD Materiel Receipt Document). This AIT enabled environment provides fast identification and credit response to reporting activities. Generate a materiel receipt transaction with the date of depot receipt, condition, and quantity of materiel received, per AR 725-50 .

c. Process receipts when serviceable ARI materiel is misdirected to a non-DDD. The accountable supply distribution activity will provide instructions.

d. Accept and process return receipts for ARIL NSNs as ARIL receipts. Insert the appropriate project code of ARI or 3AL into the receipt transaction document before reporting to the accountable supply distribution activity.

e. Process ARI documents/2d bar codes that do not have appropriate signal and fund codes with signal code D and fund code ZZ to post receipts to IMM balance files. Do not grant SMA credit for these ARIs.

f. Scan receipts/AIT device when serviceable ARI materiel is misdirected to a non-DDD. The responsible supply distibution activity will provide instructions.

g. Accept and scan return 2d bar labels from ARIL NSNs as ARIL receipts. Insert the appropriate project code of ARI or 3AL into the receipt transaction document before reporting to the accountable supply distribution activity.

3-18. Credit for return of Supply Management, Army items

The IMM —

a. Provides notification of the amount of credit allowed by materiel receipt status card (DIC FTZ) to both shipper and the Defense Finance and Accounting Service (DFAS) (DAO). DFAS (DAO) provides credit on the next billing cycle after receipt of the FTZ document. The shipping activity's finance and accounting officer will follow up regarding credit not received.

b. Provides credit for return of SMA items per DFAS 37-1 .

3-19. Disposition of automated return item components of major items

a. The IMM identifies by NSN all ARI components that must be removed before authorizing local disposition of the major item. This applies to depot "washouts" as well as other disposition of major items. The list of these NSNs accompanies each disposition instruction for major items destined for the local Defense Reutilization and Marketing Office (DRMO) or cannibalization point (cann point). All ARIs need not be removed from major items directed to DRMO unless the wholesale item manager has so directed. AMC MSC "strip lists" identify all items needed by the wholesale system. These items must be removed at the installation before disposal.

b. Retail and user activities will —

(1) Remove all ARI components before sending the major item to DRMO or cann point per the wholesale instructions.

(2) Budget for the cost of removing ARI components.

(3) Process materiel receipt transactions to field maintenance level accountable records for the removed items. Return excess items to the activity identified on the ARIL.

c. Depots and special repair activities will remove ARI components of major items "washed out" of the system during authorized rebuild programs. Report receipts of these components to the accountable supply distribution activity.

Section V
Special Commodity Control Programs

3-20. Managing ammunition

a. The Joint Munitions Command (JMC) Centralized Ammunition Management (CAM) Office is the primary agent for the Army whose mission is to manage wholesale and retail ammunition stocks as a unified whole. Centralized ammunition management maintains visibility of all stocks in CONUS and distributes all stocks in execution of CAM using supply chain management principles.

b. AR 700-19 contains policy on reporting systems for issues, receipts, expenditures, and firing attempts for ammunition.

c. AR 740-26 contains policy on physical inventory control of ammunition.

3-21. Obsolete or excess end items and targets

This paragraph applies to Active Army, ARNG, and USAR activities that procure, manage, and use obsolete or excess end items and threat representative targets to support training and testing.

a. Obsolete or excess end items.

(1) The types of obsolete or excess end items are as follows:

(a) Remote controlled vehicles (RCV).

(b) Vehicle hulls (VH).

(c) Manned evasive vehicles (MEV). Because MEVs are high-cost items, do not use them for destructive tests. Maintain MEVs at a high state of readiness, and recondition them for safe operation after each test project.

(2) The objectives of the obsolete and excess end item program are as follows:

(a) To provide suppliers and users with management planning documents and lead times associated with the requirements. These documents will include requirements in current DA tasking and planning documents (for example, the Five- Year Test Plan). They provide a basis for approving requirements, planning distribution, and allocating assets. They also help suppliers and users make decisions about programmed requirements.

(b) To provide suppliers consolidated requirements and more notice of those requirements to allow time to draw assets from DOD surplus.

(3) Obsolete and excess end item policies.

(a) Users, developers, and suppliers of obsolete and excess end items participate in developing and validating requirements, and in allocating and planning distribution to support training and testing.

(b) Base requirements on DA-approved planning and tasking documents.

(c) Use obsolete, nonstandard, or unserviceable items from Service excess and Defense Reutilization and Marketing Office (DRMO), except as noted in (f) below.

(d) Users will minimize destruction. Do not use medium tanks such as the M48 and M60 series, designated as MEVs, for destructive purposes.

(e) TACOM LCMC (AMSTA-FR) will provide users recovery and redistribution instructions.

(f) As an exception to the policy of using military excess equipment, standard and adopted items may be obtained by temporary loan per AR 700-131 and AR 725-50 for nondestructive training and testing only. HQDA (DAMO-TRS) and the AMC Target Supply Coordinator at TACOM LCMC (AMSTA-FR) must approve such loans. The lending activity will provide the user with operating and maintenance instructions.

(g) Return borrowed standard and adopted items in the condition received, less fair wear and tear, unless the terms of the loan specify otherwise. The user pays the costs to upgrade or replace damaged items.

(h) AMC must approve any destructive use of Army materiel before such use.

(4) Forecasting requirements, requisitioning, and distribution.

(a) All users will forecast requirements for a 5-year program by fiscal year, and update them annually (table 3-4 ). Send changes to Commander, TACOM LCMC (AMSTA-FR), Warren, MI 48090-5000. Send subsequent annual reports by 15 Sep. These reports will show requirements for the five years coinciding with the next programming period. Users will follow normal supply procedures to obtain end items and to ensure requests are identified and coordinated.

(b) Requisition obsolete and excess end items from TACOM LCMC, except per (c) below, using the five-year program forecast document. TACOM LCMC will coordinate all end item forecasts and individual requests.

(c) Obsolete nonstandard or unserviceable excess items within a ACOM, ASCC, and DRU may be used to fill an end item requirement within that ACOM, ASCC, and DRU if the owning agency approves.

(d) End item program-forecast data (table 3-4 ) from each user will include the following:

(1) Specific types of end items required (for example, MEVs, RCVs, or VHs).

(2) Intended use of end items.

(3) Inclusive dates of use.

(4) Required delivery date (RDD).

(5) Planned location of end item use.

(e) The command or ACOM, ASCC, and DRU must approve all requirements sent to TACOM LCMC.

(f) Document urgent requests for vehicles by writing TACOM LCMC (AMSTA-FR), and identify acceptable substitutes. TACOM LCMC will try to satisfy these requests by either supplying the exact item, or by negotiating with the user to supply a substitute.

(g) TACOM LCMC will contact DRMS per DOD 4140.32-M and other Services to acquire needed obsolete end items.

(h) Assets coming from DRMS are shipped directly to the user to meet the RDD whenever possible.

(i) TACOM LCMC will allocate assets to meet forecasted requirements based on priorities, procedures, and asset availability.

(j) TACOM LCMC will forward unresolved problems with requirements or allocations through AMC (AMCSM-PI) to HQDA (DAMO-TRS) for resolution.

(5) Budgeting and funding.

(a) AMC budgets and funds the movement of obsolete and excess end items, except for research, development, test, and evaluation (RDTE) users, to include the following:

(1) OCONUS line haul.

(2) CONUS line haul.

(3) OCONUS port handling transportation costs.

(b) Over ocean costs may be incurred by the Military Sealift Command (MSC). The U.S. Army Finance and Accounting Center will budget for these costs on a nonreimbursable basis from requirements forecasted. For over ocean and CONUS port handling costs, apply a transportation account code.

(c) RDTE users will fund oversea return and CONUS involvement of obsolete and excess end items per AR 70-6, chapter 1 .

b. Targets. All targets referred to in this subparagraph are threat representative targets.

(1) The objectives of the target program are as follows:

(a) Establish a single organization with which users coordinate target requirements for RDTE and training.

(b) Centralize requirements consolidation to eliminate redundant target development efforts.

(c) Institutionalize funding for target development efforts.

(2) Target policies are as follows:

(a) Users will:

(1) Send the Project manager for Instrumentation, Targets, and Threat Simulators (PM ITTS) all initial requirements for RDTE and training. PM ITTS is the preferred source of targets. If not available from PM ITTS, the user can satisfy target requirements from other appropriate sources.

(2) Present requirements at annual Targets Management Office (TMO) target conference.

(3) Help develop target requirements documents and specifications.

(4) Help validate and accredit targets as required.

(5) Base user requirements on program documents such as requirements documents, Test and Evaluation Master Plans (TEMP), test plans, threat test support packages, and system threat assessment reports.

(b) PM ITTS will:

(1) Consolidate user requirements for targets.

(2) Develop targets based on user requirements.

(3) Fund development efforts that satisfy multiple users.

(4) Coordinate all target operation, maintenance, transportation, and remote control support for the user.

(5) Arrange for repair or replacement of any damaged or destroyed targets.

(6) Help validate and accredit targets.

(7) Help user develop TEMPs.

(c) Budgeting and funding.

(1) PM ITTS funds development of those targets which have multiple users.

(2) The user funds development of targets if developed only for that program.

(3) The user reimburses PM ITTS for operation and support costs, repair or replacement of any damaged or destroyed targets, transportation costs, and any other user-specific requirements.

(3) Request targets as follows:

(a) Coordinate requirements with the TMO as soon as they are identified. Send requirements and changes to PM ITTS, TMO, ATTN: AMCPM-ITTS-QR, Redstone Arsenal, AL 35898-7458.

(b) Requests for targets will include the following information:

(1) The quantity and type of target required (for example, T72, BMP-1, or 2S1).

(2) Whether manned, stationary, or remote controlled targets are required.

(3) Signature requirements (for example, infrared or radio frequency).

(4) Intended use.

(5) Whether the requirement is destructive or nondestructive.

(6) Start and completion dates.

(7) Location of intended use.

(8) Name and phone number of the POC for the requirement.

(c) Datafax urgent requests to TMO at Defense Switched Network (DSN) 788-6457 or commercial (205) 842-6457.

3-22. Management of reusable containers

a. This policy governs managing Government-owned reusable containers. Simple cans, pails, containers express (CONEX), military-owned demountable containers (MILVAN), and other containers sized to the standards of the international organization for standardization are excluded. All containers will be required to have one of the AIT devices affixed to them.

b. Wholesale item managers —

(1) Code the AMDF for all reusable containers costing $200 or more as follows:

(a) Accounting requirements code (ARC) is D (durable). Containers identified in SB 700-20 may be assigned an ARC N (non-expendable). Commercial Containers (8X8X20) leased for movement of ammunition and/or unit equipment will be accounted for as nonexpendable equipment in accordance with with AR 710-2, paragraph 2-5a(10) . Further, such containers purchased per DOD 4500.9R-2 will be authorized on the applicable authorization document in accordance with AR 71-32, paragraph 6-3d .

(b) Recoverability code is D, H, or L.

(c) SC is II.

(d) Containers requiring intensive management are assigned RICC 8 or ARI code C or E. MILVANs shall be assigned RICC 2.

(2) Assign an NSN to each Government-owned reusable container. Commercial Containers which are leased shall be assigned a Management Control Number (MCN) for authorization and accounting purposes if the parameters of AR 71-32, paragraph 6-3 and AR 708-1 are met.

(3) Mark Government-owned containers "Reusable container, (NSN), Do Not Destroy." MILVANs and Commercial Containers (8X8X20) are not required to be marked in this manner.

(4) Provide containers as Government-furnished property (GFP) to commercial manufacturers for shipping instead of buying new containers.

(5) Designate repair facilities for repair or modification of Government-owned containers.

(6) Check the Container Design Retrieval System (CDRS) per AR 700-15, chapter 6 before developing new containers.

(7) Include MIL requirements in appropriate contracts, and file design features of each container in the CDRS.

(8) Allow credit for return of SMA containers per DFAS 37-1.

(9) Maintain asset visibility for empty containers on their accountable records.

(10) Record reusable containers qualifying for automatic return per paragraph 3-14 .

(11) Redistribute containers for maximum reuse.

c. The following policies apply to containers costing $200 or more.

(1) Reusable containers are assigned an NSN when entering the Army supply system. A combination NSN identifying both the container and its contents may be assigned. Use the combination NSN only as long as the contents remain in the container.

(2) Containers covered in this paragraph have the following characteristics:

(a) They are made of metal, wood, plastic, or other durable material.

(b) They are marked "Reusable Container, (NSN), Do Not Destroy."

(c) Unit price is $200 or more.

(d) Recoverability code is D, H, or L.

(e) ARC is D (durable). Containers identified in SB 700-20 may be assigned ARC N (non-expendable).

(f) SC is II.

(g) Containers requiring intensive management are assigned RICC 8 or ARI code D or E.

(3) See table 3-5 for condition classification.

(4) Policies for container use and turn-in are as follows:

(a) Use the appropriate condition code (cc A for special purpose containers) to return items for repair. Doing so provides maximum protection for the items and speeds them back into the system. Use a combination NSN if applicable. Code the turn-in document with the condition code of the reparable item.

(b) Do not send containers with condemned contents to the property disposable office. Account for the container (serviceable or unserviceable) on the stock record account.

(c) Preserve the condition of the container when removing contents.

(d) Turn in excess containers to the wholesale item manager or return to the carrier/vendor/leasor if leased.

(5) Use reusable containers to ship and store MAP and FMS materiel. The cost of containers used for FMS may be reimbursed. This option must be stipulated in the letter of offer and acceptance.

d. Use containers costing less than $200 as long as possible. Stock record accounting is not required for such containers.

e. Keep containers as long as they are usable. Turn in excess reusable containers to the supply support activity or return to the carrier/vendor/leasor if leased.

f. Policies on Government-owned refillable containers are as follows:

(1) Account for all Government-owned refillable containers, such as cylinders, carboys, and liquid petroleum gas containers, based on the ARC.

(2) List containers, including serial numbers, on records of receipt, issue, transfer, or loss.

(a) Maintain non-expendable containers authorized by an MTOE, TDA, joint table of allowance (JTA), or CTA on the property books.

(b) Turn-in containers when requesting refills. Justify not furnishing empty containers.

Table 3-4. Hard target requirements (5-year forecast)
Target Quantity Intended use Inclusive dates of use Required delivery date Planned location of use
Fiscal year
METT X (See note) X X X X
Fiscal year
METT X (See note) X X X X
Fiscal year
METT X (See note) X X X X
Fiscal year
METT X (See note) X X X X
Fiscal year
METT X (See note) X X X X

. Nondestructive quantity.

Table 3-5. Condition classifications for containers
Condition code Criteria
A - Serviceable (issue without qualification) in new, used, repaired or overhauled condition.
a. Interior is free of Stage 2, 3, or 4 corrosion and exterior is free of Stage 3 or 4 corrosion.
b. Container is not structurally damaged and does not leak. Gaskets and seals are free of defects and there are no missing or defective parts.
c. Paint is in good condition, allowing for normal weathering, shading due to touchup, and minor abrasions or scratches. Surfaces are suitable for applying required markings.
d. Hull is free of dents deeper than one-half inch.
e. Threaded components are undamaged and capable of being properly tightened.

E - Unserviceable (limited restoration). Only limited expense or effort is needed for restoration to condition code A (replacement of defective or mission parts and touchup painting). Restoration can be done at a storage activity and expense does not exceed 10 percent of the current cost.
F - Unserviceable (reparable). The container does not meet criteria for condition codes A or E. Cost to repair or overhaul does not exceed 65 percent of the current cost.
H - Unserviceable (condemned). The container does not meet criteria for condition codes A, E, F, or P.
P - Unserviceable (reclamation). The container does not meet criteria for condition codes A, E, or F. Repair or overhaul is not economical, but the container has serviceable components or assemblies that may be reclaimed.

Section VI
Disposal Screening

3-23. Screening items before disposal

Before disposal, wholesale managers will screen items against all retention levels, security assistance requirements, and the potential usefulness of the item. Make all disposal decisions in accordance with with the level of approval authority in table 3-6 . Do not segment supply actions in order to circumvent these levels. The appropriate review and approval level for any disposal decision must be based on the extended dollar value of all assets eligible for disposal, whether the materiel is at multiple locations or in multiple purpose or condition codes.

Table 3-6. Approval levels for all supply actions
Dollar level Approval level
Up to $500,000 Inventory manager (GS-12 or below, or equivalent).
Over $500,001 to $1,000,000 Weapon system or product line manager/team leader/inventory manager. Coordination with the PM is required.
Over $1,000,001 to $2,500,000 Branch Chief may co-sign recommended actions that have been reviewed and approved by the senior supply person in the branch. Coordination with the PM is required.
Over $2,500,001 to $5,000,000 Division chief. Coordination with the PM is required.
Over $5,000,001 to $10,000,000 CG/commander of an LCMC. May delegate approval authority to director. Coordination with PM/PEO required.
Over $10,000,001 to $100,000,000 CG/commander of an LCMC or delegated responsible party. Coordination with the PM/PEO required.
Over $100,000,001 HQ AMC.

3-24. Screening Defense Reutilization and Marketing Service assets for use

a. When feasible, use excess and surplus property before starting new procurement or repair. The IMM will review excess asset referrals for assets that will satisfy requirements. The IMM receives AUTODIN referrals from the DRMS through a special service as follows:

(1) Front-end screening of the item shows the IMM if excess assets that meet certain criteria (DOD 4160.21-M) are available. This gives the IMM a 21-day priority period to requisition assets before they are made available to other activities. Submit requisitions for assets during the front-end screening to DRMS if centralized screening applies. If local area screening applies, submit the requisition to the DRMO holding the assets.

(2) Final asset screening ensures the most use of assets. When assets are not reused as a result of front-end screening, start a final asset screening referral after the assets are declared surplus. This gives the IMM a second chance to requisition the assets before they are disposed of or offered for sale.

b. The customer may obtain information on assets available through DRMS in one of two ways.

(1) DRMS is available on the world wide web at for those with web access.

(2) For those without web access, the DRMS Customer Service Division may be contacted by phone at DSN 932-7197 or commercial at (616) 961-7197. Item managers may request that DRMS alert them if requested NSNs become available. Details may be worked out by calling customer service.

c. Data elements for DRMS referrals, IRIS inquiries and responses, and procedures for requisitioning excess and surplus property are in AR 725-50 .

3-25. Management of project manager-owned wholesale stock

During January and June, project managers (PM) will request a printout of their PM-owned assets by project code from the supporting IMMC. The PM will coordinate and review PM requirements with procuring IMMCs, weapon systems managers, and inventory managers per the checklist in appendix B .

a. Validate both quantities required and fielding dates in the fielding schedule. Provide the IMM and TPF points of contact any changes to the fielding schedule.

b. Check for changes in failure data, maintenance concept, or other factors, and change the fielding schedule to reflect them.

c. Review requirements in relation to the latest configuration. Ensure that on-hand assets are a part of that configuration. Establish required family relationships. Program modification work orders (MWO) for those items, which can be modified to the latest configuration. Dispose of all items that cannot or will not be modified.

d. Dispose of any low rate initial production (LRIP) models on hand for which there is no requirement.

e. For current and anticipated FMS requirements, review the following:

(1) Whether current FMS customers exist, and whether they have a CLSSA.

(2) The configuration of equipment they have, and whether their equipment will be upgraded the same as U.S. troops. Also consider whether spares have been offered, whether modifications will be performed, and whether we have supporting installation kits; test, measurement, and diagnostic equipment (TMDE); and other such support considerations.

(3) Whether cases are currently being written for new customers, and whether spares are available for sale to them from OP code 9.

f. For major items, associated support items of equipment (ASIOE), and component major items (CMI), provide any data interchange (DI) needed and all significant changes in deployment to the IMM. Review contracts for the impact of changes to deployment schedules or density. Review requirement documents with TRADOC to ensure that those changes are reflected in procurements and DIs.

g. Offer excess assets in OP code 9 back to original owners/IMMs for redistribution.

h. Schedule unserviceable assets (cc F) for maintenance if a valid requirement exists, making sure that funds and repair parts are available. Dispose of all uneconomically reparable items (cc H).

i. Dispose of any excess special tools and test equipment (STTE), installation kits, and MWO kits if not required for fielding and if there is no other valid requirement.

j. If any ASIOE, STTE, industrial plant equipment (IPE), installation kits, or other such items were provided to a contractor, issue disposition instructions for excess items once the contract is completed.

Section VII
Reclamation at the Wholesale Level

3-26. Introduction to reclamation

a. This section implements DOD 4160.21-M. It sets supply policies for controlling the reclamation of Army managed equipment at the sustainment or national level. See AR 750-1, paragraph 5-19 , for reclamation maintenance functions at depots with maintenance missions or contractor reclaiming sites.

b. This section applies to all Army elements involved in the conduct of controlled reclamation at the sustainment or national level. Excluded from this policy are the U.S. Army Test and Evaluation Command (ATEC) and conventional ammunition as defined. This section does not apply to ARNG and USAR.

c. All reclamation maintenance and supply functions will be performed in an AIT environment.

3-27. Reclamation roles

a. The CG, AMC, serves as the recovery program manager. The recovery program manager is the point of contact for DA and DOD activities. Address all correspondence for the recovery program manager to Commander, U.S. Army Materiel Command, ATTN: AMCLG-LS, 5001 Eisenhower Avenue, Alexandria, VA 22333-0001. Address correspondence for the alternate recovery program manager to Commander, U.S. AMC Logistics Support Activity, ATTN: AMXLS-RS, Redstone Arsenal, AL 35898-7466.

b. The Commander of each IMMC and each maintenance depot —

(1) Ensures that DA policy and program guidance on reclamation is uniformly implemented.

(2) Sets up controlled reclamation programs.

(3) Maintains, consolidates, and furnishes information required for the Army financial inventory reporting systems.

(4) Maintains programs for the timely return of the materiel obtained through reclamation.

(5) Designates a recovery program control officer (RPCO) responsible for the coordination of all reclamation programs and the resolution of any problems that may arise in these programs.

c. The Commander, JMC, forwards the reclamation program to the depot upon receipt of the maintenance procurement request order number (PRON) and funding from the IMMC.

3-28. Reclamation policy

a. Reclamation is —

(1) The preferred SOS to satisfy requirements within the AAO when DOD utilization screening has been applied, or when it is timely and economical to do so. However, monetary value is not a limitation if reclamation will satisfy critical item requirements or if new procurement is impractical.

(2) Controlled to ensure that a minimum number of end items are dismantled to obtain the components required.

(3) Given first consideration in providing assets for repair and procurement programs for the current year, budget year, and subsequent planning years.

(4) Funded per the applicable year per DA PAM 37-100-95.

b. Upon formally setting up a reclamation program based on a(1) above, component parts may also be reclaimed to meet requirements within the economic retention, contingency retention, and numeric retention levels when experience has proven that items cannot be obtained from commercial sources. Reclaim enough of these items to fill both current and anticipated requirements.

c. The activity requiring the reclaimed components will fund reclamation, including associated packing, crating, handling, and transportation.

d. Set up reclamation programs only at depots with maintenance missions or contractor reclaiming sites.

e. Normally, do not consider for reclamation parts known to have high replacement rates during overhaul if the end item from which they will be recovered is unserviceable. Do not consider for reclamation parts that normally become unserviceable during removal from the end item.

f. Priority reclamation orders (issue priority designators (IPD) 01-08) take precedence over maintenance programs with an equal or a lower priority. Schedule routine reclamation orders based on assigned priorities.

g. Do not use reclaimed assets to fill security assistance program requirements, unless the customer country specifically consents.

3-29. Reclamation funding

At the start of each fiscal year the IMMC RPCO sets up reimbursable maintenance PRONs for reclamation. These will reflect a best estimate based on the prior year historical data and a forecast of assets to be recovered through reclamation.

a. Set up one PRON for each routine reclamation program. Use the NSN assigned to the end item undergoing reclamation.

b. Set up one bulk PRON for each depot that performs priority reclamation. Structure the stock number field using the maintenance buyer code as positions 1 and 2 and "RECLAMATION" as positions 3 through 13. The maintenance PRON narrative will reflect the following statement: "Funds provided are to be used for priority removal of components or assemblies from end items or systems."

c. Forward approved PRONs through JMC's central workloading activity to the depot RPCO.

3-30. National inventory control point functions for routine reclamation

a. The IMMC RPCO —

(1) Coordinates forecasts for routine reclamation programs with the item managers, equipment technicians, and maintenance personnel. Fig 3-1 shows an overview of the documentation and materiel flow for a routine reclamation program.

(2) Compiles the save list for each end item from internal and external sources (for example, repair parts, special tools list, end item component list, automated programs, technical manuals, item managers, technical equipment personnel, and maintenance managers) to determine items that may be removed.

(3) Furnishes the save list to the appropriate component or assembly manager to determine whether current requirements could be filled through the planned reclamation program. The save list will contain, as a minimum: prime NSN, related NSN, quantities to be reclaimed, minimum acceptable condition code, related item technical data, control numbers, inspection criteria, and document number of each prepositioned materiel receipt document (PMRD).

(4) Sets up a reclamation program. The fund that will benefit most (normally SMA) will finance the reclamation program.

(5) Periodically reviews —

(a) End item assets needed for the routine reclamation program to ensure that they are posted to the accountable records.

(b) The asset position (for example, supply control study or stratification update) to determine if reclamation program quantities are still valid.

(6) Forwards the save list to the depot RPCO.

(7) Compares the DA Form 7420 (Parts Reclamation List) received from the depot RPCO to the save list to ensure the availability of the required assets when the depot program is completed. When assets are not reclaimed, the IMMC RPCO notifies the appropriate item managers so residual due in quantities will be cleared from the files. A copy of DA Form 7420 is on the APD Web site ( ).

b. The major item manager —

(1) Forecasts the routine reclamation programs for the end items and reviews the asset position to determine if the routine reclamation program is valid.

(2) Coordinates forecasts for the routine reclamation programs with the RPCO, citing the quantities and condition codes of the end items subject to a reclamation program.

(3) Provides specific authorization for all reclamation.

(4) Considers the costs of reclamation against the urgency of need and the costs of acquisition from other sources. The anticipated cost to reclaim and restore an item to serviceable condition will not exceed the current cost of the procurement. An exception is when critical item requirements exist or new procurement is impractical.

(5) Selects major items or assemblies for reclamation in the following condition code sequence:

(a) H - unserviceable (condemned/economically unreparable).

(b) P - unserviceable (reclamation).

(c) F - unserviceable (reparable).

(d) E - unserviceable (limited restoration).

(e) G - unserviceable (incomplete).

(f) D - serviceable (test/modification).

(g) C - serviceable (priority issue).

(h) B - serviceable (issue with qualification).

(i) A - serviceable (issue without qualification).

(6) Recalls major items or assemblies from DRMO when required for reclamation.

(7) Requests that the depot reclassify to cc P each major item/assembly in condition code H that has reclaimable assemblies or components.

(8) Initiates and coordinates the save list with the assembly or component manager.

(9) Forwards the requirements and PMRDs from the assembly or component managers to the IMMC RPCO.

(10) Sets up reclamation programs in Commodity Command Standard System (CCSS) under work processing code L0 using DIC BTG.

(11) Initiates disposal actions per AR 725-50, chapter 8 , on completion of the reclamation action unless automatic disposal is provided on the save list.

c. The assembly or component manager —

(1) Reviews the save list to determine requirements for routine reclamation. If there is a requirement, the assembly or component manager indicates the quantities of the prime and related NSNs, the minimum acceptable condition code, related item technical data, and condition inspection criteria if applicable.

(2) Sets up in CCSS the due-ins for assemblies or components to be reclaimed using DIC DFL/DWL. Assignment of the assembly order control number (AOCN) from the end item to the components enhances followup efforts. (See AR 725-50, paragraph 5-100 .) The supplementary address field on all due-ins from reclamation is as follows:

(a) Column 45: enter Y (constant).

(b) Column 46: enter R (reclamation order).

(c) Columns 47-50: enter the serial number of the AOCN.

(3) Gives appropriate consideration to shelf life items.

(4) Returns the save list with the requirements and PMRD numbers for each NSN to be reclaimed to the major item manager.

(5) Initiates followups on due ins as required by AR 725-50 .

(6) Updates due in records on receipt of rescheduling notification from the IMMC RPCO.

(7) Clears residual due in quantities and adjusts records accordingly when notified by the IMMC RPCO that depot actions are complete.

Figure 3-1. Overview of Routine Reclamation

3-31. Supply functions at the depot for routine reclamation

The supply directorate functions include working with DLA to —

a. Ensure timely movement of major items or assemblies to and from the maintenance shop.

b. Reclassify to condition code M end items transferred into the maintenance shop for reclamation.

c. Account for by NSN those components consisting of separate identifiable item configurations.

d. When the reclaimed assembly or component and PMRD number is received from the maintenance shop, input the receipt (DIC D6L) into the Standard Depot System (SDS) to account for the materiel recovered through reclamation.

e. Notify the depot RPCO of the receipt processing.

f. Process the major item or assembly from which materiel was reclaimed per instructions from the IMMC.

(1) If the basic configuration is still recognizable, disposal is under the NSN assigned to the original configuration and the appropriate condition code.

(2) If the original configuration has lost its identity and an NSN cannot be assigned, reclassify the item to condition code S (scrap) for disposal.

3-32. Integrated Materiel Management Center functions for priority reclamation

Use priority reclamation on receipt of a requisition requiring immediate action (NMCS, anticipated NMCS, or IPD 01-08). Accomplish priority reclamation as follows:

a. The assembly or component manager —

(1) On receipt of a priority requisition, coordinates with the major item manager to determine if an assembly or component with an acceptable condition code is available from routine reclamation. If not, determines the priority reclamation repair lead-time and the procurement lead-time. If procurement is impractical or the lead time for priority reclamation or repair is less, coordinates with the major item manager to determine availability from priority reclamation and the highest condition code for the end item from which the required assembly or component may be removed.

(2) Sets up in the Commodity Command Supply System (CCSS) the due ins using paragraph 3-32c(2) to develop the supplementary address field (columns 45-50).

(3) Prepares a draft priority reclamation message for the major item manager's approval to begin priority reclamation. Furnishes a copy to the IMMC RPCO stating the highest condition code of the end item from which the assembly or component may be removed. Give complete instructions in the message, to include:

(a) The message address of the appropriate major item manager.

(b) The message address of the appropriate depot RPCO.

(c) The noun, NSN, and condition code for the end item from which assets are to be reclaimed.

(d) The noun, NSN, quantity to be removed, and the appropriate technical manual reference for the asset to be reclaimed.

(e) The document number for the reclamation action.

(f) The materiel release order (MRO) transaction on which the reclaimed assets are to be shipped.

(g) Disposition instructions for the end item residue.

(h) The sending point of contact's name and DSN number.

(4) Cancels approved priority reclamations by telephone when assets become available from another source. Follows up a telephone cancellation by message. If reclamation is already under way or has occurred, processes the reclaimed assets as a receipt to the accountable records.

b. The major item manager —

(1) When asked by the assembly or component manager, determines the end item availability for priority reclamation and the highest condition code of the end item from which the required assembly or component may be removed.

(2) When a priority message initiating reclamation action has been received from the assembly or component manager, sends the priority message to the appropriate depot RPCO. Gives information copies to the IMMC RPCO, depot supply directorate, and depot maintenance directorate.

c. The IMMC RPCO —

(1) On receipt of a copy of the priority reclamation message, sets up and keeps a suspense file until a copy of DA Form 7420 , figure 3-2 , is received from the depot RPCO.

(2) Maintains visibility of the following:

(a) High priority bulk reclamation PRON as it is drawn down through the normal maintenance reporting procedures.

(b) Production and cost data provided by the priority reclamation confirmation message. This message will include the following:

(1) The message address of the sender, usually the appropriate depot RPCO.

(2) The message address of the appropriate MSC RPCO.

(3) Reference to the message requesting this priority reclamation.

(4) A statement that the priority reclamation has been completed.

(5) Receipt data for each document number by PMRD number, quantity, condition code, and receipt date.

(6) The number of man-hours multiplied by the labor bid rate to equal total man-hour cost. Other cost data may be included.

(7) The reclamation PRON and the cost to date for that PRON.

(8) The supply point of contact's name and DSN number at the reclamation facility.

(9) The RPCO point of contact's name and DSN number at the reclamation facility.

3-33. Supply functions at the depot for priority reclamation

The supply directorate, working with DLA —

a. Coordinates movement of the end item to the maintenance shop on receipt of the DA Form 7421 (Materiel Reclamation Movement Request/Return). It will also document any intradepot movement of the materiel in support of reclamation on the DA Form 7421. The depot RPCO initiates the DA Form 7421 to request movement of major items and assemblies to and from maintenance shops for reclamation. A copy of DA Form 7421 is available on the APD Web site ( ) and complete it per figure 3-3 . The supply directorate reclassifies to condition code M items sent to the maintenance shop for priority reclamation.

b. After receiving the reclaimed materiel from the maintenance shop, does the necessary preservation and packaging.

c. Inputs the materiel receipt (DIC D6L) into the SDS within 24 hours, and ship as directed by priority message.

d. Returns the reclaimed major item or assembly to storage with supporting documentation ( DA Form 7420 ) listing all items removed during priority reclamation.

Figure 3-2A. Sample of Completed DA Form 7420, Parts Reclamation List

Figure 3-2B. Completion instructions (by block) for DA Form, 7420 Parts Reclamation List (Start)

Figure 3-2B. Completion instructions (by block) for DA Form 7420, Parts Reclamation List (End)—Continued

3-34. DA Form 7420, Parts Reclamation List

a. DA Form 7420 is a permanent record of depot level reclamation actions on the major items or assemblies.

b. Prepare a separate form for each major item or assembly reclaimed and each time it is reclaimed.

(1) Prepare five copies of DA Form 7420 per instructions in figure 3-2 . The form will reflect all items missing or removed from the materiel undergoing reclamation.

(2) The depot RPCO will prepare header data. The depot quality assurance (QA) and maintenance personnel will complete the rest of the form.

c. When the maintenance shops have removed the item, the RPCO distributes the DA Form 7420 as follows:

(1) Give one copy to the maintenance shop.

(2) Place one copy in a waterproof envelope securely affixed to the major item or assembly. Mark the envelope "RECLAMATION RECORD." This copy will help in returning the major item or assembly to storage or to the DRMO. It will meet the requirements of DOD 4160.21-M and serve as a basis for any price adjustments.

Figure 3-3A. Sample of Completed DA form 7421, Materiel Reclamation Movement Request/Return

Figure 3-3B. Completion instructions (by block) for DA Form 7421, Materiel Reclamation Movement Request/Return

Figure 3-3B. Completion instructions (by block) for DA Form 7421, Materiel Reclamation Movement Request/Return - Continued

Figure 3-3B. Completion instructions (by block) for DA Form 7421, Materiel Reclamation Movement Request/Return - Continued)

Chapter 4
Requirements Determination for Secondary Items and Ammunition

Section I
Demand Forecasting

4-1. Dollar-value groupings

a. Secondary items are managed by dollar-value groupings (table 4-1 ). Assignments are based on the dollar value of the item's forecasted gross annual demands. Items will be reassigned to a new category when the annual dollar value varies from the previous dollar value forecast grouping by 10 percent or more.

b. Management review levels (table 3-6 ) will be based on the extended dollar value of the action to ensure that key item manager decisions are valid. Management decisions include the following:

(1) All supply recommendations or actions (buys, cutbacks, repair or overhaul, recalls, and excess or disposals) whether they result from the supply control study process or not. All disposal actions must be approved at both the specified review level and the next higher level.

(2) Setting up, reducing or terminating depot maintenance programs.

(3) Setting up, changing, or canceling procurement work directives or changing quantities.

(4) Correcting budget stratifications.

(5) Correcting data elements that affect demands, returns, or inventory levels. These include changes made to the repair cycle time (RCT), administrative lead time (ALT), production lead time (PLT), unit price, average monthly demands (AMD), programmed demands, and the unserviceable return rate.

c. The appropriate management level will review and approve actions in a and b above before they can be taken. The inventory manager review of available assets must be considered before requesting such approval.

d. The approval parameters in table 3-6 prevail over all other approval levels.

Table 4-1. Dollar value groupings
Item grouping Dollar value
Low $25,000 or less
Medium Over $25,000 to $100,000
High Over $100,00 to $1,000,000
Very high Over $1,000,000

4-2. Requirements determination policy

Determining requirements for secondary item spare and repair parts begins with initial provisioning. It continues through the demand development period (DDP) and throughout the life of the associated end item or weapon system. Requirements for secondary item spare and repair parts will be based on clearly defined weapon system or end item readiness objectives. Secondary items are grouped two ways for determining requirements. Items are either acquired before demands are received or only on demand. Also, items are considered either demand active or demand inactive.

a. Use available demand data to forecast requirements. Maintain demand data at least 6 years. Use the latest 2 years' history as an active database to compute demand.

(1) Demand and return history data will identify at least the following:

(a) Originator.

(b) Quantity.

(c) Date received.

(d) Type of transaction (for example, special program).

(2) The length of the base demand period may vary from a standard of 24 months by command, weapon system, and individual item (by exception). Convert past demands for the length of the base period into an AMD.

(3) Future demand may vary based on changes to program data (for example, operating tempo). Thus, a demand forecast may be modified by use of a program change factor. The program change factor is a ratio of future program data over a period up to the next 5 years divided by past program data. Use the same base period in the program change factor as in the demand rate computation.

(a) Using program data to compute the program change factor depends on identifying a repair part with each application and maintaining program data for each application.

(b) Use of program data allows orderly increases in forecast demands for items with increasing use. It also allows orderly decreases in forecast demands for items being phased out of the DOD supply systems.

(4) In some cases, gross increases or decreases in forecast demand may be called for. The standard system can —

(a) Modify gross demand forecasts.

(b) Switch to a wartime demand forecasting method.

(5) Separate demand forecasting techniques may be used for active and inactive items. Catalog averages (that is, similar item averages) for inactive items may be used to improve accuracy of the demand forecast.

b. When demand data are not available, engineering estimates or demand data for similar items may be used. Essential items have a minimum stockage level of one.

c. Known non-demand supported or planned program requirements (PPRs) will be added to the gross demand forecasts for a total requirement forecast. Examples of PPRs are initial issue, FMS, mobilization, and rebuild requirements. PPRs will be excluded from the computation of the AMD.

(1) When computing safety level, do not include program requirements (except for rebuild programs and Cooperative Logistics Supply Support Arrangements (CLSSA)) to forecast requirements.

(2) Incoming supply support requests and special program requirements for other AMC MSCs or DOD activities will be considered as PPRs.

d. Forecast both serviceable and unserviceable returns separately from demands.

(1) Use a program algorithm approved by AMC (AMCLG-LS) that is suitable to the timeframe being predicted.

(2) Forecast unserviceable returns only for reparable items when either of the following applies:

(a) The fourth position of the source, maintenance, and recoverability code is D and the unit price is over $500.

(b) The NSN is on the ARIL.

4-3. Requirements objective

The maximum amount of assets authorized on hand and on order for an item at the sustainment or national level is the RO. The RO is normally the sum of the safety level, funded AWRSI, acquisition lead-time (AQLT), RCT, and economic order quantity (EOQ) requirements. These requirements are built into levels to develop the requirements determination process using the logic in chapter 5 for budget stratifications. Details for computing requirement levels are found in respective systems operating manuals.

a. Acquisition lead time (AQLT). The AQLT is the sum of the administrative lead-time (ALT) and the production lead-time (PLT).

(1) The ALT measurement begins when a procurement work directive is initiated and ends when a procurement award is made. For computation purposes, one day for review is included in ALT calculations. If needed, a procurement work directive will be initiated when the reorder point is reached.

(2) The PLT measurement begins when the procurement award is made. It ends when stock equal to an incremental delivery quantity or 1 month's demand is received and made available for issue.

(3) Compute the ALT and PLT using the most recent representative procurement. The following are not representative procurements:

(a) Direct delivery orders, initial provisioning, and first article requirements.

(b) Procurements for situations requiring expedited bid and delivery (for example, high priority buys), and LOT buys (paragraph 2-14 ).

(c) Extended delays caused by such problems as contract litigation, strikes, natural disasters, funding, reproduction, and administrative delays for technical data packages.

b. Repair cycle requirement (RCYR). The RCYR is the number of serviceable assets needed to offset the time to repair unserviceables to meet forecast requirements. The repair cycle time (RCT) is calculated from entry of the unserviceable asset on the depot accountable records until it is picked up in serviceable condition on the supply accountable record.

(1) The repair cycle consists of the following:

(a) Accumulation time.

(b) Repair ALT.

(c) Repair lead-time.

(2) The final recovery quantity is the number of unserviceable on-hand assets and forecast unserviceable returns (less "washouts" that can be repaired over a specified time.

(3) The "washout" quantity is the number of unserviceable returns that cannot be economically repaired.

c. The EOQ and variable safety level (VSL). The EOQ/VSL is computed by an analytical model that simulates the safety level and order quantity until the level that minimizes the annual variable costs of supply is found. The EOQ is a math model designed to buy the most cost-effective quantity for the Army. Deviations will be justified in the item history and approved by the appropriate signature level.

(1) The VSL balances desired stockage with available funds. The model computed VSL will not be less than zero nor greater than three standard deviations of AQLT demand. The model computed standard deviation of AQLT demand measures the uncertainty of AQLT demand and accounts for demand or AQLT variability.

(2) The EOQ is computed to minimize the total variable costs of supply. These costs are as follows:

(a) Estimated annual cost to procure. New cost to procure values will be provided at least every 2 years or when significant changes warrant updates due to new or improved acquisition techniques. Annually, when a new cost to procure update has not occurred, adjust the current cost to allow for general wage increases since the last change. The new cost to procure values will be effective on 1 October. Costs to procure procedures are in appendix C, section I .

(b) Estimated inventory-holding cost. The estimated inventory holding cost is derived by applying a holding cost factor to the expected dollar value of inventory on-hand and on-order. Procedures for estimating the cost to hold factor are in appendix C, section II .

(c) Estimated cost of requisitions on backorder. The estimated cost of requisitions on backorder is derived by applying a shortage cost factor to the estimated time (weighted) for requisitions on backorder. The shortage cost factor is used by the supply performance analyzer (SPA) (sec V).

(3) An EOQ may not always be an economic production quantity. A procurement larger than the EOQ may result in a price discount. In certain circumstances, increased procurement quantities may be essential to attract bidders. However, the management team must consider whether it is in the best interest of the Army to procure assets that will not be immediately consumed and will stratify to a retention level upon receipt. If it is determined that the discount purchase is warranted, then the manager will build an extended requirements objective (EXTRO) for the additional obligated due-in. Upon receipt of assets from the supplier, the manager will delete the EXTRO. These assets will stratify to the balance of the Approved Acquisition Objective (AAO) and possibly to Economic Retention. The use of EXTRO must be approved by the Division Chief.

(4) The EOQ will be limited to a maximum of 24 months. The EOQ should be adjusted downward for items being phased out. Items being procured using streamlined acquisition techniques should carry the optimal EOQ for that methodology.

e. Funded Army Prepositioned Stocks (APS), including Army War Reserve secondary items (AWRSI), are discussed in chapter 6 .

Section II
Retention of Assets

4-4. Wholesale retention policy

a. Stratify principal and secondary assets to the following categories:

(1) Approved acquisition objective (AAO), formerly known as approved force acquisition objective.

(2) Economic retention stock (ERS).

(3) Contingency retention stock (CRS), a combination of what was formerly known as contingency retention stock and numeric retention stock.

(4) Potential reutilization stock (PRS), formerly known as potential excess stock.

b. Subject to the transfer policies in chapter 2, section IV , and disposal policies in chapter 3, section VI , wholesale assets may be retained up to the sum of the AAO, ERS, and CRS.

c. ERS is determined on an item by item basis using a model that performs an economic analysis of the cost to hold versus the cost of future procurement.

d. Assets may be held in CRS at the discretion of the management team if they are reserved for any of the reasons listed in table 4-2 or listed below —

(1) Potential foreign military sales. Assets may be held in Purpose Code "N" for up to two years for this purpose while customers are queried for interest.

(2) State Department, Congressional or Presidential direction in fulfillment of treaties or other diplomatic purposes. These assets will also be held in Purpose Code "N" but may be held for indefinite time periods. The item folder is to provide justification in writing for holding this materiel.

Table 4-2. Wholesale retention requirements
Code Authorized contingency retention requirement
A Items with diminished requirements because of being included in performance-based logistic contracts. Retain only serviceable assets.
B Items "living off repair."
C Insurance/numerical stockage objective items (IMPC "A"). Retain only serviceable assets.
D Items with diminishing manufacturing source and/or obsolescence issues.
E Items required for future humanitarian aid and/or peacekeeping operations. Retain only serviceable assets.
F Hazardous materiel and/or chemical/biological assets retained in accordance with DA or DOD.
G Required for peacekeeping (future military) operations. Retain only serviceable assets.
H Required to support an inactive end item. Retain only serviceable assets.
I For other reasons not categorized. Submit memorandum for record to HQ AMC for approval.

e. Retention limits per 4-4 d , above, are subject to shelf life and storage limitations.

f. Retention levels will be reviewed at least annually.

g. ODCS, G-3 will develop ammunition retention policy.

4-5. Credit for assets returned to wholesale

a. Serviceable assets. Return of serviceable assets to the wholesale system is an alternate source to procurement. As of 1 OCT 97, AMC will give credit for serviceable items returned through CRS. The amount of credit for serviceable items accepted by the wholesale inventory manager will be equal to the standard price less the logistics operations surcharge.

b. Funding. The sustainment or national level will fund shipping costs for returned items. ARI items should be batched when possible to optimize shipping expenses.

c. Unserviceable depot level reparables (DLRs). The sustainment or national level will give the owning field maintenance level credit for an unserviceable DLR that stratifies through the computed decline level. The amount of credit is the latest acquisition price less the wholesale cost to repair less the washout cost.

4-6. Approved acquisition objective

The approved acquisition objective (AAO) is the quantity of an item authorized for peacetime acquisition to —

a. Equip and sustain the U.S. approved forces per the latest Secretary of Defense (SECDEF) guidance memorandums.

(1) Measure the peacetime AAO from the beginning of the apportionment year (AY) through the date of the last buy in the budget year (BY) (or through the end of the year for items not in a buy position) plus appropriate lead times. For items not in a buy position during the BY, this period is 24 months.

(2) Figure 4-1 outlines the AAO stratification and retention summary. The priority of fill per figure 4-1 is as follows:

(a) RO.

(b) Balance peacetime support period (BPTSP). The peacetime support period (PTSP) makes up the requirements objective BPTSP. The PTSP is 24 months.

(c) Balance AAO.

(d) ERS.

(e) CRS.

(f) PRS.

(g) DOD excess.

b. Equip and sustain allied forces by satisfying the following:

(1) Requirements of OSD-approved pre-stockage for security assistance programs.

(2) Requirements of approved supply support arrangements with FMS program countries.

(3) Wartime requirements from D-Day through the period and at the level of support set for allies in the latest SECDEF guidance memorandums.

c. Provide support for other U.S. Government departments and agencies, as authorized.

Figure 4-1. AAO Stratification and Retention Summary

4-7. Stratifying stock excess to the approved acquisition objective

Stratify stock excess to the AAO to the following:

a. ERS. ERS is that quantity of an item above the AAO that is determined to be more economical to retain for future peacetime issues than to replace by procurement. ERS is categorized as demand-based retention stock.

(1) The long-term policy is for MSCs to use the largest of available demand base years (instead of whole base period) to forecast the demand rate used in the economic retention model. This gives better retention of items for which demands prove a potential future need. MSCs will also use catalog expectation of demand (average yearly demand and demand variance) to drive economic retention for insurance or numeric stockage objective items, where low demands inhibit accurate demand-based forecasting.

(2) To warrant economic retention, the items must have a reasonably predictable demand rate and the cost to hold must be less than the future cost to procure. The total quantity will not exceed the economic retention level.

b. CRS. CRS is that quantity of an item that exceeds the AAO, and the economic retention limit for which there is no predictable demand or quantifiable peacetime requirement. CRS would normally be allocated as potential excess stock, except for contingencies. (Category C ships, aircraft, and other items being retained as contingency reserve are included.)

(1) Inventory managers will manually set and update the CRS quantity. In order for items to qualify for this retention, they must be essential (that is, have an essentiality code other than G) and must have a phase-out date equal to or greater than 3 years in the future.

(a) Inactive end items held for future contingency.

(b) Secondary items may be held as CRS in accordance with paragraph 4-4d above.

(2) Within CRS, stratify stock to one or more of the following subcategories:

(a) Subcategory A - military contingency. Assets retained to meet potential military contingencies for U.S. forces.

(b) Subcategory B - foreign military demand. Assets retained in expectation of foreign military demand not covered by CLSSAs. Assets held in this subcategory will be placed in purpose code "N".

(c) Subcategory C - general contingency. Assets retained based on potential use, procurement problems, or other special considerations involving nonmilitary contingencies (that is, civil emergencies or natural disasters).

(3) The line item folder must contain justification for any contingency retention level.

(4) Review contingency requirements decisions every year for all items.

c. Potential reutilization. Stock may be retained no longer than needed to determine if disposal is necessary. Minimize potential excess by restratification, transfer, or disposal.

d. DOD excess materiel. DOD excess materiel is that quantity of an item determined to be unnecessary to meet the needs of DOD components.

4-8. Acquisition strategies

Certain acquisition methods are needed to offset long ALTs/PLTs and to acquire materiel as quickly and economically as possible.

a. Alternate acquisition methods. Review component parts data for an obsolete end item to decide if that end item contains non-obsolete common usage parts that could be returned to the wholesale system for further use. The major item manager, the secondary item manager, and the depots will find and use such assets. Do not consider monetary value a limitation if reclamation will fill critical item requirements (for example, reclamation or disassembly of obsolete or excess SKOs).

b. Minimum buys.

(1) Nonstocked items. Base the buy quantity for non-stocked items on the extended requisition dollar value or $50, whichever is highest. If, during acquisition, the extended requisition dollar value is found to exceed $50, then procure the requisition quantity.

(2) Stocked items. Base the buy quantity for stocked items on the value of the order quantity or the cost to procure, whichever is highest.

c. Indefinite delivery type contracts (IDTC) and option clauses. IDTCs provide flexibility in the requirements execution process. They also reduce the volume of procurement work directives and the processing time up to contract award date.

(1) Option clauses are added to a base contract to allow the exercise of choice on the original contract. Options can be priced or unpriced. They are exercised when additional quantities are needed. Add priced options to contracts for weapon systems in production and for spare or repair parts.

(a) Use option clauses in SMA and procurement secondary appropriation solicitations. Option exercise periods will equal procurement or production lead times and the production delivery periods. These periods will be long enough to be exercised after any first article tests and qualification test approvals. Base option quantities on the informed assessment of the inventory manager.

(b) Hardware Directorates and Product Line Management will provide the Acquisition Directorate with the option quantities to be procured. No arbitrary dollar value restrictions or time limitations have been established. A decision not to use either the full or partial option quantity requires approval at the Directorate level.

(2) IDTCs allow competition in procuring design stable spare or repair parts.

(a) IDTC contracts shall cover realistic estimated quantities of spare or repair parts. These parts can be procured "as needed," with deliveries throughout the contract period. The delivery orders may include an option for extension to the term of the IDTC.

(b) The Hardware Directorates and Product Line Managers must provide procurement history data to the Acquisition Directorate for consideration in the use of IDTC.

d. IDTCs (Indefinite Delivery Type Contracts). IDTCs are the preferred method for procuring spare and repair parts at all phases of the life cycle to include provisioning. IDTCs provide flexibility in the requirements execution process. They also reduce the volume of procurement work directives and the processing time up to contract award date.

(1) IDTC contracts will be awarded for 3-5 years.

(2) IDTC contracts for provisioning parts shall ensure that they contain a clause requiring the contract to deliver the latest approved configuration of a given part.

e. Multiyear omnibus acquisition. Multiyear omnibus acquisition groups multiple procurement work directives for like items, groups, and families of items into a single procurement. Consider multiple omnibus acquisitions in the spare or repair parts requirements determination process. They apply only to like items with known, relatively stable, and commonly competitive production sources.

(1) An item considered for multiple omnibus acquisitions will also —

(a) Be centrally managed, stored, stocked, and issued.

(b) Have stable design patterns.

(c) Have stable demand patterns.

(d) Have current technical data packages suitable for competitive procurement.

(e) Have configurations managed by the Government.

(f) Apply to weapon systems not scheduled for phase-out within the next 5 years.

(2) Omnibus buys are driven by the reorder point of the item nearest a reorder point imbalance. Like items must then be reviewed and, if near the reorder point, ordered also.

(3) Phase delivery dates and payments to balance storage and funding needs.

(4) When production quantity options are used, contracts must allow for changes in equipment usage, inventory policy, and funding arrangements.

f. Quantity discounts. An EOQ for the Army may not be economical for a supplier to provide. A procurement larger than the computed EOQ may lead to a quantity discount.

(1) Use of quantity discount procedures is at the discretion of the item manager until policy is set and standard systems are available to support quantity discount buys.

(2) Do not apply quantity discounts to items of unstable design or items that may be obsolete because of the age of the supported item.

(3) Potential benefits must be large enough to offset the associated administrative costs.

(4) Quantity discounts can be used when increased procurement quantities are needed to attract bidders.

(5) When a quantity discount purchase is made, the extra amount is part of the RO until the assets are received from the supplier. The quantity that exceeds the funded RO is stratified into and accounted for under EXTRO.

4-9. Cutback and cancellation action points

When changes in forecasted requirements result in assets in excess of the RO, reduce or cancel the repair or procurement order if the costs of doing so are less than the cost to hold. Cut back a repair or procurement solicitation or contract only if it is more economical than continuing the procurement process. Reduction costs shall include administrative costs of processing the reduction or cancellation and penalty costs imposed by the producer. When there is more than one order, give first consideration to the last order placed. Figure 4-2 shows action points resulting from requirements determination. For procurements deemed uneconomical for cutback or cancellation based on an approved math model, EXTRO may be used until the assets are delivered to a wholesale depot.

Figure 4-2. Supply Control Study Action Points

4-10. Repairs and extended requirements objective

EXTRO may be used to authorize cost-effective repair programs that would generate assets over the normal EOQ reorder cycle. The following policies apply:

a. The term of EXTRO cannot exceed the computed reorder cycle time plus one year.

b. The item must have a scheduled repair program.

c. The parts explosion process must have been completed.

d. At least 80 percent of the parts must be on hand or on order.

e. Repair must be on-going with an unexpected drop in requirements or an unexpected source of serviceable assets from turn-in or redistribution.

f. The item must generate an economic retention level at the repair completion that predicts continuing requirements.

g. If the repair model computes an economic cutback, keep a copy of the model output in the item folder.

h. The AMC IMM will obtain approval, signed at the appropriate management levels, for such EXTRO. Keep this signed approval in the item folder for the entire EXTRO period.

i. The IMM must ensure that procurements made while EXTRO is used for repair are manually adjusted to reduce the procurement quantity by the EXTRO for repair quantity, since the automated system will assume that it is a part of the EOQ for procurement. Maintain documentation to support this adjustment in the line item folder for audit purposes.

Section III
Transition from Initial Provisioning to Replenishment Actions

4-11. General transition policies

AR 700-18, chapter 5 , outlines the policies for determining initial stockage quanitities for provisioned items. AR 700-18, chapter 6 , outlines policies for budgeting and funding for initial provisioning requirements.

a. Provisioning requirement will be computed using the sparing-to-availability model Selected Essential Item Stockage for Availability Method (SESAME).

b. The Supply Support Request (SSR) for initial requirements will no longer be honored by the Defense Logistics Agency (DLA). Requirements for DLA-managed items will be procured upon receipt of a funded requisition to the appropriate DLA supply center. Requisitions must be received at least an acquisition lead-time in advance. The SSR for cataloging actions only (for example, assignment of an NSN) will still be honored.

c. The IOC for ASIOE is the same as for the primary end item or weapon system unless HQDA sets an alternative IOC.

d. After IOC plus 24 months make wholesale computations per paragraph 4-2 .

e. Reprovisioning is the subsequent provisioning of the same end item from a different contractor.

f. For follow-on provisioning of the same end item from the same contractor, use approved optimization models to compute requirements. Actual experiential data will be used in place of engineering data.

g. The DDP is two years. DDP may be requested for a third year from HQDA, AMC (AMCLG-LS).

4-12. Computing the average monthly demand

a. Compute an engineered average monthly demand (AMD) based on anticipated average demand quantities developed from engineered maintenance failure factors.

b. Update the wholesale AMD by applying minimum weight percentages to actual demands (recurring) accumulated during the demand development period (that is, the 24 months after IOC). As time progresses through the demand development period, more weight is given to actual demands and less weight given to the engineered maintenance failure factor. Table 4-2 shows the weights applied to actual demands and engineered failure factors during the demand development period.

c. MSCs may modify the minimum weight percentages if past demands are not indicative of future demands. However, these weighted percentages may not be modified under the following conditions:

(1) Low-end item usage.

(2) Low initial end item distribution or density.

(3) Solely on the basis of no demand.

d. Review the engineered AMD for possible update based on changes in the following:

(1) Maintenance or replacement task distributions.

(2) Failure factor estimates.

e. Update maintenance factors if the ratio of the engineered AMD to the actual AMD (intensity factor) at any time beyond IOC plus 12 months is less than 0.5 or greater than 2.0.

Table 4-3. Weights for average monthly demand computations
+6 +12 +18 +24
Demands 0 25 50 75 100
Failure factors 100 75 50 25 0

4-13. Interim contractor support

When interim contractor support (ICS) is used to support a newly fielded vehicle or weapon system, make contractual arrangements to ensure that the contractor collects spare and repair parts usage data. The contractor should deliver these data to the Government in a format compatible with the automated system used in the requirements determination process. Thus, when support moves from the contractor to organic support, the contractor's usage data allow the forecasting of spare and repair parts requirements to be based on historical demands rather than engineering estimates. This eliminates the need to establish a DDP upon transition to organic support. It also provides data to determine more accurately unserviceable returns, serviceable returns, and intensity factors during the time ICS is used.

4-14. Transition from provisioning to replenishment

a. Items are treated as provisioning items and stratified as such during the DDP. The DDP ends at IOC plus 24 months, unless there is documentation to support an extension to 36 months. The inventory manager may determine that less than 24 months is sufficient if demands are felt to be representative of future in a shorter timeframe. Once the DDP has ended, the item will migrate from provisioning to replenishment. (Exception: the item was provisioned as demand supported and subsequently did not meet the wholesale replenishment COSDIF or NSO stockage criteria.)

b. The wholesale requirements for provisioned items with a DDP within IOC plus 6 months and for items without demands at the requirements cutoff will consist of the following:

(1) The AQLT requirement.

(2) The depot RDYR for reparables.

(3) A minimum 12-month stockage level used for safety level/procurement cycle requirement.

c. Compute requirement levels for provisioned items beyond IOC plus 6 months after actual recurring demands are received or additional end items are procured. Compute these requirements using weighted AMDs and full ROs. Do not use weighted or maintenance factor AMDs in these computations.

d. If no demands have been received during IOC plus 4 years, documentation to use contingency retention levels to retain all on-hand and on-order inventories will be submitted to HQDA AMC (AMCLG-LS). Historical documentation for these weapon system and/or item approvals must be maintained in the line item folders along with all table 3-6 approvals for the retention decisions.

4-15. Funding and budgeting

Funding and budgeting for provisioning is in AR 700-18, chapter 6 .

Section IV
Management Parameters

4-16. Standard system flexibility

Parameters that affect requirements determination can vary by AMC MSC or by weapon systems. Therefore, design systems so that AMC MSCs can change parameters. Examples of parameters are as follows:

a. Ordering costs.

b. Holding costs.

c. Customer shortage costs.

d. Percentage of nonrecurring demands.

e. Maximum serviceable returns.

f. Procurement costs.

4-17. Parameter use and control

a. Logistics policy may limit the use of the above parameters to conform with budget guidance, which is provided at least annually. AMC MSCs may change parameters for simulation purposes. Exceptions to computations and parameters for reports used outside the AMC MSC require AMC (AMCLG-LS) approval.

b. To control these parameters, maintain a separate data processing file. Furnish this file to AMC (AMCLG-LS) as of 31 March and 30 September.

Section V
Supply Performance Analyzer

4-18. Purpose of the supply performance analyzer

The supply performance analyzer (SPA) produces estimates of the relationship between supply performance and commitment authority for specified catalogs of items. The SPA produces ideal projections based on EOQ/VSL computations of average customer waiting time and stock availability corresponding to values of commitment authority. Supply performance and commitment estimates for various values of the cost parameter (the lambda factor) are generated. These estimates are based on requirements data (for example, demands, price, lead times) produced during the budget stratification. These data are generally summarized and simplified for the SPA. The SPA performs simulations similar to but simpler than budget stratification simulations since the SPA is not concerned with the timing of buys within fiscal years. A buy simulation is done for several values of shortage cost, and estimates of commitment authority are produced. The larger the shortage cost, the larger the safety level on a given item, which in turn improves supply performance and increases commitment authority.

4-19. Using supply performance analyzer output

a. Ultimately, the output from the SPA process is shortage cost parameters to be used in the EOQ/VSL computations. These are selected by matching approved budget dollars with the estimates produced by the SPA.

b. The SPA can influence the decisions made during the budget process. For example, a budget analyst can see the supply performance that will be achieved for a given funding level. The SPA estimates may then be used to justify additional funds.

Section VI
Requirements Computation for Spare Engines

4-20. Overview

This section applies to spare aircraft engines and modules and spare M-1 Tank turbine engines and modules. Other engine requirements may be computed by this method at the discretion of the AMC MSC commander. Modules are defined as subassemblies of spare engines that warrant specialized management.

4-21. Policies for computing spare engine requirements

a. Engines and their reparable modules are considered to have a zero wear-out rate, (that is, it is assumed that all unserviceable spares can be repaired or overhauled).

b. For initial stockage, engines and reparable modules will be limited to 5 percent of total end-item density.

c. Army Prepositioned Stocks will be separately determined in accordance with chapter 6 .

d. For sustainment, managers will use the latest program data (for example, flying hours, OPTEMPO) in calculating requirements and determining budget submissions.

e. Managers will consider engineering changes, age of fleet, distribution and pipeline processes in determining sustainment stockage.

f. A repair safety level is authorized.

Chapter 5
Financial Inventory Management

Section I

5-1. Scope

These policies concern all commands and installations maintaining formal accountability of Army inventories financed by the Supply Management, Army (SMA).

5-2. Code changes and clarification

Send requests to add, delete, or change codes in positions 4 and 5 to LOGSA, ATTN: AMXLS-MM, Redstone Arsenal, AL 35898-7466.

Section II
Army Materiel Category Structure Code

5-3. Materiel category code structure

The materiel category code (MATCAT) is a five-position code assigned to each NSN on the FEDLOG. AMC assigns and maintains these codes which are in tables 5-1 through 5-6 (app F .) Each position is described as follows:

a. Position No. 1. Materiel category and IMM or SICA/SICC. (table 5-1 ). This position is alphabetic and identifies the materiel categories of principal and secondary items to the CONUS IMM. The first position of DLA or GSA managed items identifies the SICA/SICC having managerial responsibility. The title given to the first position generally describes the items managed by a particular IMM. It does not necessarily identify fully all items under that IMM's control.

b. Position No. 2. Appropriation and budget activity (ABA) account code (tables 5-2 and 5-3 ). The second position is alpha or numeric, excluding the letters "I" and "O". It identifies investment or expense type items. Secondary items are expense-type items and are bought with SMA operating cost authority and are generally sold to all customers. Prime NSNs and their related items must have the same ABA code. As of 1 Jan 92, Army managed secondary items must have ABA code 2.

(1) Items are categorized by the investment versus expense decision diagram (figure 5-1). If an item is improperly classified, send a request to change the ABA code through AMC (AMCLG-LS) to HQDA (SAFM-BUR) including the following:

(a) Present MATCAT.

(b) Future MATCAT.

(c) RICC.

(d) Supply class (SC).

(e) Unit price.

(f) Annual dollar value of demands by customers (for example, U.S. Army, Europe (USAREUR), and U.S. Army Forces Command (FORSCOM)).

(g) Annual obligational authority required to procure the item.

(h) Projected procurement due in by fiscal year (FY) and by procurement status (that is, committed but unobligated, or obligated).

(i) Five-position source, maintenance, and recoverability (SMR) code.

(j) Future SMR code.

(2) Changes in the ABA code must have an effective date of 1 October. Send requests for change at least 21 months before the effective date. This allows time to coordinate dollar transfers with the ACOMs, ASCCs, and DRUs and to adjust input to the following:

(a) Program Objective Memorandums (POM).

(b) Command operating budgets.

(c) Subsequent budget submissions.

(3) For secondary items, the ABA codes are used with consumable/reparable indicator codes per figure 5-1 . Assign each DLR item indicator code R. Assign each FLR item with ARI codes C, E, R, or S indicator code R. Assign each consumable item indicator code C. Other criteria for assigning the consumable reparable indicator code are in (4) and (7) below.

(a) Categorize secondary items by the diagram in figure 5-1 . If an item is misclassified, the reparable code changes automatically. Automatic changes are based on changes to the SMR code or the ARI code.

(b) When a consumable/reparable indicator code changes, the budget analyst must recognize proportionate changes in secondary item reparable and consumable item budget stratifications.

(4) Before a PA principal item (ABA codes A through Q) that is managed by an IMM is designated as local purchase (AAC K or L), send a request to change the acquisition advice code (AAC) to HQDA (DAMA-CSS), Washington, DC 20310-0546. Include the following:

(a) Present AAC.

(b) Future AAC.

(c) RICC.

(d) SC.

(e) Unit price.

(f) LIN.

(g) Reason for designating the item as local purchase.

(5) Program and budget for PA principal items are as follows:

(a) TSG (DASG-LOZ) programs and budgets for medical items (supply class (SC) VIII).

(b) The appropriate AMC MSC programs and budgets for items centrally managed by the Army.

(c) The ACOM, ASCC, and DRU or activity requiring local purchase items (AAC K or L), except SC VIII, programs and budgets for these items.

(d) The ACOM, ASCC, and DRU or activity requiring DLA/GSA or other service managed items except SC VIII programs and budgets for these items.

(6) When computing requirements, the inventory manager will consider unserviceable returns to be repaired and reissued. If the maintenance repair code or recoverability code is D or L, the inventory manager will designate the item as expense under the stock funding of depot level reparables (SFDLR) concept.

(7) If the repair code or recoverability code is other than D (disposition is authorized below depot), the inventory manager will not generally consider unserviceable returns when computing requirements. ABA code 2 can be assigned to an end item if the end item is designated local purchase or is requisitioned from DLA or GSA and the unit price is less than $3,000. If the IMM or SICA assigns ABA code 3 or 5, the IMM or SICA will input budgetary requirements. Procure any item with ABA code 3 or 5 with OMA appropriations by the IMM or SICA, and free issue it to Army customers. Review all items with ABA code 3 each year to ensure that the code is valid. HQDA (DACA-OM) must approve assigning ABA code 5.

c. Position No. 3. Management inventory segment code (table 5-4 ). The third position is numeric 1 through 4. It subdivides categories identified by positions 1 and 2. Maintaining control accounts for recurring reports to this position of the category structure is not required.

d. Position No. 4. Specific group/generic code (table 5-5 ). This code is alphanumeric, excluding the letter O and the number 1. This code further subdivides items identified to position 1 through 3. For Army managed items these codes plus the codes for position 5, identify a generic category of weapons systems/end items or homogeneous group of items. For DLA and GSA managed items and medical or dental items this position is numeric 0, except for those DLA and GSA items applying to an Army weapon system or end item which will carry the appropriate generic code.

e. Position No. 5. Generic category code (table 5-6 ). This position is alphanumeric, except the letters "I" and "O". This code links each item to a weapon system, end item, or other application. For Army-managed items, position 4 and 5 together identify a generic category of weapons systems or end items, or a homogeneous group of items. DLA and GSA managed items are numeric, except for items applying to an Army weapon system or end item which must be assigned the appropriate fifth position.

5-4. Uses of the materiel category code

The MATCAT is used in the management of Army inventories. Category groupings and subgroupings are used to collect and report data. The code tells the requisitioner whether funds are needed to requisition the item and shows the type of funds required to procure the item locally. This code can also be a quick reference for repairability, reason for stockage, and stage in the life cycle of an item.

Section III
Requirements Priority and Asset Application for Secondary Items

5-5. The stratification process

a. The stratification process collects and shows supply data by relating assets to requirements by priority and time sequence. These data are used for various management purposes, including the following:

(1) A measure of the supply control process results.

(2) Budget derivation.

(3) Readiness and retention determination.

(4) Secondary item stratification reporting.

b. The policies in this section align the stratification process with the basis upon which supply control decisions are made. This process compares requirements and assets by automated time-phased simulation of procurements, repairs, and issues changing the supply position. The stratification process and the reports from it are significant for the following reasons:

(1) All levels of management can review the adequacy of policy guidance and effectiveness of supply operations.

(2) It provides for supply management through financial controls (including procurement and requisition programming, budgeting, and financial inventory status reporting). This is done by converting the requirement and asset comparison to the common denominator of dollars in the stratification process.

(3) Data produced are the prime means of justifying budgets for financing procurement of Defense Working Capital Fund (DWCF) secondary items.

c. Initiate actions under the supply control process based on the individual item requirement and asset comparison. The comparison is required for actions encompassing but not limited to the following:

(1) Setting and testing the reorder point.

(2) Determining order quantities.

(3) Deriving procurement directives and contract data.

(4) Returning materiel.

(5) Scheduling contract delivery.

(6) Scheduling repair.

(7) Non-reimbursable transfer determinations.

(8) Retention and disposal.

d. Requirement elements on the item supply control study (SCS) are arranged to ease computing the reorder point, and to compute immediate shortages and other supply imbalances. To find the supply status of an item, the requirement and asset comparison is made in terms of capability of meeting projected demands on the supply system. Requirement elements are arrayed by priority for stock reservation or issue. Assets are applied in order against these elements to arrive at the supply status. The stratification process records and summarizes these item requirement and asset comparisons to reach the asset position.

e. As a basis for preparing apportionment requests and budget estimates, the peacetime commitment and obligational authority requirements for IMMs comes from, and is supported by, a line item simulation-of-buy stratification. This process can be adjusted for changes in program data, requirement factors, financial accounting data, and so forth that are not included in the basic stratification process.

f. To meet objectives of the stratification process, the basic data is accumulated, arranged, and displayed as follows:

(1) Central secondary item stratification for budget (figure 5-2 ). Instructions for the central secondary item stratification for budget are in paragraph 5-9, DOD 4140.1-M, Secondary Item Stratification Manual. This stratification is a line item comparison of the wholesale supply system requirements and assets for four separate periods of time. These are the opening position, current year (CY), apportionment year (AY), and budget year (BY).

(2) Central secondary item stratification for readiness and retention (figure 5-3 ). Instructions are in paragraph 5-10 . The readiness and retention stratification is a line item requirement and asset comparison of the wholesale supply system. The requirement elements are identical to those in the stratification for budget but are in a different priority sequence. For readiness measurement, only the on-hand requirements are displayed in the sequence to identify assets by intended use for uniform reporting. in section IV; for retention action in chapter 4 , section II; and for transfer actions in chapter 2, section IV . That is, No lead-time requirements are evaluated for readiness measurement.

(3) Central secondary item stratification for repair (figure 5-4 ). Instructions are in paragraph 5-11 . The repair stratification is a line item stratification of requirements to the assets needed on hand or on order to sustain operations until repairs are completed. Requirements and assets are those centrally computed and maintained on a line item basis by the IMM to support repair programs. The repair stratification shows an opening position in terms of repair lead-time (RLT), and repair accumulation time as of the date of stratification. It also shows CY, AY, and BY requirements, assets, and deficits in terms of simulation of repairs to be made during the applicable years. AY and BY assets are those projected to exist at the beginning of the year assuming full funding of the previous year's deficit.

(4) Overseas command and CONUS installation stratification. Instructions are in paragraph 5-12 . The overseas command and CONUS installation stratification includes any supply system requirements and assets below the IMM sustainment or national level not covered by (1) through (3) above. This stratification is a line item stratification when requirements and assets data are mechanized. For non-mechanized stock points, a line-item stratification is required once a year with intervening stratification compared on a statistical basis. The overseas command and CONUS installation stratification provides a line item requirement to asset comparison as of the stratification date for readiness measurement. It also provides a measurement of assets against peacetime acquisition objectives and retention limits as of the stratification date.

g. For stratification purposes, the categories of materiel are aligned with the appropriation and budget projects which finance the purchase of the materiel. Within the materiel categories and appropriation and budget activities, items are aligned per the materiel category in section DA Pam 708-2, paragraph 3-2 . Stratify IMM wholesale assets separately for the provisioning segment of materiel category within each appropriation and budget project.

h. Stratifications and statistical adjustments not described in this regulation are not permitted except where authorized for nonmechanized activities.

5-6. Special instructions on reparable items

a. The RCYR is a net requirement based on a forecast of recoverable returns. The repair cycle applies to ALT plus the interval from the date the item is inducted into the maintenance facilities to the date of its reclassification to a serviceable condition. It consists of ALT and repair lead time (RLT) requirements.

b. Discount unserviceable assets on-hand which are on accountable records to recognize potential condemnation. When possible, show actual condemnation experience. Limit engineering estimates to new items for which there is little or no experience and to older items with experience that cannot be used as a guide. If an item's history shows no condemnation for a year or more, consider using a condemnation factor of zero instead of an engineering estimate. Consider these condemned assets potential DOD excess in stratification reports of on-hand inventories.

5-7. Frequency of stratifications

Prepare stratifications for 31 December, 31 March, 30 June, and 30 September. Semiannual inventory reports required for submission to DOD are based on these stratifications.

5-8. Central secondary item stratification for budget

The budget stratification process applies to assets under the accountability of the IMM. Requirements and assets encompassed are those computed and maintained on a line item basis at the IMM. Data developed from this stratification are used to prepare stratification reports, POMs, program analysis resource review, apportionment requests, and budget estimates. The stratification elements are in figure 5-2 , and are arranged by priority of requirements, with asset application made in the sequence shown. Do not change the priority of requirements and sequence of asset application, which are mandatory.

a. Opening position. The opening position stratification elements show the dollar value of assets which should be on hand or on order as of the stratification to sustain operations until replenishment can be made to meet requirements. It also shows assets on hand and on order available to meet these requirements. Use this data to determine the effectiveness of the supply control process, determine adequacy of policy guidance, and evaluate progress made toward budgetary goals in terms of the elements displayed.

(1) The total asset status (see fig 5-2 , col 1) as of the stratification date shows the requirements which the assets displayed in columns 2 through 8 are stratified against.

(2) The sequence of asset application, identified in the remaining columnar headings of figure 5-2 , is as follows:

(a) Serviceable stock on hand (see col 2). Apply serviceable stock on hand in priority sequence to all residual deficits.

(b) Due in from other than procurement or repair (see col 3). Apply anticipated assets due in from other than procurement or repair in priority sequence to all residual deficits. This column is actually the "due in other" which includes shipments in transit from customers and inventory due in for disassembly.

(c) Unserviceable on hand, inducted (see col 4). Stratify unserviceable stock on hand that is already inducted for repair (previously funded) against all residual deficits. These assets include all unserviceable assets on hand in condition code M. Discount unserviceable assets on hand to reflect potential condemnation, and show them on line A.2.

(d) Unserviceable on hand, not inducted (see col 5). Stratify unserviceable stock on hand not yet inducted for repair against all residual deficits. These assets include all unserviceable assets in condition code F not included in column 4. Discount unserviceable assets on hand to recognize potential condemnation and show them on line A.2.

(e) Recoverable unserviceable returns (see col 6). Show total expected recoverable unserviceable returns during the CY, AY, and BY on lines B.1, C.1, and D.1 as applicable.

(f) On order under contract (see col 7). Apply on order (under contract) stocks against all residual deficits.

(g) Commitment (see col 8). Apply on order (commitment) stocks against all residual deficits.

(h) Deficit (see col 9). The deficit column represents the unfilled requirements left after assets (see cols 2 through 8) are applied to column 1 requirements.

(3) The stratification elements, in order of requirements priority, are as follows:

(a) Assets, stratification date. Assets on IMM accountable records both on hand and due in as of the stratification date.

(b) Assets, anticipated nonrecoverable. The total unserviceables on hand which have been or will be determined to be beyond economical repair and which will be condemned, or otherwise lost, during the RCYT. Show these assets, which represent the washout quantity, in columns 4 and 5.

(c) AWR requirement, funded. That portion of the AWR requirement which is funded for purposes of asset application, procurement, and inventory management.

(d) Other AWR, funded. That additional portion of funded AWR requirements which is not prepositioned. The requirements set for this element are those which are funded for the purpose of asset publication, procurement, and inventory management.

(e) Stock due-out. Materiel requisitioned by ordering (using) activities which is not immediately available or immediately required for issue but is recorded as a commitment for future issues.

(f) Safety level. Materiel required to be on hand to permit continued operations in the event of minor interruption of normal replenishment action or unpredictable fluctuation in demand. It is based on the rates applicable to current requirement computations.

(g) NSO. The current inventory requirement for insurance items. This element may also be used for other similar requirements with appropriate justification.

(h) Repair cycle. The repair cycle covers the estimated returns during the period between the pick-up of an unserviceable item on IMM records to its restoration to a ready-for-issue condition. The opening position repair cycle requirement is based on the maintenance replacement rate applicable to current requirements computations.

(i) PLT. The estimated net demand for secondary items during the interval between the date of the award of an order or a contract and the first significant receipt into the supply system.

(j) ALT. The estimated net demand for secondary items during the interval between initiation of procurement and award of an order or contract.

(k) Total reorder point. The sum of lines A.3 through A.10 of figure 5-2 .

(l) Procurement cycle. The estimated net demand for secondary items during the interval between procurement actions. The procurement cycle requirement or economic order quantity represents the maximum assets which should be on hand and on order over and above the reorder point as of the stratification date.

(m) Total requirements objective. The sum of lines A.11 and A.12 of figure 5-2 .

(n) Assets beyond the requirements objective. The serviceable and unserviceable assets on hand, serviceable returns beyond the requirements objective, and procurement due-in which exceeds the requirements objective.

b. Current FY position. The CY stratification requirements and assets applicable to the balance of the FY. For a 30 September stratification the CY section represents those requirements and assets applicable to the 12 months following the stratification cutoff. In a 31 December, a 31 March, or a 30 June stratification, CY represents the respective 9-, 6-, or 3-month period, remaining in the FY. The total demands projected for the period are included only as a "memo entry." Demands for stratification purposes, which are entered in column 1 (requirements) of figure 5-2 , are those projected from the beginning of the period to the date of the last buy in the period. For items that reach a buy position in the CY, the stock levels will be those applicable to the last procurement forecast to be initiated in the CY. Stratify items not expected to be in a buy position in the CY based on the stockage levels forecast to exist at the end of the CY. The stratification elements, in order of priority, are shown under the stratification elements column. These elements are as follows:

(1) Assets, stratification date. Same as a(3)(a) above.

(2) Assets, anticipated non-applicable. Same as a(3)(b) above, except that recoverable unserviceable returns from date of last buy to the end of the year are recorded in column 6. These returns will not apply to the requirements elements shown in column 1.

(3) AWR requirement, protectable. Same as a(3)(c) , above.

(4) Other AWR, protectable. Same as a(3)(d) , above.

(5) Stock due-out. Same as a(3)(e) , above.

(6) Demands, recurring. The estimated recurring demands forecast through the supply control process during the CY from the beginning of the period to the date of the last buy in the period (or end of the year for no-buy items). Under "memo-entry," record the estimated recurring demands during the full period from the stratification date to the end of the CY.

(7) Demands, non-recurring. The projected or programmed non-recurring demands during the CY from the beginning of the period to the date of the last buy in the period. Under "memo entry," record the estimated non-recurring demands during the full period from the stratification date to the end of the CY.

(8) Total demands. The sum of lines B.6A and B.6B of figure 5-2 .

(9) Safety level. Same as a(3)(f) , above, but computed as of the last procurement forecast to be initiated during the CY (date of last buy), or the end of the year for items not in a buy position.

(10) NSO. Same as a(3)(g) , above.

(11) Repair cycle. Same as a(3)(h) , above, but based on the maintenance replacement rate as of the date of the last buy during the CY or the end of the year for items not in a buy position.

(12) PLT. Same as a(3)(i) , above, but based on the net demand rate computed as of the date of the last buy during the CY or the end of the year for items not in a buy position.

(13) ALT. Same as a(3)(j) , above, but computed as of the date of the last buy during the CY or end of the year for items not in a buy position.

(14) Procurement cycle. The procurement cycle economic order quantity is computed as of the date of the last buy. If there is no buy forecast, this entry reflects (a) minus (b) as shown below, or zero if (a) minus (b) is negative.

(a) Equals the lesser of all assets on hand and on order as of cutoff date or the full requirements objective as of cutoff date.

(b) Equals the CY requirement on lines B.3 through B.11, column 1, less CY unserviceable returns.

(15) Total requirements/assets/deficit. The sum of lines B.3 through B.5, B.6C, and B.7 through B.12.

(16) Assets beyond CY. Reflects the assets (columns 2 through 8) over those stratified to elements of the CY requirements (line B.1 minus lines B.2 and B.13).

c. AY position. The AY section represents requirements and assets applicable to the 12 months immediately following the current FY. The requirements for the AY represent recurring and nonrecurring demands projected for the period as well as levels and lead times. The total recurring and non-recurring demands for the AY are included as memo entries. Demands for stratification purposes (to be entered in column 1-requirements) are those projected from the beginning of the period to the date of the last buy in the period. For items that reach a buy position in the AY, the levels and lead times are those applicable to the last procurement forecasted to be initiated in that year. Stratify items not expected to be in a buy position in the AY on the basis of the levels and lead times forecasted to exist at the end of the AY. Stratification elements are as follows:

(1) Assets, beginning AY. This entry reflects projected assets as of 30 September following the stratification cutoff date. It is based on a line item simulation of forecasted demands, returns, commitments, obligations, and deliveries during the CY.

(2) Assets, anticipated non-applicable. Same as a(3)(b), above, except that column 6 of this line reflects the forecasted recoverable unserviceable returns from date of last buy in the apportionment year.

(3) Lines C.3 through C.14--stratification elements. Stratification elements for the AY are comparable to those for the current year except that stock due out is simulated as of 30 September following the stratification cutoff date. Also, levels are computed as of the forecast date of the last buy during the AY or the end of the AY for items not forecasted to be in a buy position during the AY. For those items not forecasted to be in a buy position during the AY, but for which one or more buys are forecast during the CY, the procurement cycle requirement is the AY assets plus AY returns, less line C.2 (inapplicable assets) and the AY requirements. For those items not forecast to be in a buy position during the AY or the CY, the AY procurement cycle requirement, if a positive quantity, reflects (a) minus (b), below.

(a) Equals the lesser of all assets on hand and on order as of the stratification cutoff date; or the full RO as of the stratification cutoff date.

(b) Equals the sum of stock due out as of the stratification cutoff date; CY AWR requirements; CY demands, less returns; AY demands, less returns; and AY safety level, NSO, repair cycle, ALT, and PLT.

d. BY position. The BY position represents those requirements and assets applicable to the FY following the AY. The requirements for the BY represent recurring and non-recurring demands projected for the period as well as levels and lead times. Recurring and non-recurring demands and their total for the 12 months of the BY are included as memo entries. Demands for stratification purposes to be entered in column 1 (requirements) are those projected from the beginning of the period to the date of the last buy in the period. For items that reach a buy position in the BY, the levels and lead times are those applicable to the last procurement forecasted to be initiated in that year. Stratify items not expected to be in a buy position in the BY on the basis of requirements forecasted to exist at the end of the BY.

(1) Assets, beginning BY. Projected assets as of the end of the AY are based on a line item simulation of forecasted demands, returns, commitments, obligations, and deliveries during the AY. Compute these assets and enter them on line D.1 and stratified by BY requirements.

(2) Assets, anticipated non-applicable. Same as a(3)(b), above, except that column 6 of this line will reflect the forecasted recoverable unserviceable returns from the date of the last buy to the end of the fiscal year.

(3) Lines D.3 through D.13 - stratification elements. Stratification elements for the budget year are comparable to those for the AY. However, stock due out is simulated as of the end of the AY and levels are computed as of the forecast date of the last buy during the BY. Those items not forecasted to be in a buy position during the BY will have levels computed as of the end of the BY. For those items not forecasted to be in a buy position during the BY, but for which one or more buys are forecasted during the CY or AY, the procurement cycle requirement is the BY assets plus the BY returns, minus the BY requirements. The BY assets and returns must have line D.2 subtracted or the procurement cycle requirement produced will be higher than actually needed. For those items not forecasted to be in a buy position during the BY, AY, or CY, the BY procurement cycle requirement (if a positive quantity) reflects (a) minus (b) below.

(a) Equals the lesser of all assets on hand or on order as of the stratification cutoff date or the full requirements objective as of the stratification cutoff date.

(b) Equals the sum of stock due out as of the stratification cutoff date; the CY AWR requirement; CY demands, less returns; AY demands, less returns; BY demands, less returns; and BY safety level, NSO, repair cycle, ALT, and PLT.

(4) Assets end BY. Show simulated assets as of 30 September which ends the BY. Do not show anticipated returns.

(5) Stock due out, end BY. Line D.15 shows the due-out stock position forecasted to exist as of that date. Normally, this value is relatively small compared to the opening value.

(6) Stratification elements E, F, G, H, and I. For local use.

5-9. Central secondary item stratification for readiness and retention

This stratification applies to those assets under the accountability of the IMM. Use data from this stratification to prepare stratification reports, apportionment requests, and budget estimates. The stratification elements (see fig 5-3 ) applies to opening position assets only, and are shown by priority. The priority of requirements and sequence of asset application are mandatory; do not vary from them.

a. Readiness position. The readiness position elements consist of requirements for assets to be on hand as of the date of stratification. This section sets a gross measurement of the capability of this level of the supply system to fill logistic requirements as of a point in time by measuring asset availability against on-hand requirements. If the full procurement cycle requirement is not required to be on hand, the total on-hand requirements are recognized to be overstated.

(1) Principles in paragraph 5-9 relative to the opening position apply to the requirement and asset elements for the readiness stratification. Both the stratification process and the reports for the readiness position will show the direct results of the most recent supply control study. Requirements and assets are the same as those used in the opening position stratification.

(2) Columnar headings of figure 5-3 and the sequence of asset application are the same as in paragraph 5-9a .

(3) Stratification elements, in order of requirement priority, are as follows:

(a) Lines A.1 through A.8. Same as paragraph 5-9a(3) .

(b) Subtotal minimum on-hand objective. The sum of lines A.3 through A.8.

(c) Procurement cycle. Same as paragraph 5-8a(3)(1) . The procurement cycle or EOQ is included as a gross estimate of the operating level to show the maximum on-hand requirement as of the stratification date.

(d) Total maximum on-hand objective. The sum of lines A.8A and A.9.

(e) On-hand assets beyond maximum on-hand objective. Entries are in columns 2, 4, or 5, if the applicable assets are greater than the requirement on line A.9A.

(f) Balance, AWR requirement. That portion of the AWR requirement which has not been acquired or funded.

(g) Balance, other acquisition AWR. That portion of the other AWR requirements which has not been acquired or funded.

(h) Approved force retention. Not used at this time.

b. AAO and retention position. The AAO and retention position stratification identifies data by purpose for which held. This type of stratification is required for uniform reporting and for management of long supply and identification of potential excess. The columnar headings of figure 5-3 and the sequence of asset application are the same as in paragraph 5-9a . Stratification elements in order of requirements priority, are as follows:

(1) Assets, stratification date. Same as paragraph a(3)(a) .

(2) Assets, anticipated non-applicable. Same as paragraph 5-9a(3)(b) .

(3) AWR requirement, protectable. Same as paragraph 5-9a(3)(c) .

(4) Other acquisition AWR, funded. Same as paragraph 5-8a(3)(d) .

(5) Subtotal protectable. The sum of lines B.3 and B.4.

(6) Stock due-out. Same as paragraph 5-8a(3)(e) .

(7) Demands, CY. This will show the estimated recurring and non-recurring demands during the CY.

(8) Demands, AY. For stratification cutoff dates between 31 March and 31 August (31 March and 30 June stratifications), this entry will show the estimated recurring and non-recurring demands during the AY. For all other stratifications, it will show estimated issue requirements from the beginning of the AY to the last buy of the year as shown in 5-2 , line C.6C, column 1.

(9) Demands, BY. From March through August (31 March and 30 June stratifications), entry will represent the estimated recurring and non-recurring demands from the beginning of the BY to the last buy of the year. At all other times, this field is blank.

(10) Safety level. Same as paragraph 5-8a(3)(f) .

(11) NSO. Same as paragraph 5-8a(3)(g) .

(12) Repair cycle. Same as paragraph 5-8a(3)(h) .

(13) PLT. Same as paragraph 5-8a(3)(i) .

(14) ALT. Same as paragraph 5-8a(3)(j) .

(15) Procurement cycle. Same as paragraph 5-8a(3)(l) .

(16) Balance AAO. The requirements that must be included in a given stratification to arrive at the total AAO requirement. From 30 September through 28 February, the AAO period is 24 months. On 31 March, it is 30 months and it is reduced one month at a time through August. The full funded AAO requirement is the reorder point at the end of the AAO period plus the gross issues through the AAO period. Compute the balance AAO by subtracting the requirements objective at the last buy BY plus the issues to last buy BY (as shown on lines B.5A, B.6, and B.7) from the funded AAO requirement. If the result is less than zero, the balance AAO is zero.

(17) Balance, prepositioned AWR requirement. Same as a(3)(f) , above.

(18) Balance, other acquisition AWR. Described in a(3)(g) , above, except that any assets stratified to columns 2, 4, or 5 are not used to increase the protectable requirements.

(19) Total AAO. The sum of lines B.4A through B.16.

(20) Economic retention. That portion of the quantity excess to the AAO that is more economical to keep for future peacetime issue than to replace by procurement. To warrant economic retention, items must have a reasonably predictable demand rate.

(21) Contingency retention. A retention limit set for an item with no predictable demand or quantifiable requirement. This item would normally be potential DOD excess stock except for a determination that the quantity is retained for possible contingencies for U.S. forces.

(22) Potential Security Assistance Stock. Quantity is considered as part of the contingency retention stock and will be the sum of the manually loaded Contingency Retention Stock quantity and the Potential Security Assistance Stock quantity.

(23) Potential DOD excess. The quantity of an item above all authorized retention limits but for which final determination as DOD excess has not been made.

(24) Lines 21 and 22. For local use.

5-10. Central secondary item stratification for repair

Use the central secondary item stratification for repair to develop two separate reports. Base one on the item's standard price; base the second on the item's repair cost. Figure 5-4 is a sample of the repair stratification based on the item's standard unit price.

a. Opening position. The opening position includes requirements for assets which should be on hand as of the date of the stratification. This section sets the average quantity and value of materiel required to be on hand to sustain operations until repairs can be completed. It also measures the availability of assets to meet these requirements. The stratification elements are as follows:

(1) Assets, stratification date. The total asset status, as of the stratification date. This includes serviceable and unserviceable stock on hand and assets on order and under contract (funds obligated) or in the purchase request stage (committed).

(2) Assets, anticipated non-applicable. Those quantities of the total unserviceables shown on line A.1, columns 5 and 6, which have been or will be determined to be beyond economical repair.

(3) AWR requirement, protectable. Prepositioned AWR materiel requirements which are protected for purposes of procurement, funding, and inventory management.

(4) Other AWR requirement, protectable. The portion of the other AWR materiel requirement which is protected for purposes of procurement, funding, and inventory management.

(5) Stock due out. The quantity materiel requisitioned by using activities which is not immediately available for issue but which is recorded as a stock commitment for issue or purchase for direct delivery as of the stratification date.

(6) Repair Safety Level. The quantity of materiel required to be on hand to permit continued issues should minor interruption of normal repair cycle or unpredictable demand fluctuations occur, based on current requirements computations.

(7) NSO. The current inventory requirement for insurance items. This element may also be used for other similar requirements with appropriate justification.

(8) RLT. The total demands from the time an unserviceable item is processed for induction into the repair line until it is repaired and ready for issue.

(9) Repair accumulation time. The total demands from the time an unserviceable item is picked up on the supply record until it is processed for induction into the repair line. This includes the time necessary to accumulate sufficient items to effect an economic repair quantity. This portion of the repair cycle requirement is not authorized for stratification within Army.

(10) Total requirements and assets. The sum of lines A.3 through A.9 for each column.

(11) Assets beyond repair action point. For local use.

b. Current FY. This section represents requirements and assets applicable to the balance of the CY and is only completed on the 30 June stratification. It simulates a beginning posture for the AY. The requirements for the CY represent recurring and nonrecurring demands projected for the period, levels, and lead times. The total recurring and nonrecurring demands from the stratification cutoff date to the end of the CY are included as memo entries. Demands for stratification purposes (entered in column 1 (requirements)) are those projected from the beginning of the period to the date of the last repair induction in the period. Compute the levels to be entered in column 1 based on an amount of time equivalent to a repair lead time plus repair accumulation time (such as repair cycle) from the date of last repair induction during the AY. Stratify items not expected to be in a repair position in the CY on the basis of levels and lead time forecasted to exist at the end of the CY.

(1) Assets, stratification date. Same as a(1), above. In addition, enter assets expected to be received from procurement which are applicable to the current year in column 4.

(2) Lines B.2 through B.5. Same as a(2) through (5), above.

(3) Demands, recurring. The estimated recurring demands for issues of items during the current year from the beginning of the period to the date of last induction in the period, exclusive of those shown as stock due-out. Under "memo entry," record the total estimated nonrecurring demands of items from the stratification cutoff date to the end of the current year.

(4) Demands, nonrecurring. The projected/programmed nonrecurring demands of the items during the current year from the beginning of the period to the date of last induction in the period, exclusive of those shown as stock due-out. Under "memo entry," record the total estimated nonrecurring demands of items from the stratification cutoff date to the end of the current year.

(5) Total demands. The sum of line B.6A and B.6B.

(6) Safety level. Same as a(6), above, but computed a repair lead time plus repair accumulation time away from the date of last induction.

(7) Line B.8 through B.10. Same as a(7) through (9), above, but computed as of the date of last induction.

(8) Total requirements and assets. The sum of lines B.3 through B.10 for each column.

(9) Assets beyond current year. For local use.

c. AY section. The AY section represents those requirements and assets applicable to the 12 months following the CY. The requirements for the AY represent recurring and nonrecurring issues projected for the period as well as levels and lead times. The total recurring and nonrecurring issues for the AY are included as memo entries. Issues for stratification purposes, and to be entered in column 1 (requirements), are those projected from the beginning of the period to date of last induction in the period. Compute the levels to be entered in column 1 based on an amount of time that is equivalent to a repair lead time plus repair accumulation time (such as repair cycle) from the date of last induction in the AY.

(1) Assets beginning AY. This entry reflects projected assets as of 30 September after the stratification cutoff date. Base the assets projected on a line item simulation of forecasted issues, recoveries, and deliveries from procurement. Column 4 will include for the 12 months following the stratification date expected receipts from procurement applicable to the AY. Assets are as of the end of the CY in terms of serviceable stock on hand, unserviceable stock on hand scheduled, and unserviceable stock on hand unscheduled.

(2) Elements C.2 through C.11. Stratification elements for the AY are comparable to the CY except that stock due out is simulated as of 30 September following the CY. Also levels are computed based on an amount of time equal to a RLT plus accumulation time away from the date of last induction in the AY.

(3) Total requirements and assets. The sum of lines C.3 through C.13 for each column.

(4) Assets, beyond AY requirement. For local use.

d. Budget year, FY. The BY position represents those requirements and assets applicable to the FY which follows the AY. The requirements for the BY represent recurring and nonrecurring issues projected for the period as well as levels and lead times. The recurring and nonrecurring issues and their total for the 12 months of the BY are included as memo entries. Compute demands for stratification purposes, and enter them in column 1 based on an amount of time equivalent to a repair lead time plus accumulation time away from the date of late induction.

(1) Assets beginning BY. These are projected assets as of 30 September following the end of the AY. The assets projection are based on a line item simulation of forecasted issues, recoveries, and deliveries from procurement during the AY period. Column 4 will include expected receipts from procurement applicable to the BY.

(2) Elements D.2 through D.14. Stratification elements for the BY are comparable to the AY. The exception is that stock due out is simulated as of 30 September following the AY. The levels are computed based on an amount of time equivalent to the repair lead time plus accumulation time from the date of last induction in the BY.

(3) Assets end BY. The simulated assets as of 30 September which end the BY.

(4) Stock due out end BY. This is the stock due out position expected to exist at the end of the BY.

e. Allocation of assets. The sequence of allocating assets to requirements are as follows:

(1) Column 2. Apply serviceable stock on hand by priority to all requirements.

(2) Column 3. Stratify anticipated serviceable returns against all residual deficits.

(3) Column 4. Stratify procurement receipts within the period against all residual deficits.

(4) Column 5. Stratify unserviceable on hand, scheduled, stock against all residual deficits.

(5) Column 6. Stratify unserviceable on hand stock not scheduled against all residual deficits. This includes all other unserviceable stock not reflected in columns 4 and 5.

(6) Column 7. Line 2 of sections B, C, and D of the repair stratification includes those recoverable unserviceable returns from the date of last induction to the end of the period. Other lines stratify those returns against all residual deficits.

(7) Column 8. Lines 3 through 10 of section A, lines 3 through 11 of section B, and lines 3 through 14 of sections C and D is the sum of stratified unserviceable on hand unscheduled stock (column 6) and the recoverable unserviceable returns (column 7).

5-11. Oversea command CONUS installation stratification

a. The OCONUS and CONUS installation stratification is for assets below the IMM sustainment or national level. The data is used in preparing stratification reports, apportionment requests, and budget estimates.

b. The stratification provides opening and retention position. It shows the requirements for assets which should be either on hand or on order as of the stratification date to sustain operations until shortages can be replenished and delivered. It shows the retention limit elements against which assets in long supply may be held and is also used to measure assets available to meet requirements.

c. Data resulting from this stratification is used to determine the effectiveness of the supply control process, determine the adequacy of policy guidance, and evaluate progress made toward budgetary goals. The opening/retention position stratification process is applied each time the supply status of an individual item is studied or reviewed. The stratification shows the results of the supply control process applied in the computation of requisitioning objectives and retention limits on which supply control decisions are made. Stockage levels, demand requirements, and retention limits against which assets are stratified will be those which the supply analyst has used to direct procurement or requisitioning, rebuild, retention, disposal, and other supply control decisions. The stratification process and reports will reflect the direct results of the most recent supply requirement computations. The columnar headings and priority of stratification elements to include line numbers and titles will be identical to those on DA Form 1887 (Quarterly Stratification Report of Secondary Items, Part B--Oversea Command and CONUS Installation Assets).DA Form 1887 is available on the APD Web site ( ).

d. Columnar headings are as follows:

(1) Stratification elements (column A). Elements are listed in this column in the priority in which on-hand and due-in assets are applied to requirements and retention limits (column B) and dues out (column C). This is on an individual line item basis.

(2) Requirements and retention limit (column B). This column reflects the value of requirements or retention limit as applicable to each stratification element. Amounts reported will represent requirements developed in the supply control process or retention levels approved by the appropriate authority.

(3) Due out (memo) (column C). This column reflects the value of dues-out to customers applicable to the appropriate stratification elements.

(4) Serviceable stock on hand (column D). Serviceable stock on hand will be applied in priority sequence beginning with line 3 (prepositioned war reserve, protectable).

(5) Unserviceable stock on hand (column E). Unserviceable stock on hand will be applied in priority sequence to the remaining requirements after application of serviceable assets on hand. These assets will be stratified to include all unserviceable assets which have not been condemned or otherwise deemed not economically reparable. The total unserviceable assets on hand will be discounted to recognize potential condemnation (para 5-7 ). Unserviceable stocks discounted are shown parenthetically on lines 2, 8, and 8b. On-hand condemned stocks (condition codes H and P) are reflected on line 8 and either 8a or 8b depending on whether or not these assets have been reported as excess.

(6) Due in total (column F). These assets include shipments in transit and stock due in from CONUS depots, local procurement, and other sources. These assets are applied by priority to the residual deficits.

(7) Due in procurement (memo)(column G). Stock due in from CONUS depots, or local procurement will be shown as a memo breakout of column F. The stock due in from other than CONUS depots or local procurement, also in column F, will represent stock due in from customer returns or through redistribution of stock between commands or CONUS installations.

(8) Logistical ratio of assets to requirements (column H). This ratio is used to measure the effectiveness of the asset position against the stated requirements formula. It is a percentage value computed by dividing total requirements (column B) into assets (columns D, E, and F) and multiplying the result by 100. The ratio will be computed and entered in column H for lines 3 through 4a(2), 4c through 4c(3), and 4f(2) through subtotal lines for requisitioning objective, nonrecurring demands.

(9) Logistical ratio of requirements to average monthly demand (column 1). This ratio is expressed in months equivalent and is computed for lines 4b, 4d, 4e(1) and (2), 4f(1), and subtotal lines for requisitioning objective, recurring demands, and nonrecurring demands. It is computed by dividing the average monthly demand programmed for the remainder of the apportionment year into the total requirements (column B). The average monthly demand is computed by dividing the months remaining in the fiscal year into the amount on line 5a(1) of DA Form 1887 as follows:

(a) For a September stratification report, divide 12 into the amount on line 5a(1).

(b) For a December stratification report, divide 9 into the amount on line 5a(1).

(c) For a March stratification report, divide 6 into the amount on line 5a(1).

(d) For a June stratification report, divide 3 into the amount on line 5a(1).

(10) Deficit (column J). Column J reflects requirements less the assets. It is computed by subtracting the sum of columns D, E, and F from column B. If the on-hand assets exceed requirements, place the difference in brackets.

e. Stratification elements in column A are as follows:

(1) Assets, stratification date (line 1). This line shows the total assets on hand and due in as of the stratification date. These assets include serviceable stock on hand, unserviceable stock on hand, stock due in from procurement and documented returns, or redistribution actions.

(2) Assets, anticipated non-recoverable (line 2). The total unserviceables on hand to include suspended medical materiel included in line 1 which have been or will be determined to be beyond economical repair and which will be condemned or otherwise lost during the repair cycle. These assets will not be applied to any of the stratification elements on lines 3 through 8b of the stratification report.

(3) Prepositioned AWR, protectable (line 3). The sum of lines 3a through 3c of the stratification report.

(a) Operational projects--line 3a. This line shows materiel for DA approved projects required to be held at installation/materiel management center (MMC) level when reaction time of contingency plan(s) supported does not permit stockage at the depot level.

(b) Other: U.S.--line 3b. Materiel required to be held at installation/MMC to support deployment strengths specified in Rapid Deployment Force logistics instructions but not specifically listed in logistics annexes of Joint Chiefs of Staff (JCS) approved contingency plans. This includes Army war reserve (AWR) materiel for hospital expansion, operation of blood donor centers, and materiel for supplemental medical materiel program ( AR 40-61 ), to include packing and crating materiel.

(c) Other: Allied forces--line 3c. This line consists of the Allied forces AWRSA requirements that must be positioned prior to hostilities at or near the point of planned use or issue to ensure timely support of a designated force during the initial phase of war. The requirement established for this element is that portion which is protectable for purposes of asset application, procurement, and funding.

(4) Requisitioning objective (line 4). The sum of lines 4a through 4f.

(a) Stock due out--line 4a. The sum of lines 4a(1)(stocked items) and 4a(2)(non-stocked items). Stocked and non-stocked (fringe) items represent materiel which has been requisitioned by the ordering (using) activity but is not immediately available for issue and is recorded as a commitment for future issue.

(b) Safety level--line 4b. Materiel that is required to be on hand to permit continued operations in the event of minor interruption of normal replenishment action or unpredictable fluctuation in demand, based on the rates applicable to current requirement computations.

(c) Numerical stockage objective (line 4c). The quantity of an item for which a fixed level, not computed on a recurring demand basis, is maintained to meet possible occasional or intermittent requirements. Numerical stockage items are stocked because of their essentiality or a procurement lead time that is longer than normal. An item having an NSO will have no other level. The NSO is the sum of lines 4c(2) and 4c(3) of DA Form 1887 .

(1) Insurance items (line 4c(1). Not applicable.

(2) Mission essential (line 4c(2)). Secondary items of functional repair parts not otherwise authorized for stockage at the installation level but required to ensure operation of an end item or facility that is vital to a defense mission. The bulk of this stockage is for support of the prescribed load list (PLL).

(3) Other stockage (line 4c(3)). All other materiel maintained for a known requirement but not delineated on line 4c(2) or line 4f. This includes but is not limited to standby support items, mandatory stockage items, inventory temporarily in use, clothing sales store inventories, and operational rations.

(d) Repair cycle (line 4d). Not applicable.

(e) Order and ship time (line 4e). The sum of lines 4e(1) and 4e(2).

(1) Order time (line 4e(1)). The estimated recurring demands for issues during the interval between the date of a procurement order or requisition and the date the materiel would normally be shipped by the supplying activity. In the case of reparables that are repaired or rebuilt by the ordering activity, this element will represent the condemnation rate due to wearout plus nonrecurring demands during the same timeframe.

(2) Ship time (line 4e(2)). The estimated recurring demands for issues during the interval between the date the supply activity ships the materiel and the date it is recorded on the receiving activity's accountable records. In the case of reparables that are repaired or rebuilt by the ordering activity, this element will represent the condemnation rate due to wearout plus nonrecurring demands during the same timeframe.

(f) Operating level (4f). The quantity required to sustain operations in the interval between receipt of a replenishment shipment and submission of a subsequent replenishment requisition. These quantities should be based on the established replenishment period. The full operating level is included to display the maximum on-hand requirement as of a moment in time. Elements of the operating level are as follows:

(1) Recurring demand items (line 4f(1)). Items that experience sufficient demand to qualify for stockage.

(2) Depot maintenance (line 4f(2)). Not applicable.

(3) Concurrent parts (line 4f(3)). Not applicable.

(g) Subtotal requisitioning objective recurring demands. The sum of lines 4b, d, e(1), e(2), and f(1).

(h) Subtotal requisitioning objective nonrecurring demands. The sum of lines 4c, f(2), and f(3).

(5) AAO issue requirements (line 5). The sum of lines 5a through c.

(a) Apportionment year FY (line 5a). The AY represents the subsequent FY or a 12-month period in a 30 September stratification, a 9-month period in a 31 December stratification, a 6-month period in a 31 March stratification, or a 3-month period in a 30 June stratification. It is the sum of lines 5a(1) through (3).

(1) Recurring demands (line 5a(1)). The estimated demands forecast through supply control procedures for issues during the period from stratification date to the end of the AY.

(2) Nonrecurring demands (line 5a(2)). The projected or programmed nonrecurring demands forecast through supply control procedures for issues during the period from stratification date to the end of the AY.

(3) Nonstockage demands (line 5a(3)). The projected or programmed demands for issues of nonstockage items during the period from stratification date to the end of the AY.

(b) Budget year FY (line 5b). The BY represents the FY following the AY. It is the sum of lines 5b(1) through (3).

(1) Recurring demands (line 5b(1)). The estimated recurring demands forecast through supply control procedures for issues during the BY. The forecast of requirements should be at the same rate as for the CY. It should be adjusted when necessary to compensate for any projected program changes that may not have been considered in computing requirements for the CY.

(2) Nonrecurring demands (line 5b(2)). The projected or programmed nonrecurring demands forecast through supply control procedures for issues during the BY.

(3) Nonstockage demands (line 5b(3)). The projected or programmed demands for issues of nonstockage items during the BY.

(c) Balance, AAO (line 5c). Three months of demands as of 31 December, 6 months as of 31 March, 9 months as of 30 June, and 0 months as of 30 September.

(6) Balance, prepositioned Army war reserve (line 6). The sum of lines 6a through c. The nonprotectable portion of the PWRR that represents the unfunded deficiency.

(a) Operational projects (line 6a). The nonprotectable portion of the operational projects.

(b) Other: Balance, U.S. (line 6b). The nonprotectable portion of the other prepositioned war reserves less those requirements entered on line 6c of the stratification report.

(c) Other: Balance, Allied Forces (line 6c). The nonprotectable portion of the other prepositioned war reserves less those requirements entered on line 6b of the stratification report.

(7) Economic retention (line 7). Materiel authorized as contingency requirements.

(8) Local excess (line 8). The sum of lines 8a and b.

(a) Reported excess (line 8a). That portion of excess materiel that has been reported for disposition instructions as being in excess of authorized retention levels.

(b) Unreported excess (line 8b). That portion of excess materiel that has not been reported for disposition instructions or is not reportable.

f. Memorandum entries are as follows:

(1) Demands. Enter separately the dollar value of the requisitioning objective, nonrequisitioning objective, and nonstockage demands experienced during the quarter for the materiel being reported. Demands will not be cumulative for the FY.

(a) Requisitioning objective items. Enter the dollar value of demands for requisitioning objective items. This includes both recurring and nonrecurring demands.

(b) Nonrequisitioning objective items. Enter the dollar value of demands for standby, mission essential, and other demands.

(c) Nonstockage items. Enter the dollar values of fringe and direct delivery demands.

(2) Materiel repaired. Enter the dollar value of materiel that was repaired and reclassified as serviceable during the report period.

(3) Unserviceable stocks scheduled for repair. Enter the dollar value of unserviceable stocks reported in column E for which the item manager has directed repair or rebuild.

Section IV
Reduced Price Initiative

5-12. Establishment of reduced price initiative

The reduced price initiative (RPI) was established as a test in 1995 to save operation and maintenance dollars that were being used to repair items in long supply at wholesale. The success of the program has been proven. This establishes the RPI as a permanent Army program to reduce long supply items and improve stewardship of limited resources.

5-13. Criteria for selection to the reduced price initiative program

The following criteria will apply to RPI candidate items:

a. Must be Army managed.

b. Must be reparable.

c. Cannot be obsolete.

d. Must have enough on-hand assets to remain on the RPI list for at least one year.

e. Must be in long supply (that is, have assets beyond the Approved Acquisition Objective).

5-14. Governing rules:

a. The reduced price will reflect a percentage of AMDF value calculated annually based on asset posture.

b. Prices will be changed to reflect RPI during the annual price update (APU).

c. RPI items may not be bought for resale within OMA.

d. RPI items are not authorized for retail stockage above the requisitioning objective (RO).

e. Repair is not authorized for items on the RPI list.

f. Disposition for unserviceable RPI items will be in accordance with the instructions on the annual RPI list.

Section V
Financial Inventory Reporting

5-15. Objectives of financial inventory reporting

The objectives of financial inventory reporting are to provide —

a. HQDA with data on Army-owned, stock fund secondary and PA Funded item inventories.

b. Changes in inventory and stratification of assets for PA stock fund financed inventories.

c. Basic financial inventory data for use by inventory managers to develop and defend budget estimates and apportionment and reapportionment requests.

d. A means of measuring progress toward established goals.

e. Historical data used by the inventory manager to-

(1) Determine the degree of compliance with and adequacy of program and policy guidance.

(2) Equate supply operations.

(3) Equate stock control operations.

(4) Consider trends in inventory status and activity.

(5) Compare available assets with authorized retention levels.

(6) Compile demand and issue data.

(7) Determine unserviceable inventories.

(8) Determine other areas requiring control by Army managers at all levels.

5-16. Criteria for reporting

Financial inventory reporting applies to stratification of assets for PA-financed principal items, including assets in use. Reporting requirements also apply to changes in inventory and the stratification of PA-financed and stock fund-financed items on stock records in the Army supply system worldwide. For the purpose of these reports, principal items in CONUS sites below sustainment or national level will be considered as assets in use. The following are excluded from these reporting requirements:

a. Aircraft, intercontinental ballistic missiles, and intermediate range ballistic missiles.

b. Secondary items with troop units, to include the National Guard and Reserve Components.

c. Items funded by an industrial fund.

d. Property acquired for civil function use.

e. Plant and production equipment carried in the supply system inventory. This is equipment in use, on standby, or idle at military sites, contractors' plants, or locations outside the military supply system. It is also equipment reportable to the Defense Industrial Plant Equipment Center or a production equipment control agency as idle and available for use screening.

f. Material in Army storage facilities owned by other DOD components or other Government departments or agencies.

g. Any item installed in, or part, of a higher assembly.

5-17. Reporting activities

Financial inventory reporting requirements apply, in whole or in part, to the following:

a. DCS, G-4.

b. FORSCOM and subordinate commands.

c. TRADOC and subordinate elements.

d. Headquarters of ACOMs, ASCCs, and DRUs overseas and subordinate elements.

e. AMC and subordinate elements.

f. Office of TSG.

g. U.S. Army Security Agency.

h. Defense Supply Service, Pentagon.

i. U.S. Army Communications Command.

j. NGB.

5-18. General reporting instructions

This paragraph gives instructions for reporting certain financial data for items in the Army supply system.

a. Submit comprehensive narrative analyses with all feeder and consolidated financial inventory reports listed in paragraph 5-21 . The narrative will explain significant financial and supply management operations and comment on the progress made. It will describe corrective actions started or planned in connection with inventory positions, supply and financial trends, and significant results made evident by comparative review. For maximum effectiveness, explanations accompanying the reports should represent a joint effort among all elements of the reporting activity whose functions influence the data reported. These analyses will be brief, complete statements supporting or explaining abnormal and/or highlighted changes in inventories and/or funding balances. Statistical supply control data must be accompanied by enough supplemental information to permit an adequate appraisal of the progress of program performance. Narrative analyses must fully explain significant occurrences that cause questionable trends, deviations from forecasts, and/or major deficiencies. Narratives should not explain obvious causes of trend differences. Preparing agencies should analyze data being reported and add to them as needed. An effective narrative analysis must emphasize the following:

(1) How much the analysis will improve overall financial and logistical management.

(2) The prompt identification of problem areas and corrective actions required.

(3) The development of explanations and data in such detail as to satisfy the "need to know" of the ascending echelons of supply and demand.

(4) Whether operations showing significant deviations from approved plans can be brought back into line with these plans or whether the plan must be adjusted, and why.

b. Within 55 days after the close of each semiannual reporting period, the NGB will advise AMC (AMCRM-FW) by letter of the value of the inventory managed by the U.S. Property and Fiscal Offices (USPFO).

c. Use standard prices for financial reporting of inventories (DFAS-IN 37-1).

d. The due dates represent the number of calendar days following the close of the reporting period. These dates allow each reporting command the maximum time possible; extensions cannot be considered. Each command consolidating data for forwarding to a higher echelon will report overdue data so that corrective action may be taken.

5-19. Security classification

Financial inventory reports prepared per this section will normally be unclassified. If required, classification will be per AR 380-5 , and will be forwarded under separate cover.

5-20. DD Form 1138-1 (Inventory Report of Principal or Secondary Items), RCS DD-M(A)1000

a. General reporting. DD Form 1138-1 is available on the OSD website (http// ACOM, ASCC, and DRU reports and forward them to HQDA (SAFM-BUR), Washington, DC 20310-0109, no later than 75 days after the end of the reporting period. DD Form 1138-1 will cover worldwide assets on hand in storage, in use when not incorporated into a higher assembly, in transit, and in other status. Prepare the report as follows:

(1) Report assets in thousands of dollars, right justified.

(2) Report in-use and in-store entries separately.

(3) Abbreviate as needed.

(4) Lines 7a and 10a are memo entries included in lines 7 and 10 totals.

(5) Total assets, line 16, must equal the total of lines 9 through 15 (omitting 10a) and the total of lines 17 through 19.

(6) Total assets, line 16, must agree with prior report submission to AMC.

b. DD Form 1138-1 for principal items. This report for principal items is prepared as of 30 September. Entries for DD Form 1138-1 for principal items are in table 5-7 . The inventory report for principal items is required from the US Army Intelligence and Security Command, the US Army Information Systems Command, and the AMC IMMs. Preparation is summary by the reporting elements and in subsummary by appropriation and budged project code. Submit four copies to AMC within 55 days of the "as of" date. Also, AMC submits a consolidated summary report for all categories of principal items.

c. DD Form 1138-1 for secondary items. DLA will prepare the inventory report for secondary items as of 31 March and 30 September for ASF. TSG will prepare the inventory report as of 31 March and 30 September for ASF and PA. Submit two copies to AMC within 55 days of the cutoff date. Entries for DD Form 1138-1 for secondary items are in table 5-7 . See table 5-8 for the DOD category of materiel codes.

5-21. DA Form 1887, (Quarterly Stratification Report of Secondary Items, Part B--Oversea Command and CONUS Installation Assets), RCS CSGLD-1438

a. DA Form 1887 (Quarterly Stratification Report of Secondary Items, Part B--Oversea Command and CONUS Installation Assets) is required for internal Army financial inventory management. This report will be prepared by headquarters, oversea commands, or subordinate commands; FORSCOM, TRADOC, Class II installations reporting directly to AMC; and subordinate commands of AMC. Reports will include material on accountable records of oversea depots and CONUS installations and will show asset requirements and stratification of on-hand and on-order assets applicable to these requirements. Separate reports will be prepared for each materiel category of SMA secondary items through the first and second position of the MATCAT. A summary report will be prepared for all materiel categories. In addition, consolidated reports will be prepared by AMC for the AMC Installations Division. Forward the consolidated AMC installation report and narrative analyses per table 5-9 . Submit these reports quarterly in three copies HQ, AMC, ATTN: AMCRM-D, 5001 Eisenhower Avenue, Alexandria, VA 22333, not later than 55 calendar days after the end of that reporting period.

b. The oversea command and CONUS installation stratification (para 5-12 ) is the source for the data to be included in this report. Round off all dollar amounts to the nearest thousand dollars.

c. Instructions for completing DA Form 1887 are shown in figure 5-5

d. The narrative analysis prepared for the quarterly stratification report at the end of each semiannual reporting period will be preceded by a list of memorandum data that the applicable reporting activities are required to complete:

(1) Materiel on order (any source).

(2) Assets in transit from procurement (accepted at source but not received).

(3) Shipments in transit between storage locations.

(4) Assets temporarily in use.

(5) Assets on loan.

(6) Inventories in process of assembly or disassembly.

(7) Adjustments (the difference between on-hand inventory value on financial records and the value of on-hand inventory reflected on DA Form 1887 ).

Table 5-1. Materiel category and IMM or SICA/SICC (position 1 of the MATCAT code)
Alpha Code Item Manager Materiel category IMM or SICA/SICC
B A12 Ground forces support materiel (other support equipment) U.S. Army Soldiers, Biological and Chemical (SBCCOM) Command Natick, MA 01760
C B69 Medical/dental materiel (See note 1.) U.S. Medical Materiel Agency, (USAMMA), Fort Detrick, MD 21702-5001
D B14 Single manager conventional ammunition U.S. Army Joint Munitions Command (JMC), Rock Island, IL 61299
E A35 General Supplies (DLA and GSA items) (See note 1.) Field Support Command (FSC) Materiel Management Team, New Cumberland, PA 17070-5008
F AP5 Clothing, textiles, heraldry, subsistence, and non-medical toiletries (DLA and GSA items) (See note 1.) SBCCOM, U.S. Army Organization, Philadelphia, PA 19101
G B16 Communications and electronics equipment, electronics materiel (See note 1.) U.S. Army Communications-Electronics Life Cycle Management Command (CECOM LCMC), Fort Monmouth, NJ 07703-5506
H B17 Aircraft, aircraft materiel (See note 1.) U.S. Army Aviation and Missile U.S. Army Aviation and Missile Life Cycle Management Command Command, Redstone Arsenal, AL 35898
J A35 Ground forces support materiel (DLA and GSA items) (Se note 1.) FSC, New Cumberland, PA 17070
K AKZ Combat, tactical, and support vehicles, vehicular components, and peculiar repair parts related to mobility (See note 1.) U.S. Army Tank-Automotive Life Cycle Management Command (TACOM LCMC), Warren, MI 48397-5000
L B64 Missiles, missile materiel (See note 1.) U.S. Army Aviation and MissIle Life Cycle Management Command U.S. Army Aviation and Missile Life Cycle Management Command, Redstone Arsenal, AL 35898-5230
M B14 Ammunition, weapons and tracked combat vehicles, special weapons, chemical and fire control materiel (See notes 1 and 2.) U.S. Army Armament and Chemical Acquisition Logistics Activity, (ACALA) Rock Island, IL 61299-6000
P B46 Signal intelligence/electronic warfare equipment CECOM LCMC, Ft Monmouth, NJ 07703-5006
Q B16 Electronic materiel (DLA items) (See note 1.) CECOM LCMC, Ft Monmouth, NJ 07703-5006
R A35 Bulk and packaged petroleum fuels, packaged petroleum products, containers, and accessories thereof, certain chemical and solid fuels (DLA and GSA items) (See note 1.) U.S. AWRSTPCMD, New Cumberland, PA 17070
S AP5 Subsistence (DLA and GSA items) (See note 1.) U.S. Army Support Organization, Philadelphia, PA 19101
T A35 Industrial supplies (DLA and GSA items) (See note 1.) U.S. Army Aviation Troop Command, New Cumberland, PA 17070
U B56 COMSEC materiel U.S. Army CECOM LCMC Security Logistics Activity (CSLA), Fort Huachuca, AZ 85613-7090

1. Denotes secondary item materiel category titles.
2. Does not include tracked vehicle repair parts.

Table 5-2. Appropriation and budget activity account code (position 2 of the MATCAT code) for PA principal items (see Note)
ABA code Appropriation category Appropriation Budget project
A Aircraft 21*2031 1100
B Modification of aircraft 21*2031 1200
C Avionics support equipment 21*2031 1410
  Common ground equipment 21*2031 1420
D Modification of weapons and combat tracked vehicles. 20*2033 3300
E Other missiles 20*2032 2200
F Modification of missiles 20*2032 2300
G Missile support equipment 21*2032 2511
H Tracked combat vehicles 20*2033 3111
J Weapons and other combat vehicles 20*2033 3211
K Ammunition 21*2034 4111
L Tactical vehicles 21*2035 5111
M Nontactical vehicles 21*2035 5121
N Telecommunications equipment 21*2035 5211
P Other communications and electronics systems and equipment 21*2035 5212
Q Other support equipment 21*2035 5310
. Legend: * - The last digit of the applicable fiscal year.

. PA principal items are not affected by the stock funding of depot level reparables. Therefore, no change was made to ABA codes and cross references.

Table 5-3. Appropriation and budget activity account code (position 2 of the MATCAT code) for Army working capital fund (AWCF) reparable items (see Note)
NICP Bill to address Fund Appropriation DLR Log support
ACALA W52H09 MC 97X4930 .AC9G .AC5G
AMCOM(A) W58HOZ HC 97X4930 .AC9T .AC5T
AMCOM(M) W31G3H LC 97X4930 .AC9F .AC5F
SBCCOM W58HZ1 BC 97X4930 .AC9N .AC5N
. Legend: X — The fund is continuing and no year is shown.

. Since Jan 92, only ABA code 2 is assigned to secondary items. A consumable/reparable indicator code R used with ABA code 2 indicates that an item is an AWCF reparable item.

Table 5-4. Management inventory segment of the category structure (position 3 of the MATCAT code)
Numeric Code Description and use
1 Reparable item (excluding insurance and provisioning items). This code identifies a durable item which can normally be repaired economically by depots or lower echelons of maintenance. Assign this code only to an item with both a maintenance repair code (MRC) (4th position of the SMR code) of O, F, H, L, or D; and a recoverability code 5th position of the SMR code) of O, F, H, L, D, or A.
2 Nonreparable item (excluding insurance and provisioning items). This code identifies an item which is not reparable. Assign this code only when the MRC is Z or B, and the recoverability code is Z or A.
3 Insurance item. This code identifies an item designated as an insurance item as defined in the glossary . Assign this code only if the acquisition advice code is Z and the essentiality code indicates the item is essential.
4 Provisioning item. This code identifies a new item for stock being introduced through the provisioning process, and for which there is insufficient demand history to manage normally. A provisioning item can be either reparable or nonreparable.

Table 5-5. Specific group/generic code (position 4 of the MATCAT)
Generic code Specific group
A Fixed wing aircraft
B Rotary wing aircraft
C Other aircraft categories
D Surface to air missiles
E Surface to surface missiles
F Other missile related materiel
G Artillery
H Individual and crew-served weapons
I Construction equipment
J Tanks
K Combat vehicles
L Other weapons categories
M Armored carriers
N Tactical vehicles
P Other automotive categories
Q Avionics
R Tactical and strategic communications
S Surveillance target acquisition and night observation
T Other electronics equipment
U POL, soldier and combat support systems
V Power generating systems
W Line of communication/base support systems
X Special ammunition
Y Conventional ammunition
Z Other munitions/chemical biological radiological categories
0 Medical materiel
2 Missile class V components (except SAFEGUARD)
3 Missile class V components (SAFEGUARD)
4 Communications systems agency and satellite communications agency equipment
5 Communications systems equipment
6 Individual and crew-served weapons

Table 5-6. Generic category code (positions 4 and 5 of MATCAT code)
Group Code Description
Fixed-wing aircraft AD U-8
  AG U-21
  AH OV-1
  AM Fixed-wing aircraft not supported by DA
  AN C-12-series aircraft
  AP Close range unmanned aerial vehicle (UAV-CR)
Rotary-wing aircraft BA UH-1
  BB AH-1, UH-1, OV-1 turbine engine
  BC AH-1
  BD MH-60K helicopter, utility
  BE UH-60
  BF UH-60 turbine engine
  BG AH-64 turbine engine
  BH MH-E helicopter, cargo-transportation
  BJ AH-64 airframe
  BK CH-47
  BL CH-47 turbine engine
  BN UH-60L/AH-64A engine (T-701C)
  BP OH-58A and OH-58C
  BQ T63-A-700 and T63-A-720 (turbine engine)
  BR RAH-66 Commanche aircraft
  BS Rotary-wing aircraft not supported by DA
  BT OH-6
  BW SH-60B turbine engine
  BX OH-58D Army helicopter improvement program (AHIP)
  BY OH-58D turbine engine (T703-AD-700)
  BZ AH-64 Longbow
Other aircraft categories CA Target acquisition drone air reconnaissance system
  CC Multiapplication aviation spares
  CD Target acquisition designation sight (TADS) and pilot night vision sensor
  CE Electro-optical (EO) augmentation system
  CG Aviation ground power unit (AGPU)
  CJ Aircraft training aids and devices
  C8 Aviation sets, kits and outfits, aircraft ground support equipment (AGSE), and aircraft life support equipment (ALSE)
Surface to air missiles DB Nike Hercules
  DC Chaparral
  DE Hawk, basic
  DF Missile loader transporter, M501L1
  DH Targets
  DJ Redeye
  DM Air-to-air stinger (ATAS)
  DN Stinger reprogrammable microprocessor/special defense acquisition fund
  DR Stinger
  DS Hawk, improved
  DT Bradley Stinger fighting vehicle-enhanced (BSFV-E) system
  DX Roland
  DY Standard vehicle-mounted launcher
  D6 Patriot
  D7 Forward area alerting radar (FAAR)
  D9 Line-of-sight forward — heavy (LOS-F-H)
Surface to surface missiles EA Brilliant anti-armor submunition (BAT)
  EC Fiber-optic guided missile (FOG-M) System
  EF Multiple-launch rocket system (MLRS)
  EG 2.75 rocket and M-158A1/M200A1 launcher
  EH Improved Bradley acquisition system (IBAS)
  EK Rocket, high-explosive, 84MM: M136 (AT4)
  EL M-22
  EM Honest John
  EN Lance
  EP Hellfire
  EQ Multipurpose individual munition/short range assault weapon (MPIM/SRAW) system
  ER Follow on to TOW (FOTT)
  ET Advanced antitank weapon system — medium (AAWS-M)
  EU Pershing IA
  EV Shillelagh
  EW TOW infantry fighting vehicle (IFV) (XM2/TOW combat fighting vehicle (CFV) (XM3)
  EX Joint ground-launch tacit rainbow
  EY Land combat support system (LCSS)
  EZ Advanced antitank weapon system — heavy (AAWS-H) kinetic energy missile system
  E1 Tube-launched, optically-tracked, wire guided (TOW) missile
  E2 Tube-launched, optically tracked, wire-guided (TOW 2) missile
  E3 Pershing II
  E4 Improved target acquisition system (ITMS)
  E5 Dragon
  E6 Precision gunnery training system (PGTS)
  E7 TOW 2 infantry fighting vehicle (IFV/TOW 2 cavalry fighting vehicle (CFV)
  E8 Army tactical missile system (ATACMS)
  E9 AAWS-H nonline of sight
Other missile-related materiel FA Ground laser locator designator
  FB Joint Tactical Ground Station (JTAGS)
  FC Modular universal laser equipment (MULE)
  FD AN/TSQ-51 air defense command coordination system
  FE Test Program Sets (TPS)
  FG Thermal imagery and ancillary equipment
  FK Laser target designator
  FM Integrated family of test equipment (IFTE)
  FP Advanced attack helicopter (AAH) U.S. Army Aviation and Missile Life Cycle Management Command-managed subsystem
  FQ Calibration
  FR AAH/target acquisition designation sight (TADS)
  FT Forward area air defense command, control, and intelligence (C2I)
  FV Sentinal
  FW Short range unmanned aerial vehicle (UAV-SR)
  FZ Other multiapplication parts
  F1 AN/GSA-77
  F3 AN/TSQ-73
  F4 TOW Cobra
  F5 Theater high altitude area defense (THAAD) system
  F6 Cobra-NITE (C-NITE)
  F9 General research and development
Artillery GA Gun, antiaircraft, 20MM, towed M167, Vulcan air defense system (VADS), gun 20MM, towed M167A2, product improvement Vulcan air defense system (PIVADS)
  GB Howitzer, 105MM, M101/M101A1
  GC Howitzer, 105MM, M102, W/M6 platform
  GD Howitzer, 155MM, M114/M114A1/M123A1
  GE Howitzer, heavy 8-inch M115
  GF Howitzer, pack 75MM M116, howitzer salute 75MM, M120
  GG Howitzer, 155MM, M198
  GH Howitzer, light towed, 105MM, M119/L119
  GJ Howitzer, light, towed, 105MM, M119A1
  GX Hybrid air defense systems (HADES)
  GZ Miscellaneous artillery
  G9 Other artillery multiapplication parts
Individual and crew-served weapons HA Pistols, 45 caliber, M1911, M1911A1, M119A1, M15
  HB Machine gun, M85-series
  HC Machine gun, 7.62MM, M240
  HD Machine gun, 7.62 MM, M73/ M73A1/M219
  HE Rifle, 7.62MM, M14-series with bipod M2, M21
  HF Rifle, 5.56MM, M16-series with bipod, firing port weapon, rimfire adapter launcher, M234
  HG Submachine gun, caliber .45, M3/M3A1
  HH Machine gun, caliber .50 M2-series with tripod M3 and mount M63
  HJ Machine gun, 7.62MM, M60-series
  HK Mount tripod M122, for 7.62MM/5.56MM machine gun
  HL Machine gun, caliber .30 with tripod
  HM Launcher, grenade, 40MM, M203 for M16 rifle
  HN Launcher, grenade, 40MM, M79
  HP Launcher, rocket 3.5-inch, M20-series with mount
  HQ Gun, automatic, 20MM, M139
  HR Mortar, 120MM
  HS Mortar, 60MM, M2/M19 with mount
  HT Mortar, 81MM, M29-series M1 with mount, M4
  HU Mortar, 4.2-inch, M30 with mount
  HW Rifle, 57MM, M18/M18A1/T15E16
  HX Rifle, 90MM, M67
  HY Rifle, 106MM, M40-series with mount and rifle spotting, M8-series
  HZ Launcher, rocket, 115MM, M91/XM70
  H1 84MM M3 Recoilless Rifle, Multi Role Anti-Armor Anti-Personnel Weapon System (MAAWS)
  H3 Armament subsystem, 30MM, XM139
  H4 Armament subsystem, M28, M28A1, M28A2, M28A3, reflex sight M73/M73A1, helmet sight M128/M36
  H6 Armament subsystem, 20MM and enhanced fire control system, XM97E2
  H7 Armament subsystem, 20MM, XM97E1
  H8 Gun automatic, 25MM, M242
  H9 Other individual and crew-served weapons (excluding code HV assigned to aircraft subsystems)
Construction equipment IA Tractor, full-tracked
  IB Scrapers
  IC Loader, scoop
  ID Road graders
  IE Cranes, wheel
  IF Cranes, 20 to 25 tons
  IG Cranes, crawler
  IH Crane-related construction
  IJ Excavation equipment
  IK Sweepers and snowplows
  IL Asphalt/compaction equipment
  IM Soil, asphalt, concrete, nuclear test sets
  IN Armored combat earthmover (ACE) M9
  IP Concrete paving and water distribution equipment
  IQ Crushing equipment
  IR Compressors and support equipment
Tanks JA Tank, combat, M48-series, 90MM gun
  JB Trainers, tank gunnery
  JC Tank, combat, flame thrower, M67/M67A1/M67A2
  JD Tank, combat, 76MM gun, M41/M41A1/M41A2/M41A3
  JE Tank, M1 Abrams family of vehicles
  JF Tank, combat 120MM gun, M103, M103A1/M103A2 with trainer M119
  JG Tank, combat, 90MM, gun M47
  JH Tank, 105MM, M60A3, TTS
  JJ Tank, combat, 105MM gun, M60/M60A1/M60A3/M48A5
  JK Tank, combat, 152MM gun, M60A2 and trainer, M37
  JL Trainer, driving, M34 for M60 tank series
  JM Subcaliber mount assemblies universal
  JN Trainer, armored vehicle, unit conduct of fire trainer (UCOFT) institutional conduct of fire trainer (ICOFT) 50 and 60 cycle-series
  JP Combat engineer vehicle, full tracked M728
  JQ Armored/reconnaissance/airborne assault vehicles, 152MM, M551 with trainer M40
  JR Simulator tank gunfire, M4/M4A1, for M42, M48, M60 tanks
  JS Bulldozer EM tank-mounted M6/M8/M8A1/M8A2/M8A3/M9
  JT Recovery vehicle, M51/M74/M88
  JU Gun, full tracked, 90MM M56
  JV Recovery vehicle, M578
  JW Tank, Abrams, M1A2 unique
  JX Robotic obstacle breaching assault tank (ROBAT)
  JY Tank, Abrams, M1A1 unique
  JZ Miscellaneous tanks
  J1 Breacher (Grizzly)
  J2 Armored gun system (AGS), XM8
  J3 M1 tank maintenance panel training devices
  J4 Simplified test equipment (STE) M1, M2, and M3
Combat vehicles KA Gun, antiaircraft, self-propelled, 40MM, M42/M42A1
  KC Howitzer, self-propelled 105MM/M52/M52A1
  KD Gun, field artillery self-propelled 175MM, M107, howitzer 8-inch M110
  KE Howitzer, heavy full tracked self-propelled 105MM, M108
  KF Howitzer, full tracked self-propelled 155MM, M109
  KG Howitzer, self-propelled, 155MM, M44/M44A1
  KH Howitzer, heavy full tracked self-propelled 8-inch M55, 155 gun M53
  KK Divisional air defense system (DIVADS) XM247
  KL Gun, antiaircraft, 20MM, self-propelled, M163 (VADS), M741, vulcan chassis, M163A1 (VADS), gun, 20MM, self-propelled, M163A2 (PIVADS)
Light armored vehicle KM Light armored vehicle
  KV Field artillery ammunition support vehicle (FAASV), G801, XM922
  KZ Miscellaneous combat vehicles
Other weapon categories LA Computer gun direction, M18 (FADAC/test set/MLU)
  LB Direct Support Electrical System Test Set (DSESTS) system
  LC Binoculars (standard)
  LD Aiming circle M1/M2/M2A1
  LF Periscope, B.C. M43/M65 telescope observation, M48/M49/XM67, portable
  LG Targets/training devices
  LH Binocular, IR M18
  LJ Chronograph, M36, M90
  LK Shop equipment
  LL Tools and shop sets
  LP Ground-emplaced mine scattering system, XM128, antitank mine dispenser M57
  LQ Plotting sets/boards, fire direction sets
  LS APPS, photolocator
  LU Weapon access delay system (WADS)
  LV Dispenser, general purpose aircraft XM130
  LW Multiple integrated laser equipment management system/antitank weapon effect signature simulator (ATWESS)
  LX Backup computer system (BUCS)
  LY Programmable hand-held calculator (PHHC)
  LZ Miscellaneous weapons
  L1 Gauges and miscellaneous test equipment
  L2 Air defense-oriented test equipment
  L3 Armament-oriented test equipment
  L4 Fire control-oriented test equipment
  L5 Other managed component of tool sets
  L6 Major items shop equipment
  L7 Basic issue item sets
  L8 Sergeant York support equipment
  L9 Multiapplication weapon components and parts
Armored carriers MA XM491/XM597/XM598
  MB M113 configuration, carrier, personnel
  MC M113A1/A2 armored personnel carrier combat vehicle, antitank
  MD Carrier 1/2 squad
  ME M8A1 configuration
  MF M17 configuration
  MG M116 configuration
  MH M114 configuration
  MJ XM571 configuration
  MK XM759 configuration
  ML Combat Identification Panel
  MM Infantry fighting vehicle (M2, M2A1, M2A2), cavalry fighting vehicle (M3, M3A1, M3A2)
  MN M106 carrier, mortar, self-propelled, 107MM
  MP M125A1, carrier, mortar
  MQ M548, carrier, cargo
  MR M577, carrier, command post
  MS M132, carrier, flame thrower
MT Armored car commando V100
  MV Improved TOW vehicle (ITV), M901
  MW Fire support team vehicle (FISTV), XM981
  MX XM1059 carrier, smoke generator, full-tracked, armored
  MY Miscellaneous armored carriers
  MZ Other armored carrier multiapplication parts
  M2 Bradley fighting vehicle maintenance training devices
  M3 XM1015 electronic warfare
  M4 M548 family of vehicles, block I modification
  M5 M113 family of vehicles, block I modification
  M6 XM1064, Armored mortar carrier, 120 MM full tracked, self-propelled
  M7 XM1068 carrier, armored command post, Army tactical command and control system (ATCCS), full track
Tactical vehicles NA 14- to 20-ton vehicle configuration, M915A2, M916A1, M1062
  NB 1/4-ton vehicle configuration, M151
  NC 1/2-ton vehicle configuration
  ND 1 1/4-ton vehicle configuration, M880-series
  NE M878 family of vehicles (includes M878 and M878A1)
  NF 3/4-ton vehicle configuration
  NG 1 1/4-ton vehicle configuration, M561-series
  NH 2 1/2-ton vehicle configuration, diesel
  NJ 2 1/2-ton vehicle configuration, gas
  NK 2 1/2-ton vehicle configuration multifuel
  NL 5-ton vehicle configuration, diesel
  NM 5-ton vehicle configuration, gas
  NN 5-ton vehicle configuration, multifuel
  NP 10-ton vehicle configuration, M123 series
  NQ 14- to 20-ton vehicle configuration, M915, M915A1, M916, M917, M918, M919, and M920
  NR Heavy expanded mobility tactical truck (HEMMT), all body types (ABT) M977, M978, M983, M984, M984A1, M985
  NS Commercial utility cargo vehicle
  NT M939 family of vehicles (includes M939A1 and M939A2)
NU Heavy equipment transporter (HET), M746, M747, M911
  NV 2 1/2-ton extended service program (ESP) truck, model M44A3
  NW Heavy equipment transporter system M1070, M1000
  NY 8- to 10-ton vehicle configuration, M520-series, go ability overall economy reliability (GOER)
  NZ Other truck multiapplication parts
  N2 Family of medium tactical vehicles (FMTV), 2 1/2 ton
  N3 Family of medium tactical vehicles (FMTV), 5 ton
  N4 Small unit support vehicle (SUSV)
  N5 High mobility multipurpose wheeled vehicle (HMMWV)
  N6 Fast attack vehicle
  N7 Military motorcycle
  N8 Palletized loading system (PLS), M1074, M1075, M1076, M1077
Other automotive (continued in 8_(alpha)_ group) PA Semitrailer van, medium, greater than 6 ton, to include M348 series
  PB Semitrailer M871 and M127 series
  PC Trailer, utility and cargo configurations
  PD Trailer, 1/4 ton
  PE Trailer, special purpose, bakery
  PF Trailer, M200 series
  PG Trailer, special purpose, radar
  PH 3/4-ton M101-series
  PJ Trailer, 1 1/2 ton, M105/M103/M310 series
  PK Semitrailer vans - light, equal to or less than 6 ton, to include MILVAN chassis
  PL Trailer, prime mover, 5-ton
  PM Miscellaneous combat/tactical common hardware/decals/data plates
  PN Combat/tactical multiuse repair parts (starters, regulators, generators, distributors, fuel pumps, spark plugs, and the like)
  PP Tires
  PQ Special tools (Components)
  PR Modification work order kits
  PS Basic issue items (BII)
  PT Miscellaneous vehicle components
  PU Batteries
  PV Semitrailer/tanker, M900/M131 series
  PW Semitrailer, lowbed, M172, M345, M870 and M872 series
  PX Trailer, bolster/pole hauling configuration
  PY Base-level commercial equipment (BCE)
  PZ Nontactical wheeled vehicles
  P2 Trailer, 400 gal water (M107, M149 series)
  P3 Trailer, bed configurations
  P4 Heavy expanded mobility ammunition trailer (HEMAT) M989, M989A1
  P5 Dolly sets and trailer converters, 2 1/2 ton, M197, M197A1, M198, M198A1, M689, M707, M707A1, M720, M831, M832, M840
  P6 Semitrailer bed configurations
  P7 Trailer, Patriot missile (M860A1) support
  P8 Dolly set, M1022
  P9 Semitrailer van, expandable, M313 and M447 series
Avionics QA Avionics VHF/UHF/AM
  QB Avionics VHF/FM
  QC Avionics Intercoms
  QD Avionics HF/SSB-ICS-VS
  QE Other avionics
  QF Avionics very high frequency omnirange, marker beacon, glide slope (VOR/MB/GS)
  QG Avionics gyro compass (navigation)
  QH Fixed wing unique avionics
  QJ Avionics identification equipment
  QK Air traffic control (ATC) support
  QL Avionics position fixing and ground support
  QM Avionics stabilization/instrumentation
  QN AN/ARC-114/114A radio set
  QP AN/ARC-115/115A
  QQ UH-60 unique avionics items
  QR Inertial navigation systems
  QS Tactical navigation (TACAN) Systems
  QT Fixed base system
  QU AH-64 unique avionics items
  QV AN/ARC-116 radio set
  QW CH-47 unique avionics items
  QX AHIP unique avionics items
  QY AH-I unique avionics items
  QZ Single channel ground air radio system (SINCGARS), airborne radio
  Q1 Survivability radios
  Q2 AN/ARC-164 radio set
  Q3 AN/ARC-186
  Q4 Altimeter indicators
  Q5 Dippler navigation systems
  Q6 Auto direction finder systems
  Q7 Apache ground test station support equipment
  Q8 EH-60A QUICK FIX aircraft unique
  Q9 Avionics shelters
Tactical and strategic communications RA Portable frequency modulation radio communications equipment
  RB Vehicular frequency modulation radio equipment
  RC Amplitude modulation/single side band radio and radio teletypewriter equipment
  RD Watercraft communications equipment
  RE Special radio equipment
  RF Relay and transmission equipment
  RG FDM equipment
  RH Manual Switching
  RJ Tactical fire direction system/advanced field artillery tactical data systems (TACFIRE/AFATDS)
  RK Project code "CXC"
  RL Teletypewriters
  RM Decentralized automated service support system (DAS-3) (AN/MYQ-4/4A)
  RN Maneuver control system (MSC) (AN/UYQ-30/30A)
  RP Facsimiles
  RQ AN/TTC/TYC/-39/39A/39D
  RS AN/PRC-77 radio family
  RT AN/VRC-12 radio family
  RU Vehicular installation units
  RV Tactical satellite (TACSAT) multichannel communication equipment
  RW Mobile subscriber equipment (MSE)
  RX Pulse code modulations (PCM)
  RY Digital group multiplexer (DGM) equipment
  RZ AN/TRC-170
  R1 Radio teletypewriters
  R2 Vehicular installation unit components
  R3 Intermediate forward test equipment
  R4 Communications division cables
  R5 AN/TSC-94A/100A
  R6 Transportable Single Channel Transponder Receiver (TSCTR) Msc-64/GSC_40
  R7 Other vehicular/portable FM equipment
  R9 Single channel ground air radio systems (SINCGARS), ground radio
Surveillance target acquisition and night observation SA Light and special division interim sensor (LSDIS)
  SB Anti-intrusion devices
  SC Airborne sensor systems
  SD Intergators
  SE Image intensification
  SF Battlefield illumination
  SG Infrared systems
  SH Ground photo systems, processing, and interpretation
  SJ Air defense systems support
  SK AN/TPQ-36/37 mortar and artillery radar locating
  SL Interrogator, AN/TPX46
  SM AN/UPD-7 radar system
  SN Manportable common thermal night sights
  SP Position location reporting systems (PLRS), adaptable surface interface terminal (ASIT), Joint tactical information distribution system (JTIDS)
  SQ Bottle cleaning and charging station (AN/TAM-4)
  SR AM/TMQ-31, meteorological
  SS Cable assemblies, electronics
  SV Common modules
  SW Enhanced position location reporting system (EPLRS)
  SX Individual weapon night sights
  SY Crew-served night sights
  SZ Night vision goggles
  S1 Command and Control Vehicle (C2V)
  S2 Joint surveillance target attack radar systems (JOINT STARS)
  S3 SINCGARS installation kits/components
  S4 Tactical terminal adapter (TTA)
  S5 Standard theater command and control system (STACCS)
  S6 Integrated system control (ISYSCON)
  S7 Special Operations Forces (SOF) equipment
  S8 Airborne Mission Planning System (AMPS)
  S9 AN/GSC-9
Other electronic equipment TA Tactical generic
  TB Aircraft survivability equipment less the AN/APR-39 family
  TC Atmospheric sounding, metrological stations and equipment wind measuring
  TD General-purpose test equipment
  TE General-purpose maintenance facility and miscellaneous
  TF General-purpose electrical power equipment
  TG Miscellaneous electrical warfare equipment
  TH Quicklook II
  TJ Batteries, dry
  TK Batteries, storage
  TL Guardrail V
  TM Communications systems support equipment
  TN Radiac detection systems
  TP Other commodity command systems
  TQ Rechargeable batteries
  TR Regency net system
  TS Communication security systems
  TT Tactical fire direction system (TACFIRE) cables
  TU Remotely monitored battlefield sensor system (REMBASS) / improved remotely monitored battlefield sensor system (I-REMBASS)
  TW Installation kit/component
  TX Armed Forces radio equipment
  TY Audiovisual (recorder, reproducer, and public address) and pictorial equipment (FSC 5830, 5835, 6700, and 7700)
  TZ AN/APR-39 family of countermeasure sets
  T1 Satellite communications (SATCOM) cables
  T2 AN/MSM-105 system
  T3 Modular azimuth positioning system (MAPS)
  T4 Television Audiovisual Support Activity audiovisual items
  T5 Digital radio and multiplexer acquisition (DRAMA)
  T6 Standard remote terminal (SRT)
  T7 Lithium batteries
  T8 All source analysis system (ASAS)
  T9 Global positioning system (GPS)
Soldier and combat support systems UA Tactical POL distribution equipment
  UB Bulk POL distribution equipment
  UC POL storage equipment
  UD POL test equipment
  UE Erdlators and related equipment
  UF Water supply and water purification equipment
  UG Repair shop equipment
  UH Food services equipment
  UJ Hygiene/insect control equipment
  UL Topographic and survey equipment
  UM Assault boat equipment
  UP Position and azimuth determining system (PADS)
  UR Countermine equipment
  US Counter intrusion equipment
  UT Counter surveillance equipment
  UU Deployable medical system
  UV Topographic support system
  UX Special inspection equipment and gauges and Force Provider Power generation
Power generation VA Generator sets and related power equipment: systems 60 Hz 15, 30 and 10 kw
  VF Generator sets and related power equipment 60 Hz 45, 60, 75, 150 and larger kw
  VL Generator sets and related power equipment: 60 Hz 0.15 to 3.0 kw
  VM Generator sets and related power equipment: 400 Hz, 0.3 kw and above
  VP Patriot system support
  VR Generator sets and related power Equipment: 60 Hz 5 to 10 kw
  VS Generator sets and related power equipment: 28 V DC, 5 to 10 kw
  VW Light sets, generator sets and related power equipment 400 Hz 0.3 kw and above
  V4 Military standard engines and repair parts
Line of communication and Support systems WA Port support and watercraft base equipment
  WB Bridge armored vehicle and support equipment
  WC Container equipment
  WD Diving equipment system
  WE Army functional component system
  WF Railway power and support equipment
  WG Firefighting and support equipment
  WH Lighter air cushion vehicle, base 30-ton (LACV-30)
  WJ Electric materiel handling
  WK Diesel engine driven materiel handling equipment
  WL Rough terrain materiel and container handling equipment
  WM Prefabricated structures equipment
  WN Fixed bridges and support equipment
  WP Floating bridges and support equipment
  WR Mobile assault/ribbon bridges and support equipment
  WS Air delivery equipment
  WT Watercraft and related sets, kits, and outfits
  WU Tool sets and miscellaneous sets, kits, and outfits
  WW Working/preservation and packaging and other base support equipment
  WX Cryogenic and support equipment
  WZ Container express (CONEX)/ military-owned demountable container (MILVAN)
  W2 Gasoline engine driven materiel handling equipment
  W3 Refrigerators/refrigerated van equipment
  W4 Miscellaneous materiel transportation equipment
  W5 Air-conditioning and support equipment
  W6 Heating systems and other related equipment
  W8 Miscellaneous simplified test equipment
Special ammunition XA Adaption kits
  XB Atomic demolition materiel
  XC Atomic shells
  XD Bangalore torpedoes
  XE Blasting caps, detonating cord, and demolition firing devices
  XF Bombs, general purpose
  XG Bulk propellant, explosives, and demolition charges
  XH Cluster bomb unit (CBU)/cluster dispenser unit (CDU), all types
  XJ Chemical and biological agents
  XK Flares, all types
  XL Flame and incendiary materials
  XM Firing devices for special weapon and advanced firing systems
  XN Grenades, hand, fragmentation and offensive
  XP Grenades, hand, riot control agents
  XQ Grenades, smoke and incendiary
  XR Grenades, all other types
  XS Mines and mine fuzes all types
  XT Powder-actuated devices
  XU Photoflash cartridges
  XV Riot control agents
  XW Rockets, 66MM, light antitank weapons (LAW), all types, including flame
  XX Rockets, ground, all other types
  XY Signals, all types
  XZ Simulators, all types
  X1 Smoke pots
  X2 Test and handling equipment atomic materiel
  X3 Special weapons, repair parts
  X4 Warhead section atomic, all types
  X5 Warhead section chemical, all types
  X6 Warhead atomic, all types
  X7 Warhead selected
  X8 Modification work order kits
  X9 155MM atomic, field artillery projectile (AFAP) M785/XM785E1
Conventional ammunition YA Shell, shotgun, all types
  YB Cartridge, .22 caliber, all types
  YC Cartridge, 5.56MM, all types
  YD Cartridge, 7.62MM, all types
  YE Cartridge, .30 caliber, carbine, all types
  YF Cartridge, .30 caliber, all types
  YG Cartridge, .45 caliber, all types
  YH Cartridge, .50 caliber, all types
  YJ Cartridge, 20MM/30MM, all types
  YK Miscellaneous small arms ammunition
  YL Cartridge, 40MM, shoulder fired launcher (M79 type)
  YM Cartridge, 40MM, automated launcher (M75 type)
  YN Cartridge, 40MM (gun)
  YP Cartridge, 60MM, mortar, all types
  YQ Cartridge, 81MM, mortar, all types
  YR Cartridge, 4.2-inch mortar, all types
  YS Cartridge, 90MM, tank, all types
  YT Cartridge, 105MM, all types
  YU Cartridge, 152MM, all types
  YV Other tank and armored vehicle gun ammunition
  YW Cartridge, 105MM, howitzer, all types
  YX Projectile, 155MM, all types, and propelling charges therefor
  YY Projectile, 175MM, all types, and propelling charges therefor
  YZ Projectile, 8-inch all types, and propelling charges therefor
  Y1 Other artillery ammunition not specifically listed above
  Y2 Artillery/mortar fuzes and primers, all types
  Y3 Folding fin aircraft rocket, 2.75-inch all types
  Y4 Recoilless rifle ammunition, all types
  Y5 Propellant/cartridge-actuated devices
  Y6 Components for conventional ammunition maintenance and renovation program
  Y7 Packaging material for conventional ammunition maintenance and renovation program
  Y8 Bulk explosives and propellants for other customer end-item loading
  Y9 Ammunition peculiar equipment items
Other munitions/chemical, biological, radiological (CBR) categories ZA Smoke generators
  ZB Decontaminating equipment (CBR)
  ZC Flame-throwers and servicing units
  ZD Detection and alarm devices
  ZE Demolition equipment
  ZF Disperser equipment
  ZG CBR materiel
  ZH Shelter systems
  ZJ Gas masks
  ZK Collective protection equipment
  ZL Explosive ordnance disposal (EOC) sets and components
  ZM Ammunition gauges
  ZN Miscellaneous gauges
  ZP Modification work order kits
  ZQ Basic issue list items
  ZR CBU/CDU repair kits
  ZS Compressors
  ZT Filter units
  ZU Launcher rockets
  ZV Impregnating plants
  ZW Chemical lab
  ZZ Multiapplication munitions/CBR components and parts
  Z1 Nuclear, biological, chemical reconnaissance system (FOX), XM93
  Z2 Self contained toxic environment protective outfit (STEPO)
  Z3 Improved toxicological agents protective (ITAP)
DLA/GSA materiel 00 DLA/GSA-managed items that cannot be identified to a specific Army weapon system/end item
Medical materiel 01 Type 1 (nonextendable) potency-dated item
  02 Type 2 (extendable) potency-dated item
  03 Not potency-dated
  08 Not potency-dated materiel quality control significant item
Missile class V 2_ Supply Class V components for missile systems components (except SAFEGUARD)
  3_ Supply Class V missile components (SAFEGUARD) (Insert applicable weapon system/end item identification code in the fifth position as shown in surface-to-air missiles or surface-to-surface missiles.)
Communications System Agency and Satellite Communications Agency equipment 4A Satellite communications terminal-AN/FSC 78/79 peculiar items
  4B AN/TSC-85A/93A
  4C Manpack SATCOM radios — AN/PSC-3 and AN/VSC-7
  4D Defense satellite communications system operations control system (DOCS)
  4E Light weight computer (LCU)
  4F Command and Control Vehicle, AN/TYQ-61-C2V
  4G AN/GSC-52
  4H Lightweight Leader Computer (LLC)
  4J Vehicular intercommunications system (VIS)
  4K Improved high frequency radio (IHFR)
  4L AS-4429/TSC
  4M AN/PSC5 Tactical SATCOM radio
  4N AN/GRM-122, J-4843A/GRM, and PL-1536/J4843A
  4P Advanced Field Artillery Tactical Data System AN/GYG-1 (AFATDS)
  4Q Forward entry device AN/PSG7 (FED)
  4R Digital Topographic Support System (DTSS)
  4S Network planning terminal (NPT)
4T Network management tool (NMT)
  4U AN/USC-28
  4V Satellite communications equipment
  4W Forward area air defense command and control (FAADC2)
  4X Tri-band SHF tactical satellite terminal
  4Y Joint tactical terminal/commanders tactical terminal 3 (JTT/CTT3)
Communications systems equipment 5A Battery computer system (BCS) (AN/GYK-29)
  5B Forward entry device (FED) (AN/PSG-7)
  5C Fire support team digital message device (FIST DMD) (AN/PSG-5)
  5D Corps/theater automatic data processing service center (CTASC)-I/II
  5E Logistics applications of automated marking and reading symbols (LOGMARS)
  5F Tactical Army combat service support computer system (TACCS)
  5G AN/UYQ-43 V1/V2
  5H Sustaining Base/Defense Information Infrastructure (transmission systems)
  5J Common hardware/software
  5K Combat service support control system (CSSCS)
  5L Sustaining Base/Defense Information Infrastructure (switch systems)
  5M 5M AN/MYK8
  5N AN/TYQ-30/31
  5P AN/UXC-7
  5Q AN/UGC-144
  5R AN/UGC-74
  5S AN/TCC-41/SB-3614
  5T Advanced narrow band digital voice terminal (ANDVT) /KY-99
  5U Fiber optics transmitter system (FOTS)
  5V Antenna masts/towers
  5W Telephones
  5X Low cap transmission
  5Y Medium cap transmission
  5Z High cap transmission
Individual and crew-served weapons 6A Revolver, caliber .38, 4-inch barrel
  6B Rifle, caliber .22
  6C Rifle, caliber .30, M1-series
  6D Shotgun, 12-gauge
  6E Pistol, pyrotechnic
  6F Pistol, caliber .22
  6G Rifle, recoilless, 75MM
  6H Mortar, light weight, 60MM, M224, with mount
  6J Rifle, recoilless 105MM M27-series with mount
  6K Trainer, mortar, pneumatic
  6M Marksmanship and gunnery laser devices (MAGLAD)
  6N Diagnostic rifle marksmanship simulator
  6P Infantry remote target system (IRETS)
  6Q Armament subsystem helicopter, 40MM served weapons grenade launcher, M5
  6R Armament subsystem helicopter, 7.62MM machine gun, M21 multimount M156
  6S Armament subsystem helicopter, 7.62MM machine gun, M24
  6T Armament subsystem helicopter, 7.62MM machine gun, M27/M27E1
  6U Armament subsystem helicopter, 7.62MM machine gun, M41
  6V Machine gun, 7.62MM, M134 (minigun)
  6W Launcher grenade, aircraft, 40MM, M75
  6X Targets and training devices, small arms
  6Y Launcher, grenade, 40MM, M129
  6Z Squad automatic weapon system 5.56MM, XM-249
  61 Armament subsystem UH-60A helicopter (Blackhawk)
  62 Armament subsystem helicopter M23
  63 Launcher, grenade, 40MM, machine gun, Mark 19
  64 Pistol, caliber 9MM
  66 XM23 mortar ballistic computer
  67 Armament subsystem, helicopter, XM149
  68 Mortar, 81MM, XM-252
  69 M24 sniper weapon system
Communications systems 7A Digital nonsecure voice terminal with digital data port (DNVT/W/DDP)
  7B AN/PRC-126 small unit radio
  7C AN/PRC-127 non-hardened small unit radio
  7D AN/GRA-39 remote control
  7E OE-254 antenna
  7F RC-292 antenna
  7G Combat service support automated information systems interface (CAISI), AN/TYQ-55
  7H Logistics technology (LOGTECH)
  7J Standardized integrated command post system (SICPS)
  7K Electronic warfare (EW)/intelligence
Other automotive 8A Inner tubes
Training devices, simulations, and simulators 89 Field simulators and training equipment
Signal intelligence 9A Teammate AN/TRQ-32
  9B Trailblazer AN/TQS-138
  9C Trafficjam AN/TLQ-17A
  9D Quickfix AN/ALQ-151(V)2
  9E Lightweight man-transportable radio (LMRDFS) AN/PRD-12
  9F Airborne reconnaissance low, (ARL) AN/ASQ-214 and AN/ASQ-216
  9G Advanced quickfix
  9H Ground base common sensor-heavy (GBCS-H)
  9J Ground base common sensor-light (GBCS-L)
  9K Trackwolf
  9L Trojan spirit
  9M Advanced Trackwolf
  9N Electronic warfare (EW) and intelligence, active and passive area (strategic misc)
  9P Agency standard host/standard multi-user small computer requirements contract (ASH/SMSCRC)
  9Q Agency standard terminal workstations (ASTW)
  9R Clipboard
  9S Crazyhorse
  9T Focus
  9U TD-1303/TD-1398 homester
  9V R-2174B, receiver
  9W Scope 2000
  9X AN/FSQ-133 tracechain
  9Y Winterfeed
  9Z WJ-8618B, receiver
  92 Electronic warfare (EW) and intelligence, active and passive area (general misc)
  93 Intelligence electronic warfare common sensor (IEWCS)-Common (CHALS-X, TACJAM-A, CMES)

Table 5-7. Instructions for preparing DD Form 1138-1 for principal items
Line Field legend Column Explanation
  As of date N/A Enter fiscal year
  Description N/A Enter a brief description of the type of materiel for which this report has been prepared (for example, HQ TRADOC, conventional ammunition, other procurement, or Army.
1 Routing identifier code 1-3 Enter RIC.
2 DOD category of materiel code 4-5 Enter appropriate code from table 5-9 , part A.
3 Agency category materiel code 6-7 Enter first two positions of the Army MATCAT code (tables 5-1 and 5-2).
4 Appropriation title code 8-11 Enter appropriate code as follows:
   APA-Aircraft procurement, Army (2031)
   MIPA-Missile procurement, Army (2032)
   WTCV-Procuremment of weapons and tactical combat vehicles, Army (2033)
   PAA-Procurement of ammunition, Army (2034)
   OPA-Other procurement, Army (2035)

5 Principal or secondary item 12 Enter "P" or "S."
6 Wholesale or retail item 13 Enter "W" or "R."
7 Approved acquisition objective (AAO) 14-21 Enter dollar value, expressed in thousands, right justified. Fill blanks with zeros. ("00020189" represents $20,189,000.)
7a War reserve materiel 22-29 Enter dollar value, which a memo entry included in the AAO.
8 Approved force retenton stock (AFRS) 30-37 Enter dolar value, expressed in thousands, right justified. Fill blanks with zeros.
9 Unstratified stock 38-45 Enter dollar value of stock "in use."
46-53 Enter dollar value of stock "in store."
10 AAO 54-61 Enter dollar value of stock "in use."
62-69 Enter dollar value of stock "in store."
10a War reserve stock 70-77 Enter dollar value of stock "in use."
78-85 Enter dollar value of stock "in store."
11 AFRS 86-93 Enter dollar value of stock "in use."
94-101 Enter dollar value of stock "in store."
12 Economic retention stock 102-109 Enter dollar value of stock "in use."
110-117 Enter dollar value of stock "in store."
13 Contingency retention stock 118-125 Enter dollar value of stock "in use."
126-133 Enter dollar value of stock "in store."
14 Numeric retention stock 134-141 Enter dollar value of stock "in use."
142-149 Enter dollar value of stock "in store."
15 Potential DOD excess stock 150-157 Enter dollar value of stock "in use."
158-165 Enter dollar value of stock "in store."
16 Total assets 166-173 This entry must equal the sum of all assets"in use,"excluding 10a.
174-181 This entry must equal the sum of all assets "in use," excluding 10a.
17 United States stock 182-189 Enter dollar value of stock "in use."
190-197 Enter dollar value of stock "in store."
18 Foreign countries and afloat. Do not include possessions. 198-205 Enter dollar value of stock "in use."
206-213 Enter dollar value of stock "in store."
19 Outlying areas of the United States 214-221 Enter dollar value of assets "in use"in Puerto Rico, Virgin Islands, American Samoa, Guam, and Trust Territory of the Pacific Islands.
222-229 Enter dollar value of assets "in store"for the above possessions.
20 Number of items 230-237 Enter the number of NSNs applicable to the report for this category of materiel.

Table 5-8. DOD category of materiel codes
Item Code
Part A. Principal items
Weapons 00
Major aircraft subsystems and related equipment 01
Major ship subsystems, small craft, and related equipment 02
Munitions and related equipment 03
Missile systems and related equipment 04
Tanks, combat, and tactical vehicles 05
Support vehicles and railway equipment 06
Electronics, communications, control and information systems, and related equipment 07
Propulsion systems, aircraft engines, and related equipment 08
Uncategorized major equipment 09
Part B. Secondary items
Aircraft components and parts 10
Missile parts 11
Weapons parts 12
Tanks and vehicle parts 13
Ship and submarine parts 14
Electronics, communications, control and information systems, and related parts 15
Construction, industrial, and general supplies 16
Petroleum, oils, and lubricants 17
Clothing and textiles 18
Subsistence 19
Medical and dental materiel 20
Uncategorized minor equipment, materiels, and supplies 21

Table 5-9. Reporting schedule for DA Form 1887
Prepared by Fund Frequency Sent to Due date (days) Number of copies
AMC installation div/branch office (reporting directly to AMC) ASF Quarterly LSSA/RDAB (See note 1.) 15 Electronic transmission
AMC installations reporting directly to AMC PA2 Semi-annual LSSA/RDAB (See note 4.) 28 Electronic transmission
AMC installation div subhome offices ASF Quarterly LSSA/RDAB 36 Electronic transmission
AMC subordinate commands PA2 Semi-annual LSSA/RDAB 44 Electronic transmission
FORSCOM/TRADOC ASF Quarterly (See note 6.)   3
FORSCOM/TRADOC PA2 Semi-annual IMM (See note 2.) 55 2
Oversea commands ASF Quarterly IMM (See note 6.) 55 3
Oversea commands PA2 Semi-annual IMM (See note 2.) 55 2
AMC consolidated (installations reporting directly AMC) LSSA/RDAB PA2 Semi-annual IMM (See note 3.) 48 2
AMC consolidated (installation div) LSSA/RDAB PA Semi-annual HQ AMC (See note 4.) 48 3
AMC consolidated (installation div) LSSA/RDAB ASF Quarterly IMM 42 2
AMC consolidated (installation div) LSSA/RDAB ASF Quarterly HQ AMC 42 8

1. LSSA/RDAB electronic submission of data to Chief, Resources Data Analysis Branch, ATTN: AMXLS-LIRC, Tobyhanna PA 18466-5013. LSSA/RDAB make distribution of data as prescribed by HQ AMC.
2. Two copies of each report and narrative will also be forwarded to HQDA (DALO-S) and AMC.
3. Consolidated report for installations reporting directly to AMC.
4. Two copies will be sent to HQ AMC (AMCRM-FOE).
5. Detail and overall materiel category summaries for ASF will be submitted to DA through appropriate supply channels.
6. Detail and overall materiel category summaries will be submitted with the quarterly ASF reports described in DFAS-IN Reg 37-1.

Figure 5-1. Investment Versus Expense Cost Decision Diagram

Figure 5-2. Sample of Central Secondary Item Stratification For Budget

Figure 5-2. Sample of Central Secondary Item Stratification For Budget - Continued

Figure 5-3. Sample of Central Secondary Item Stratification For Readiness Retention

Figure 5-4. Sample of Central Secondary Item Stratification For Repair

Figure 5-4. Sample of Central Secondary Item Stratification For Repair - Continued

Figure 5-5. Sample of Completed DA Form 1887, Quarterly Stratification Report of Secondary Items

Figure 5-5. Sample of Completed DA Form 1887, Quarterly Stratification Report of Secondary Items - Continued

Chapter 6
Management of Army Prepositioned Stocks

Section I
Overview of Army prepositioned stocks

6-1. Introduction to Army prepositioned stocks materiel management

a. This chapter provides policy guidance for the management of the APS materiel program.

b. Key aspects of the APS program are as follows:

(1) The APS program constitutes one of the three legs of the Strategic Mobility Triad (airlift, sealift, and prepositioning). The purposes of APS are —

(a) To reduce the initial amount of strategic lift required to support CONUS-based power projection.

(b) To sustain the warfight until sea lines of communications with CONUS are established and industrial base surge capacity is achieved.

(2) APS is owned by HQDA and approved for release by HQDA, G-3/5/7 (DAMO-SSW). All APS actions are coordinated by HQDA, G-4 (DALO-FPP). APS is managed by United States Army Materiel Command (AMC), the Office of the Surgeon General (OTSG) and Defense Logistics Agency (DLA). APS is accounted for by AMC, the United States Army Medical Materiel Agency (USAMMA), and DLA.

(3) APS is designed and resourced for Army use. Assets may be repositioned between/among theaters at the direction of HQDA depending on the current situation.

(4) APS consists of protected go-to-war assets. These stocks may not be used for purposes such as improving peacetime readiness, as maintenance floats, for filling unit shortages, and so forth.

c. There are four categories of APS:

(1) Prepositioned unit sets. These stocks are positioned at land-based sites and afloat. They have the ability to meet requirements of more than one contingency in more than one theater of operations.

(2) Operational Projects (OPROJ) stocks. These stocks are authorized materiel above unit authorizations and are designed to support one or more Army operations, plans, or contingencies.

(3) Army War Reserve Sustainment (AWRS) stocks. AWRS stocks are prepositioned in or near a theater of operations to last until re-supply at wartime rates is established. These stocks consist of major end items to sustain the battle by replacing combat losses, and War Reserve Secondary Items (WRSI) to replace supplies consumed in the battle.

(4) War Reserve Stocks for Allies (WRSA). WRSA assets are prepositioned in the appropriate theater and owned and financed by the U.S., but released to the appropriate Army component commander for transfer to the supported allied force under the Foreign Assistance Act.

d. APS are positioned as follows —

(1) APS-1 (CONUS) — OPROJs and AWRS.

(2) APS-2 (Europe) — Contingency unit sets, which include the Immediate Ready Force, OPROJs, and WRSA-Israel.

(3) APS-3 (Afloat)--Unit sets, OPROJs, and AWRS.

(4) APS-4 (Pacific and Northeast Asia)--Unit sets, OPROJs, AWRS, and WRSA. War Reserve Stockpile --Thailand (WRS-T), although not part of APS-4, is a U.S. owned, Joint Service ammunition stockpile held in and for Thailand.

(5) APS-5 ((Southwest Asia (SWA)) -- Unit sets, OPROJs, and AWRS.

e. Resources that provide asset and readiness visibility of APS are:

(1) Standard Army Retail Supply System (SARSS): Provides asset visibility for select APS storage sites, posts, camps, and stations.

(2) Standard Depot System (SDS): Provides asset visibility and is the accountable record for APS storage sites, less class VIII. Theater Army Materiel Management Information Systems (TAMMIS) Medical Supply (MEDSUP) Module is the accountable record for class VIII medical material. The Logistics Modernization Program (LMP) is scheduled to replace SDS and will perform the same asset visibility function.

(3) Unit Status Reporting System: Provides unit sets equipment supply and readiness status per Army Regulations (AR) 220-1 (Unit Status Reporting), 750-1 (Army Materiel Maintenance Policy and Retail Maintenance Operations), and 700-138 (Army Logistics Readiness and Sustainability).

(4) Army War Reserve Deployment System (AWRDS): Provides output products that are compatible with Army unit level retail systems to include the Standard Property Book System-Redesign (SPBS-R), the Unit Level Logistics System (ULLS), the Standard Army Retail Supply System (SARSS), and their replacement, Global Combat Service Support System - Army (GCSS-A).

(5) Automated Battle book System (ABS): Provides detailed description of each APS program and a consolidated listing of all APS site inventories. ABS supports deployment planning through CD ROM, updated quarterly, and through Internet access. The CD-ROM is provided to all major headquarters quarterly. The database is available via the Internet and is continuously updated.

(6) Distribution Execution System (DES) (CBS-X/REQVAL+): Provides APS unit set, OPROJ, and AWRS line item detail for all major end items.

(7) Logistics Integrated Database (LIDB): Provides APS, OPROJ and AWRS line item detail for all classes of supply and consolidated stock reports.

(8) Commodity Command Standard System (CCSS): Provides asset visibility at the NICP level less class VIII. The Logistics Modernization Program (LMP) is scheduled to replace CCSS and will perform the same asset visibility function.

(9) Brigade Inspection and Reconnaissance Exercise Program (BIREP): The BIREP provides a war fighter-focused evaluation of APS maintenance status, equipment compatibility, and fightability. BIREPs pertain only to the Army Prepositioned Stock Afloat (APS-3) assets. U.S. Forces Command (FORSCOM) is the command responsible for the BIREP.

(10) Mobile Training Team (MTT): A FORSCOM MTT is available to provide training to units on APS and ABS upon request. Forward requests to: HQ FORSCOM, ATTN: AFLG-P2L-P, 1777 Hardee Avenue, SW, Fort McPherson, GA 30330-1062.

(11) Joint Medical Asset Repository (JMAR): provides asset visibility for class VIII medical material.

6-2. Army prepositioned stocks roles

a. HQDA will —

(1) Provide overall materiel prepositioning planning guidance and sources of equipment.

(2) Provide resources to conduct program.

(3) Provide oversight of the APS program.

(4) Approve final listing of materiel to be included in APS.

(5) Ensure that APS equipment requirements are identified in Army force structure, and asset accountability documents/systems, and other systems as applicable.

(6) Monitor APS fill and readiness rates.

(7) Respond to APS logistical inquiries, information requests, correspondence, and requests for release of APS.

b. AMC is the executive agent for management and accountability for the APS program, less SC VIII. AMC performs all supply and maintenance functions for this program to ensure accurate and timely sourcing. AMC will —

(1) Participate in APS requirements process.

(2) Conduct APS reviews on operational plans, projections, fill progress, and problem areas. Report APS fill and readiness rates to HQDA. Report readiness per AR 220-1 and AR 700-138 for equipment.

(3) Develop and/or update APS requirements for secondary items.

(4) Develop funding requirements.

(5) Advise HQDA (DALO-FPP) when deficiencies in resources prevent the accomplishment of the APS program.

(6) Provide and maintain, in accordance with funding guidance and within resources available, all APS major items of equipment at 10/20 technical standards based on the appropriate technical manual (TM). Maintain and rotate APS assets per serviceability standards set by HQDA within available funding, for all other classes of supply.

(7) Plan and manage APS modernization with HQDA G-8 (DAPR-FDL). Recommend substitute and in-lieu-of (ILO) materiel to DCS, G-4 (DALO-FPP/SM) and DCS, G-8 (DAPR-FDL).

(8) Develop and coordinate agreements to support the APS program.

(9) Source and provide, within funding, all AMC managed secondary item stocks in condition code (CC) A. CC B items may be substituted when CC A items are not available.

(10) Coordinate actions to obtain equipment and stocks with DLA, USAMMA, and any other non-AMC organizations providing APS equipment and materiel.

(11) Determine RDDs for all APS stocks to meet ship schedules and land base requirements.

(12) Account for prepositioned equipment and stock in APS. Conduct quality control and assurance programs. Determine maintenance cycles for land based and afloat APS equipment. Provide required reports, to include inventory records, in formats compatible with Army unit level retail software and hardware (including Unit Level Logistics System (ULLS), Standard Army Ammunition System (SAAS), Standard Army Retail Supply System (SARSS), and Standard Army Maintenance Management System (SAMMS)), to all concerned.

(13) Identify requirements for OCONUS maintenance facilities for ship-based equipment on a case-by-case basis, when appropriate.

(14) Operate or contract for prepositioned stock maintenance/storage facilities and prioritize APS equipment in storage sites for maintenance cycles.

(15) Provide a single on-site officer in charge with full authority to settle maintenance and accountability disputes that may occur during equipment hand-off operations, or during ship uploads and downloads.

(16) Package and/or containerize supplies and equipment per TM 38-470. Establish and publish guidelines for supplies and equipment that must be packed to level A/A.

(17) Configure secondary and combat loads to support Army component deployment requirements.

(18) Provide overall technical and logistical support for materiel in the APS program.

(19) Provide cargo data to Military Traffic Management Command (MTMC), as required.

(20) Develop and maintain an automated battle book system. Provide a battle book for each APS ship and site that includes equipment inventories, issue procedures, and ship/location information to assist war fighting combatant commanders. Provide copy of each battle book to MTMC.

(21) Review and validate authorization documents.

(22) Validate and coordinate shipload plans with ACOMs, ASCCs, and DRUs.

c. USAMMA is the executive agent for management and accountability of APS medical materiel and equipment. USAMMA programs all supply and maintenance functions for medical materiel for the APS program. This ensures the accurate and timely sourcing, accountability, and maintenance of all equipment and stocks. USAMMA will —

(1) Account for all pre-positioned medical materiel in APS.

(2) Recommend medical equipment assets to be prepositioned.

(3) Provide overall technical support for medical materiel.

(4) Provide copies of inventory records to AMC and other organizations.

(5) Report all medical materiel and equipment sourcing shortfalls to HQDA (DCS, G-4 and OTSG) and AMC.

(6) Identify medical materiel to be substituted to HQDA and AMC.

(7) Resource and provide APS medical major items of equipment at 10/20 technical standards based on the appropriate equipment TM. Conducting quality control and maintenance program requirements for medical materiel and equipment.

(8) Review and validate authorization documents for medical materiel. Determine with HQDA, in conjunction with AMC, resource requirements to establish APS medical units to include availability, storage and transportation requirements for medical-specific equipment, shortages, procurement, and funding levels.

(9) Resource and provide APS medical supplies and equipment in CC A. CC B items may be substituted when CC A items are not available. Rotate, reconstitute, and maintain medical sets, equipment, and supplies.

(10) Package and/or containerize medical supplies and equipment per TM 38-470. Set and publish guidelines for medical supplies and equipment that must be packed to level A/A.

(11) Develop and coordinate agreements to support medical materiel, to include medical maintenance and issue plans, for the APS program.

(12) Report equipment readiness feeder data to FSC for APS medical equipment.

(13) Develop and submit funding requirements.

(14) Participate in APS requirements process.

(15) Develop and/or update APS requirements for secondary items.

(16) Operate or contract for prepositioned stock maintenance/storage facilities and prioritize APS equipment in storage sites for maintenance cycles.

(17) Provide a single on site officer-in-charge with full authority to settle class VIII maintenance and accountability disputes that may occur during the equipment hand-off operations, to include ship uploads and offloads. This officer-in-charge will also be a team member of the Medical Logistics Support Team (MLST), which is the class VIII element to the AMC LSE.

(18) Provide cargo data as required.

(19) Provide class VIII portion to the battle book for each APS ship and site that includes cargo inventories, port operations, and ship information to assist war fighting combatant commanders.

d. ACOM, ASCC, and DRU/proponent. The following Army commands are the combatant commander's representatives: USAREUR for APS-2, FORSCOM for APS-3, USARPAC and EUSA for APS-4, and ARCENT for APS-5. ACOM, ASCC, and DRU/proponent functions include the following:

(1) Provide managerial oversight for the combatant commanders.

(2) Monitor operational readiness of APS equipment and stocks.

(3) Coordinate combatant commander mission changes that impact the APS program to include changes to Operational Plans (OPLAN), Time Phased Force Deployment Lists (TPFDL), and Modified Tables of Organization and Equipment (MTOE).

(4) Coordinate for funding and use of APS equipment and supplies for Joint and/or ACOM, ASCC, and DRU level exercises.

(5) Provide deployment requirements and instructions to units designated to use APS assets.

(6) Coordinate handoff requirements with AMC/USAMMA and other organizations, as applicable.

(7) Identify and coordinate requirements with AMC to include:

(a) Ship off-station time.

(b) Site location and configuration.

(c) Maintenance cycles.

(d) Ship requirements along with Commander, U.S. Transportation Command (USCINCTRANS).

(e) Coordinate ship load plans with AMC and USAMMA to ensure cargo is loaded to support combatant commander requirements.

(f) Actions to assist AMC in assuring operational readiness of APS equipment.

(8) Coordinate with Military Traffic Management Command (MTMC), the Military Sealift Command (MSC), AMC, USAMMA, and other appropriate offices during upload and download of cargo at port facilities, as required.

(9) Once alerted to use APS stocks, obtain a deployment Derivative UIC, transfer TAT from original UIC property record to the new Deployment DUIC, and obtain DODAACs to support the TAT equipment. New DODAACs will ensure there is no requirement to change or cancel open requests for issue or requisitions. The location code on the parent UIC will reflect deployment location. APS equipment received in units will be documented in the new DUIC with the TAT. Units are required to report against the APS equipment drawn and the TAT items brought from home station.

e. MTMC will —

(1) Provide port operations, stow plans, terminal services, stevedoring, and MILSTAMP documentation services in support of APS ship uploads, downloads and maintenance cycles.

(2) Provide traffic management services for movement of equipment and stocks.

(3) If a MTMC facility is chosen as the APS maintenance facility, provide base support operations and services as appropriate.

(4) Develop stevedore contracts (as required) to support the APS program.

f. Functions of Army Component Commanders of Unified Combatant Commands include the following:

(1) Coordinating appropriate command and control functions, as required, with the unified combatant command and his naval component command if APS-3 ships are berthed, operating in, or transiting the combatant commanders' AOR.

(2) Developing and coordinating agreements to support the APS program, as necessary.

(3) Coordinating ship(s) off station/maintenance cycle schedules with unified combatant commands and naval component commands.

(4) Accomplish any required intra-theater maintenance of APS cargo as directed by HQDA.

6-3. Security classification

a. This regulation is the authority for classification. Classify data relating to APS materiel (munitions, secondary items, and end items, less bulk petroleum) per this paragraph.

b. Total asset information, including any combination of APS quantitative requirements (authorized or required), on hand quantities, days of supply (DOS), financial information, nomenclature, APS designation (for example, APS-2 or WRSA-K), storage location and storage location codes (for example, PWB), is unclassified for all combinations of APS as indicated below.

(1) When identified to a specific Major Combat Operation (MCO) or Small Scale Contingency (SSC): Unclassified .

(2) For U.S. Forces when identified to or incorporated in a specific contingency or operations plan: As determined by the CONPLAN/OPLAN originator per this Security Classification Guide (SCG) and AR 380-5 .

(3) Held for foreign countries, to include war reserve stocks for allies (WRSA): Unclassified .

(4) When a SCG or directive for a specific item, requirement or project requires classification, it will be classified per AR 380-5 at the level and duration of classification that the SCG or directive directs.

c. Information concerning requirements for computation of total personnel or equipment densities to be supported:

(1) When identified to an APS designation (for example, APS-2): Unclassified .

(2) When identified to a specific MCO or SSC: Confidential , declassify per AR 380-5 .

(3) When identified to or incorporated in a specific contingency or operations plan: As determined by the contingency plan (CONPLAN)/operations plan (OPLAN) originator per this security classification guide (SCG) and AR 380-5 .

d. Information concerning the number and type of units to be supported for computation purposes:

(1) When identified to an APS designation (for example, APS-2): Unclassified .

(2) When identified to a specific MCO/SSC: Secret, declassify per AR 380-5 .

(3) When identified to or incorporated in a specific CONPLAN/OPLAN: As determined by the CONPLAN/OPLAN originator per this SCG and AR 380-5 .

e. APS codes, definitions, and automated data processing products:

(1) When identified to an APS designation (for example, APS-2) or storage location (for example, M/V Titus; RIC C97:) Unclassified .

(2) When identified to a specific MCO/SSC by OPLAN: Confidential , declassify per AR 380-5 .

(3) When identified to or incorporated in a specific CONPLAN/OPLAN: As determined by the CONPLAN/OPLAN originator per this SCG and AR 380-5 .

(4) When identified to specific units or force elements: Unclassified .

f. APS unit status reports: Classify APS unit status reports per AR 220-1 .

g. APS DAMPL: Classified per HQDA letter (DAMO-ODR), subject: DAMPL.

Section II
Release and Use of Army Prepositioned Stocks

6-4. Overview and guidance

a. Conditions under which APS may be released are:

(1) Major Combat Operations (MCO). APS will be released as directed by the Chairman, Joint Chiefs of Staff, or the Chief of Staff, Army, to support an MCO. In the event of an imminent attack or capture by hostile forces, the senior Army commander present has the authority to order the immediate release of APS. As soon as the situation permits, the action taken will be reported through command channels to DCS, G-4 (ATTN: DALO-FPP).

(2) Small-Scale Contingencies (SSC)/National Emergencies. APS will be released by DCS, G-3/5/7, in support of SSC/national emergencies.

(3) Peacetime emergencies. APS will be released by DCS, G-4, in conjunction with DCS, G-3/5/7 in support of peacetime emergencies.

(4) Exercise support. ACOMs, ASCCs, and DRUs may request APS to validate war reserve materiel "draw" procedures during an approved AMC/ACOM, ASCC, and DRU exercise. The requesting ACOM, ASCC, and DRU will forward justification to HQDA (DALO-FPP) requesting use of stocks.

b. Procedures for release of APS:

(1) MCO. HQDA will direct the release execution.

(2) SSC/National Emergencies/Peacetime emergencies/Exercises. Requests for release will proceed from the requesting ACOM, ASCC, and DRU to DCS, G-4 (ATTN: DALO-FPP). DALO-FPP will staff the request with all responsible HQDA staff elements for evaluation and formulation of the DA position. Once the position is approved/disapproved by the ARSTAF, DALO-FPP will notify the requester. If approval is granted to use APS assets, DALO-FPP will provide written authorization to AMC/USAMMA to direct release of the stock by loan or issue.

(a) HQDA must approve all issues and loans of APS stock to meet emergency peacetime requirements with the following exception: the AMC/USAMMA Inventory Materiel Management Centers (IMMC) may authorize issue of secondary items (spares, repair parts, and Class VIII consumables) to fill emergency peacetime operational requirements (issue priority designation (IPD) 01-03, not mission capable (NMC) requisitions only). Issue assets only from ownership purpose codes B, C, or D. Before issuing, the following conditions must be met:

(1) An approved Joint Chiefs of Staff Project Code is available for requisition purposes.

(2) The requesting ACOM, ASCC, and DRU must provide a funded requisition before the stocks are released.

(3) Managing IMMCs ensure APS stocks are replenished within 120 days after issue, or 180 days for clothing and textiles.

(b) IMMC managers will maintain an audit trail until APS assets are reconstituted.

(c) The AMC/USAMMA IMMCs will inform DCS, G-4 if problems with replenishment actions are encountered. Future stock releases will not be authorized until resolution.

(3) Minimum information required for HQDA to process a release request is:

(a) Loans:

(1) Justification (include purpose of loan, such as exercise/emergency supported).

(2) Required delivery date (RDD).

(3) Estimated duration.

(4) Whether a unit rotation is planned.

(5) Identification of individual(s) responsible for property accountability.

(6) Department of Defense Activity Address Code (DODAAC).

(7) Ship to address.

(8) UIC.

(9) POC with phone number.

(10) Materiel LIN and/or NSN.

(11) Nomenclature.

(12) Quantity.

(13) Fund cite (to cover replacement, inspection and/or repair if necessary).

(b) Issues:

(1) Justification.

(2) RDD.


(4) Ship to address.

(5) UIC.

(6) POC with phone number.

(7) Materiel LIN and/or NSN.

(8) Nomenclature.

(9) Quantity

() Note: Receiving unit will be charged for secondary items.

c. Assets will be released using loan procedures, in accordance with AR 700-131 , when:

(1) The duration of the operation is known to be 6 months or less and the transfer of property accountability from the unit initially in possession of the equipment to another unit is not planned or likely to occur.

(2) Asset balance files and property records will reflect loan status.

(3) Class II clothing, class V, class IX, and other consumables are not intended for loan.

d. Assets will be released using issue procedures in accordance with AR 710-2 , for which release of APS has been approved.

(1) The duration of the operation is either indefinite or will exceed 6 months in duration or the transfer of property accountability from one unit to another is either planned or likely to occur.

(2) Managing activity asset balance files will reflect a reduction. The receiving units' accountable or responsible officer will reflect the increase in on-hand quantities on all property records.

e. Control of items approved for loan will be transferred to the responsible/accountable officer(s) designated by the ACOM, ASCC, and DRU commander. At a minimum, the ACOM, ASCC, and DRU will —

(1) Ensure APS equipment is loaned to a subordinate unit/task force or element will not be further loaned or transferred from the initial recipient without written approval of HQDA, unless outlined in the initial request from the ACOM, ASCC, and DRU.

(2) Check property accountability procedures, in accordance with AR 710-2 and AR 735-5 , and will be established and maintained throughout the period of the loan. Accountable or property book officers will be appointed for units/task forces or elements that would not otherwise deploy with an individual responsible for maintaining property accountability. Additional requirements are outlined in AR 725-50 , Requisition, Receipt, and Issue System, chapter 9 , and AR 710-3 , Asset and Transaction Reporting System.

(3) Make sure TM 10/20 technical standards will be strictly enforced at time of issue and turn-in of all loaned or issued APS equipment in accordance with AR 750-1 , unless previously agreed upon in writing by all parties (DCS, G-3/5/7 and G-4, AMC/OTSG, and requesting ACOMs, ASCCs, and DRUs). The ACOM, ASCC, and DRU will reimburse the APS releaser (AMC/USAMMA) for any direct repair, technical inspection labor, packing, crating, transportation, preservation, protection costs, and cost to return to 10/20 standards and storage incurred as a result of the loan or issue of equipment.

(4) Ensure equipment loaned in support of an operation will be returned to APS.

f. ACOM, ASCC, and DRU/Unit responsibility for loaned equipment:

(1) The borrowing ACOM, ASCC, and DRU will ensure that subordinate commanders who assume direct and supervisory responsibility for the equipment do not substitute like or similar items. Equipment identified by serial number or data plate information will be the same equipment returned to the issuing activity as verified by serial number/data plate identification.

(2) Guidance for the loan of Army equipment is contained in AR 700-131 , AR 710-2 , and AR 725-50 .

6-5. Equipment sourcing and funding of APS

a. Overviewv for HQDA programs requirements and funds for the APS program. Requirements and funded levels are updated and validated annually as part of the Planning, Program, Budgeting and Execution System (PPBES) process for Budget Activity 2 (Mobilization). Funding is accomplished via the Program Objective Memorandum (POM) process. APS is resourced using both Operations and Maintenance, Army (OMA) and Procurement Army (PA) funds.

b. Operations and Maintenance appropriated funds. The Army's intent is to fund these operations at a level sufficient to maintain the APS at the Army's maintenance standard (Technical Manual 10/20 standards) as outlined in AR 750-1 , so as to facilitate timely issue in support of war-fighting and other contingency requirements. OMA appropriations pay for:

(1) Care of supplies in storage (COSIS).

(2) Manpower for cyclic maintenance.

(3) Contract costs for parts and supplies.

(4) Support equipment.

(5) Necessary facilities, to include ship and warehouse leases.

(6) Automated systems support.

(7) Replacement of potency and dated medical items.

(8) Other costs specifically needed to manage, receive, store, maintain, and issue APS.

c. Exercise funds. Funding to support exercises involving APS equipment is not included in the OMA funding provided for APS operations. Funding for the use of APS stocks in exercises is the responsibility of the ACOM, ASCC, and DRU sponsoring the exercise. This funding must cover reimbursement of all costs incurred by AMC, USAMMA, or the storage activity to prepare the desired APS assets for issue and return to 10/20 standards. The ACOM, ASCC, and DRU is responsible to return assets in accordance with para 6-4e(3) .

d. Procurement Army funds. The initial procurement of major items and PA secondary items designated as APS assets is included in Army procurement programs. To satisfy PA-funded major item requirements, the IMMC or Secondary Item Control Activity (SICA) will initiate requisitions to acquire APS assets and establish dues-ins. PA funding for class VIII items is requested in the Equipment PEG and prioritized in the Army Investment Strategy Plan along with all compos.

e. Funding of WRSI. WRSI is funded through the Army Working Capital Fund (AWCF).

(1) AWCF business areas operate on a reimbursement basis with users paying for goods and services provided. Payment for APS materiel provided in support of contingency operations, including deployment, or other emergency responses for military, or humanitarian assistance, is no exception. IMMCs are not authorized to accept requisitions without funding unless directed by DCS, G-4. ACOMs, ASCCs, and DRUs fund incremental costs incurred in support of operations from available OMA funds.

(2) Initial procurement of secondary items identified as APS are included in the AWCF, Supply Management, Army budget submission and funded by direct appropriations. AMC and USAMMA item managers identify funding requirements during their budget submissions. APS assets held by an IMMC or SICA may be transferred within APS to balance stockage levels. This type of transfer does not constitute a sale. Additionally, the transfer of assets from one APS ownership purpose code to another does not constitute a sale.

f. Conserved Peacetime Obligation Authority (CPTOA).

(1) CPTOA is the funding mechanism used to restore funded APS. The sale of secondary item APS assets to fill peacetime requirements or the reclassification of APS assets to other than another APS account generates CPTOA. CPTOA is executed during the fiscal year in which it is generated until the total Army War Reserve Materiel Requirement (WMR) is met. CPTOA generated late in the FY can be executed beyond the FY for a period equal to the length of the order time.

(2) CPTOA is generated when protected WMR items are bought by an IMMC. An IMMC buys items to:

(a) Balance assets.

(b) Satisfy a peacetime demand.

(3) Accounting for CPTOA.

(a) IMMCs maintain transaction records. These records are a transactional history and serve as an audit trail of conserved funds generated from the sale of APS assets. Balancing actions or recomputations could cause reductions to protected levels resulting in a new level below the previous protected level. Records are required only when the managing activity chooses to reinvest funds equal to the amount of WMR. An entry is not required for a buy to replace like items or where automatic data processing (ADP) programs are available to ensure proper control and restoration of the protected level.

(b) When assets will not be available by the end of the procurement lead-time, the protected requirement will not be reduced by the amount drawn down.

(c) Only secondary APS items procured with direct appropriated funds can be protected. Any excess stocks acquired with peacetime funds can be held against an authorized APS shortfall.

6-6. Replacement of Army prepositioned stock materiel

a. Once materiel within APS is issued to satisfy the intended purpose of APS, there is no intent to automatically replenish assets in any of the APS categories (unit sets, sustainment, OPROJs, or WRSA). Assets will be replenished only on a case-by-case basis if requested by the AMC, OTSG, ACOM, ASCC, and DRU, Combatant Commander, or appropriate HQDA staff and formally approved by HQDA.

b. The intent is for issued equipment (non-consumables) to be returned to APS at the conclusion of the operation which required the issue of APS stocks.

c. Within HQDA, approval to replenish assets while an operation is on going is the purview of the DCS, G-3/5/7 (DAMO-SSW) and is accomplished in coordination with the DCS, G-4 (DALO-FPP).

d. Assets loaned from APS will be returned as specified in para 6-4 .

Section III
Army Prepositioned Stock Unit Sets

6-7. Army prepositioned stocks and unit sets program

a. The objective of the program is strategic prepositioning of critical unit sets/equipment, with associated spares and repair parts, and unit basic loads for issue to the Army. The strategically positioned equipment can be used anywhere in the world to support multiple combatant commanders.

b. Apportionment information is classified and can be found in CJCSI 3110.01B, table D-3.

6-8. Army prepositioned stocks requirements determination and procedures

a. The authorization for APS unit sets is based on requirements approved by the Chief of Staff, Army, and documented in The Army Authorization Document System (TAADS). TAADS is the HQDA-approved document that identifies authorizations for equipment stored in the APS program. It is the basis for sourcing SC VII end items and related secondary items necessary to maintain APS equipment. APS are designed generically to support multiple combatant commanders' requirements and to allow similar units to fall in on the set.

b. DCS, G-3/5/7 (DAMO-SSW) and AMC (AMCOPS-SAS) use the standard requirements code (SRC) to define the force structure requirements for APS. SRC requirements are provided to DCS, G-3/5/7 (DAMO-SSW) by the requesting combatant commanders and those directed by DCS, G-3/5/7-G-8. These SRCs are then configured generically to support multiple combat commanders requirements and current active force structures. This SRC force structure is coordinated with the originating combat commanders and DCS, G-3/5/7 (DAMO). DCS, G-3/5/7 assigns unit identification codes (UICs) to each APS unit or team set once the force structure is approved and then forwards the APS authorization document to the U.S. Army Force Management Support Agency (USAFMSA) to enter in the Structure And Composition System (SACS) and to the DCS, G-3/5/7 organizational integrator for input to Structure And Manpower System (SAMAS) file. HQDA (DAMO-FDF) is also provided the TAADS document for initial inclusion to the Force Accounting System (FAS). DCS, G-35/7 and G-4, OTSG, and AMC must coordinate at all levels during each phase of the authorization procedure.

c. USAFMSA produces the modification table of organization and equipment (MTOE) using the TAADS system in accordance with current centralized documentation (CENDOC) policy and AR 71-32 . The TAADS document is used as input to SACS to produce the LOGSACS that is distributed annually. HQDA (DAMO-ODR/SSW/FDL/RQ and others) and AMC/USAMMA review the APS authorizations during the applicable management of change (MOC) window. Army ACOMs, ASCCs, and DRUs may submit recommended changes to the force structure to HQAMC (AMCOPS-SAS) or HQDA (DAMO-FD). The SACS details equipment requirements and authorizations for use in the Distribution Execution System (DES).

d. APS master equipment list (MEL).

(1) MEL categorizes each line item number (LIN) contained in an APS MTOE authorization document identifying whether the LIN is authorized for prepositioning. The official record for MEL codes (MELCODE) is the file maintained by AMC (AMCOPS-SAS), which is sent to LOGSA for input into SB 700-20. Each LIN within an APS MTOE authorization document, showing the requirements and authorizations, is coded with a non-standard remarks code. Code 600 for MELCODE P shows requirements and authorizations (authorized for prepositioning), and 602 for MELCODE T (to accompany troops — TAT), 601 for N (not authorized for prepositioning - NAP), and 603 for D (not authorized for prepositioning — deferred) shows requirements only. The non-standard remarks codes are standard for all LINs across all APS MTOEs. However, there are exceptions due to special equipment configurations or other approved exceptions. The use of a non-standard remarks code in the APS MTOE is not mandatory. If the item is authorized for prepositioning, it has a 600 code. Items not authorized for prepositioning are identified with a 602 code (meaning the item is to accompany troops or be shipped from home station). There is no automated crosswalk between SB 700-20 and the APS MTOE.

(2) AMCOPS-SAS is the point of contact within AMC for MELCODEs pertaining to APS assets. AMCOPS-SAS recommends and staffs changes to the MELCODE file. AMCOPS-SAS coordinates with DCS, G-3/5/7 (DAMO-FDF) for HQDA-managed LINs with final determination by DAMO-SSW prior to submitting MEL file to LOGSA. USAFMSA and LOGSA update SACS as MELCODE changes occur. USAFMSA (MOFI-FMA-SDC-A) includes MELCODEs in each APS MTOE authorization document. LOGSA (AMXLS-MM), as the SB 700-20 proponent, updates the SB 700-20 MELCODE file as required by AMC.

(3) The following equipment is not authorized for prepositioning (NAP/601) and must be deployed as TAT or issued to the deploying unit upon arrival in theater by the ACOM, ASCC, and DRU unless otherwise authorized by DCS, G-3/5/7:

(a) Aircraft, aircraft subsystems, and avionics.

(b) All band and musical equipment.

(c) Organizational clothing, such as sized items, and equipment.

(d) Masks, protective field.

(e) Individual weapons.

(f) Sensitive and classified items, such as COMSEC equipment.

(g) Binoculars.

(h) Selected office machines, ADP equipment, and administrative items.

(i) Watches.

(j) Selected missiles systems.

(k) Shelf life items that may not be held in long-term storage, unless there is a HQDA-approved rotation plan. For APS-3 assets, TM 38-470 applies with respect to shelf-life constraints.

(l) Items required to be in the hands of troops on arrival.

e. A LIN beginning with Z (Z LIN) may be prepositioned unless it is not in use and is purely developmental with zero fielded to first equipped units.

f. AMC will develop and update requirements for APS, SC IX (ASL/PLL), and secondary items using the on-hand assets. Criteria used to select items for APS ASL/PLL are in AR 710-2 Unless exempted by HQDA (DALO-FPP), AMC will store ASL/PLL and unit basic loads (UBL) for supply classes II, IIIP, IV, V, and IX, (USAMMA will store UBL for SC VIII, preferably at site with equipment) with the specific battalion or separate unit located at the APS site. PLL should be configured to battalion and company sets to improve deployment timelines. ASL/PLL repair parts for aircraft, aircraft subsystems, avionics, and air defense guided missile systems and other long lead-time items will not be prepositioned unless authorized by HQDA (DALO-FPP).

g. HQDA (DAPR-FDL and DALO-AMA) in conjunction with AMC Ammo will develop and update SC V requirements for APS.

6-9. Readiness reporting

a. AMC will submit unit status reports and material condition status reports (ASMA, DA Form 2406 ) on a monthly basis for APS unit sets, in accordance with AR 220-1 and AR 700-138 , utilizing input from subordinate activities and USAMMA.

b. Units loaned APS unit set equipment under provisions of paragraph 6-4 will report equipment serviceability in accordance with AR 220-1 and AR 700-138 , unless other specific guidance is provided by HQDA.

c. Reporting of assets in unit sets down to SRC/UIC/DUIC level of detail is required. Authorizations are documented in TAADS. These sets are visible in LIDB, the Automated Battle Book System (ABS), Status of Resources and Training System (SORTS), CBS-X, DES/REQVAL, DES down to SRC/UIC/DUIC level of detail and Joint Medical Asset Repository (JMAR).

6-10. Unit deployments onto APS

a. Units and task force slices of units deploying onto APS will account for property book equipment using their standard property book system. For most Army units, this is SPBS-R. Asset reporting is also required throughout the deployment phases. Property books for deployed units/task force slices of units must be maintained separately from any portion of unit or equipment remaining at home station so as to maintain accurate asset visibility of deployed units and their equipment.

b. Owning units transfer MTOE materiel left at the deploying home station to a stay-behind property book officer (PBO) for control. The division/installation commander, in coordination with the ACOM, ASCC, and DRU, will designate the stay-behind PBO. If no stay-behind PBO is available at the installation, the ACOM, ASCC, and DRU will designate and provide resources for a PBO team for the stay-behind equipment. HQDA controls disposition instructions for stay-behind equipment.

c. When equipment or unit sets are loaned, HQDA retains ownership of the equipment.

d. Receiving units will arrange for a DODAAC and derivative UIC (if applicable).

e. Specific policy on DODAAC and UIC assignment will vary based on deployment guidance and if a full or partial SRC is issued or loaned. Units deploying onto APS should seek specific guidance from their ACOM, ASCC, and DRU.

Section IV
Army Prepositioned Stock Operational Projects

6-11. Operational projects concept and overview

a. An operational project (OPROJ) consists of equipment requirements in addition to the authorizations contained in MTOE, TDA/MTDA, and CTA documents.

b. Items in an OPROJ are limited to the type, range, and minimum essential quantity required to accomplish the stated mission.

c. HQDA and the ACOM, ASCC, and DRU commanders determine materiel requirements that support combat operations and other contingencies and submits them to HQDA for approval and resourcing. These projects are also available to support civil relief, civil disturbances, disaster relief, humanitarian assistance, or civil defense, or other HQDA-approved missions.

d. OPROJ visibility is in LIDB and the Joint Medical Asset Repository (JMAR).

6-12. Operational projects request and revision procedures

The agency or organization requesting to establish or change an OPROJ will prepare a request in writing to initiate, change, or revise an OPROJ. The proposal should be sent through the agency or organization's higher headquarters to HQDA (DALO-FPP) and AMC (AMCOPS). The request should include:

a. The OPROJ number designation assigned by AMC when requesting a change to an existing OPROJ.

b. An indication of whether this request supersedes or modifies an existing OPROJ.

c. A statement that the OPROJ requirement does not duplicate and cannot be provided from other approved authorization documents applicable to the requesting agency.

d. A specific approved operations plan (OPLAN) and contingency plan documents or type of disaster or humanitarian assistance that the OPROJ is designed to support.

e. The purpose and scope of the OPROJ.

f. Time-phasing of the requirements to assess the possible merging of Armywide OPROJ requirements. Provide the reaction time from notification to need of materiel at a specific site. Generally, this is the same information stated in the OPLAN.

g. Recommended storage location.

h. Estimated cost.

i. Identify assets on-hand (if any) that will be used to reduce the procurement requirement of the OPROJ.

6-13. Operational projects roles

Roles and responsibilities of the following agencies are:

a. DCS, G-1 will provide HQ, Training and Doctrine Command (TRADOC) personnel numbers and categories on which to base the CONUS Replacement Center requirements.

b. DCS, G-3/5/7 will —

(1) Approve or disapprove the request.

(2) Ensure OPROJs support current specified operations plans, missions, or contingencies and do not duplicate existing capabilities and authorizations.

(3) Assign a UIC to each section of the OPROJ and assign HQDA priority. Include them on the DA Master Priority List.

c. DCS, G-4 will —

(1) Staff the OPROJ request within HQDA for approval or disapproval.

(2) Coordinate the resourcing and fill.

d. DCS, G-8 will —

(1) Ensure that the type of equipment is correct for the OPROJ for HQDA intensively managed items.

(2) Review and distribute modernization equipment items in OPROJs.

e. HQDA, OTSG reviews OPROJs containing medical materiel to assure that the requirements are valid.

f. AMC will —

(1) Coordinate and complete technical review of the submitted OPROJ with appropriate IMMC or SICA, the Chief of Engineers, and USAMMA.

(2) Assign project number and obtain project codes, if required, from LOGSA in accordance with AR 725-50, chapter 1 . Advise each IMMC, SICA, or USAMMA for SC VIII when project codes are assigned to an OPROJ.

(3) Consolidate the list of items and summary data submitted by the IMMC, SICA, or USAMMA for SC VIII, for the total OPROJ.

(4) Submit an overall analysis of a proposed OPROJ, change, or revision to HQDA (DALO-FPP) during final staffing.

(5) After approval, send an execution notification to the IMMC, SICA, or USAMMA for SC VIII, with an information copy to LOGSA, requesting that the authorization transaction be transmitted to LOGSA.

(6) Review the authorization listing for each newly approved OPROJ, change, or revision. Compare the listing to the approved published copy of the OPROJ to verify that the information on each is correct.

(7) Contact the appropriate IMMC, SICA, or USAMMA for SC VIII to resolve discrepancies between the authorization listing and the approved published copy of the OPROJ.

(8) Maintain the records for all official OPROJs.

(9) Identify OPROJ costs to include procurement costs, value of stock on hand, and total project cost for both secondary and major items.

(10) Identify the desired storage location(s) or negotiated storage location(s) for OPROJ assets, either CONUS, OCONUS, and/or afloat. Indicate whether additional storage facilities are required. Provide specific geographic region(s) and the required delivery time frame for OPROJ assets.

g. LOGSA will post approved authorizations in the appropriate databases.

h. The IMMC, SICA, or USAMMA will edit, perform a technical review, and update as needed the requesting agency's list of items received from AMC. Recommend changes or adjustments if newer, more modern equipment is available.

i. ACOMs, ASCCs, and DRUs will —

(1) Assist, as required, in maintaining stocks in designated storage location in accordance with agreements coordinated with AMC/USAMMA and HQDA.

(2) Review the OPROJ annually for change, revision, or possible cancellation based on modifications to the OPLAN. Failure to provide an annual review or 5-year revision may result in DCS, G-4 recommending cancellation of the OPROJ to DCS, G-3/5/7. The purpose of OPROJ review is to:

(a) Verify the necessity of the OPROJ and the validity of the implementation plan.

(b) Ensure that items and quantities in the OPROJ are still required and appropriate.

(c) Consider the impact of changes in force structure, modernization, and mission on the OPROJ.

(d) Ensure that the OPROJ continues to support applicable OPLANs.

(e) Determine if the force is adequate to implement the OPROJ.

(3) Completely revise an OPROJ every 5 years and update the equipment list.

(4) Submit reviews and projected actions to HQDA (DALO-FPP).

(5) Submit recommended changes and cancellations.

(6) Notify HQDA (DALO-FPP) that the OPROJ was reviewed in accordance with AR 710-1 and, if the annual review does not result in a change or revision to the OPROJ, that no changes are necessary.

6-14. Acquiring assets designated for an operational project

a. After an OPROJ is approved, HQDA, AMC, or USAMMA for SC VIII obtains the authorized materiel pending funding authorization.

b. OPROJ requirements are filled from one of the following sources:

(1) Stock on hand.

(2) Procurement programs.

(3) Redistribution of assets.

6-15. Canceling an operational project

a. The OPROJ ACOM, ASCC, and DRU/proponent forwards a memorandum requesting cancellation to HQDA (DALO-FPP), with a copy to AMC (AMCOPS-SAS) and USAMMA for medical materiel.

b. DALO-FPP will staff the request within HQDA and other affected organizations.

c. If cancellation is approved, HQDA (DALO-FPP) will provide written notification that the OPROJ has been cancelled.

d. HQDA may direct the cancellation of an OPROJ.

e. Excess assets resulting from cancellation or reduction of an OPROJ requirement will be applied against other approved APS requirements, or be further redistributed as required.

f. LOGSA will maintain a historical database of canceled OPROJs for 3 years following an OPROJ cancellation.

Section V
Army War Reserve Sustainment

6-16. Army War Reserve Sustainment management roles

a. AMC is the central manager of all AWRS, except for SC VIII and operational rations. USAMMA is the manager of AWRS SC VIII medical materiel. DLA is the manager of AWRS operational rations. AWRS consists of war reserve secondary items (WRSI) and major items. WRSI consists of SC I, II, III (packaged), IV, VIII, and IX.

b. As central managers, AMC/USAMMA roles are:

(1) WRSI:

(a) Determine WRSI requirements with guidance from DCS, G-3/5/7 and DCS,G-4 for budget and program years.

(b) Manage and account for worldwide assets, and maintain visibility of assets designated as WRSI.

(c) Compute the requirements for WRSI and submit program and budget information to HQDA (DALO-FPP).

(d) Procure and preposition WRSI items to meet Armywide requirements.

(e) Identify assets (except SC V) designated as AWRS by purpose codes in accordance with AR 725-50 .

(f) Provide requirements for operational rations to DLA.

(2) Major items:

(a) Manage and account for worldwide assets, and maintain visibility of assets.

(b) Identify assets designated as AWRS by purpose codes in accordance with AR 725-50 .

6-17. Army War Reserve Sustainment requirements determination

a. Overview.

(1) DCS, G-3/5/7 provides the force data to be used to derive sustainment requirements. The defense planning guidance provides the theaters of operation, the planned scenarios, and the timelines for sustainment.

(2) The Center for Army Analysis provides the scenario intensity factors as derived from the theater level combat simulations for each MCO.

(3) The Combined Arms Support Command provides equipment usage profiles (EUP).

(4) DCS, G-4 prepares and distributes the guidance memorandum to establish WRSI priorities and parameters.

b. Secondary items.

(1) AMC and USAMMA compute the requirement levels based on HQDA guidance using the Army War Reserve Automated Process (AWRAP). The AWRAP is a process that computes requirements for repair parts and minor secondary items and several auxiliary processes that support the requirement process. AWRAP will be used to implement readiness based sparing (RBS) to achieve a predicted operational ready rate of 90 percent for ground and 75 percent for aviation equipment. EUP and mean usage between replacement are incorporated into the RBS methodology.

(2) AWRAP generates secondary item materiel requirements in SC I, II, III (package), IV, VIII, and IX for AWRS. It provides standard computation of requirements for WRSI and displays them in a standard format. The requirement is registered in AMC's national level requirements and asset tracking system and ensures the Army requirement for the POM includes all war reserve secondary items found within APS.

c. Major end items. Requirements are based on theater campaign simulations for the MCOs designated for planning in the DPG. These requirements are:

(1) Approved by DCS, G-3/5/7.

(2) Developed by CAA.

(3) Validated by HQDA (DAMO-RQ).

(4) Documented and registered in the force directory for force management and audit by USAFMSA.

d. Ammunition authorizations are based on three planning factors. Each theater provides combat factor input to the CAA models. The models produce the projected wartime expenditure (PWE) requirement. The PWE requirement forms the basis of the SC V authorizations. The three planning factors are as follows:

(1) Projected wartime expenditures.

(2) Combat loads — quantities to initially fill each weapon system to its carrying capacity.

(3) Additional combat loads to sustain the force based on expected duration of combat.

6-18. Positioning objectives for storing Army War Reserve Sustainment

HQDA (DALO-FPP with DAMO-FD) will identify a positioning plan for major end items, and will provide positioning objectives for both principal and secondary items in the guidance memorandum. Managers will build a proposed positioning plan based on HQDA guidance. Combatant commanders will have visibility of positioning plans through LIDB.

6-19. Army War Reserve Stockage List

a. The Army War Reserve Stockage List (AWRSL) is an automated database of major items, selected secondary end items, petroleum, oils, and lubricants (POL), subsistence (operational rations only), clothing, and selected expendable items. It is the basis for computing the war materiel requirement (WMR) for mission essential spares, repair parts, components, and general supplies for all MTOE required LINs.

b. The AWRSL is developed by AMC and OTSG subordinate activities and is coordinated with ACOMs, ASCCs, and DRUs.

c. It is maintained at LOGSA in the LIDB APS module, and the IMMCs/USAMMA can update it on-line as required.

d. The ACOM, ASCC, and DRU will review the AWRSL yearly via the LIDB APS module and make appropriate recommendations with justification for changes or additions to the list of items.

e. AMC (AMCOPS-S) and the Office of the Surgeon General (OTSG) are the approving authority of the AWRSL.

6-20. Integrated materiel management of Army War Reserve Sustainment

a. Items used as AWRS may be designated for integrated materiel management (IMM). When items used as AWRS by the Army are assigned to other DOD components or the General Services Administration (GSA) for IMM, an Army Service Item Control Center (SICC) is assigned to represent the Army's interest. (See AR 708-1, chap 5 .)

b. AMC determines the Army portion of the WMR for non-medical items. OTSG determines the Army portion of the WMR for medical items. AMC and OTSG will assign materiel management functions to the IMMC or SICC in accordance with AR 710-1, chapter 2 ,and d , below.

c. Each IMMC or SICC finances and manages APS covered under integrated materiel management unless otherwise directed by the Secretary of Defense.

d. The IMMC or SICC will —

(1) Review the APS selection data submitted by other Services to ensure that IMM items selected for APS can be justified in subsequent budget and requirements reviews.

(2) Submit to the other Service IMMCs the Army's portion of the WMR for items managed by that service.

(3) Compute and maintain the overall WMR using:

(a) Logistic planning factors.

(b) Peacetime and mobilization replacement factors.

(c) Consumption rates.

(d) Demand history.

(e) Other commodity planning assumptions necessary to determine requirements.

(4) Review and evaluate reports provided by the other Service IMMCs that show requirements, assets, industrial capability, and stock deficiencies to the WMR allowed to the Army. Use the following, as needed, to make recommendations to the IMMC or SICC, AMC, and OTSG:

(a) Overall integrated materiel management capability to support Army requirements under mobilization conditions.

(b) Condition of assets and degree of modernization.

(c) Extent of stock deficiency and item balance and measures taken by the IMMC to budget and procure assets to satisfy APS deficiencies.

(d) Items procured commercially during the initial phase of mobilization.

(e) The IMMC or SICC will take the following actions for the Army WMR and designated projects for Army-owned stocks stored in CONUS (APS-1):

(1) Plan for the introduction of new items.

(2) Control Army-owned WMR stored at DLA facilities in accordance with DLAR 4140.48 and interservice support agreements (ISSA).

(3) Provide for the peacetime use of WMR and any separate guidance issued by AMC or OTSG.

(f) For Army-owned stocks stored OCONUS each IMMC or SICC will —

(1) Develop stockage requirements for APS OCONUS items.

(2) Coordinate the stock rotation/attrition for shelf life and other items requiring rotation. Ensure that the latest standard items are available.

(3) For DLA-managed items, the Army SICC will provide the AWRS requirements to DLA for items managed by DLA. DLA will provide supply support to all DOD activities during mobilization or war as in accordance with DOD 4140.1-R.

6-21. Submitting the APS materiel requirements to the IMMC

The Army SICC will furnish APS requirements to the IMMC using DIC DM-series documents in accordance with AR 725-50 . Submit corrections and changes annually from the most recent AWRAP computation. The requirements submission date is normally 30 January of each year.

6-22. Free issue program to fill WMR funding deficiencies

a. This program allows the issue of AWCF-SMA assets, on a non-reimbursable basis, to satisfy unfunded WMR. Policy concerning the free issue of assets can be found in AR 725-50 .

b. AMC is the proponent for this program and establishes the procedures to ensure successful execution.

c. AMC and USAMMA are authorized to receive AWCF materiel on a non-reimbursable basis to fill WMR funding deficiencies.

d. AMC and USAMMA may submit unfunded requisitions for WMR deficiencies to DLA, on a fill or kill basis.

6-23. War Reserve Stocks for Allies overview and guidance

a. Specific equipment densities, a force structure, or a capability for the supported allied Armed Forces are recommended by the U.S. forces, the allied government, and the supporting combatant commander under OSD or HQDA guidance for inclusion in the WRSA structure. Also included are appropriate data on equipment requirements, on-hand densities, existing APS, projected FMS, and production capabilities. After development, these recommendations are validated annually by HQDA committee. This review process ensures that APS recommendation meets OSD or HQDA guidance. It also ensures that the APS stocks for the program are limited to combat essential items and provide only austere levels of support. The validated on-hand density of equipment in the supported force structure (for example, Republic of Korea Army (ROKA) and Republic of Korea Marine Corps (ROKMC) units) will become the database for requirements computation.

b. The WRSA stockpile replaces allied combat losses and combat consumption only. Items for initial issue quantity (IIQ) and float stockage are not authorized.

c. Missiles and rockets are distributed to WRSA only after all U.S. requirements are filled.

d. The U.S.-supported portion of the WRSA requirements will be determined on the basis of validated structure and appropriate loss and consumption factors. The requirements are then adjusted by applying the ally's assets, to include: additional assets provided by transfers from various military assistance programs; in-country production capability; co-production projects; programmed FMS; and programmed third-country assistance. If the actual allied asset cannot be determined, then the pipeline and stockage levels will be considered full. The stockage materiel requirements, adjusted by the above, constitute the U.S.-supported portion of WRSA. They are part of the AAO for major items and ammunition, and stockage requirements for secondary items.

Table 6-1. APS prepositioning authorization document management codes for use with APS brigade and unit set authorization documents
MTOE non-standard SB 700-20 definition Remarks code
P Authorized for prepositioning 600
N Not authorized for prepositioning 601
T To accompany troops 602
D Not authorized for prepositioning — deferred 603

1. While four codes exist, only two codes (600 and 602) are actually used on the MTOE.
2. Does not apply to war reserve sustainment stocks.

Chapter 7
Supply Performance Evaluation

7-1. Use of automated data processing systems

Use standard ADP systems that are AIT enabled to collect, store, retrieve, format, and analyze data to monitor performance of supply management and related activities. The lack of ADP support does not relieve managers or evaluators of the responsibility to evaluate and report performance to higher headquarters.

7-2. Performance requirements

Supply performance targets are set to evaluate the effectiveness and efficiency of mission accomplishment. Table 7-1 provides a summary of performance evaluation standards for stock control and requisition processing. Table 7-2 provides a summary of standards for return processing. If higher headquarters have not set specific targets, commanders must develop adequate models and performance indicators to allow a response to higher headquarters' requirements for statistical and narrative reports. They also allow self-evaluation of mission accomplishment. Figure 7-1 shows a simplified model for requisition processing and gives examples of the data that can be collected.

Table 7-1. Key supply performance indicators for centralized inventory management for stock control and requisition processing
Functional area Indicator Target Explanation
1. Stock control.      
  Materiel release 2% (Materiel release denial rate = denials/materiel releases) x 100
  Inventory 90% 100 - Lines with major variances (scheduled inventory completed) x 100
  Gross adjustments 1.5%/qtr. Gains + Losses/Average value of inventory x 100
2. Requisition NICP processing      
  Order-ship-time (IPD 01-15) 12 hours (1/2 day)  
  Stock availability (SA) 85% (Requisitions filled first pass/requisitions received) x 100
  NMCS SA 90% (NMCS requisitions filled first pass/NMCS

Table 7-2. Return pipeline processing standards (in days)
  IMMC Processing Customer response Shipping Total
SC VII        
(CONUS) 15 25 15 55
(OCONUS) 15 25 45 85
(CONUS) N/A 15 15* 30
(OCONUS) N/A 15 20* 35
(CONUS) 7 15 7 29
(OCONUS) 15 25 20 60

. * Depending on the ARI code.

Figure 7-1. General Model of Requisitioning Processing

Chapter 8
Management of Repair Cycle Float (RCF) Stocks

8-1. Float overview

a. The two types of float are operational readiness float (ORF) and repair cycle float (RCF).

b. The basic authority for float is AR 750-1 . Sustainment or national level policies pertaining to RCF are in this regulation. Policy and procedures for ORF in retail support activities and commercial activities are in AR 710-2 .

c. Whether an item will require RCF is determined during the concept exploration phase of the integrated logistics support process. The materiel developer makes this decision, which is finalized by the combat developer during testing of the maintenance and depot maintenance plan. Factors are then developed and, if approved by HQDA, distribution requirements are computed and distributed per chapter 12 .

8-2. RCF policy

a. RCF is used primarily to extend the service life of selected items of Army materiel. RCF provides timely depot maintenance without detracting from the materiel readiness of using activities.

b. The materiel and combat developers select items for float support during the development and operational tests of equipment planned for depot maintenance. DCS, G-4 approves subsequent RCF requirements.

c. If future depot overhaul is planned for an item, the AMC IMM will develop a factor to determine the authorized float quantities. If DCS, G-4 approves the factor, LOGSA (AMXLS-M) will maintain it in the SSN file. Then RDAISA will use it to compute gross requirements and LOGSA (AMXLS-M) will use it to project distribution requirements in the TAEDP.

(1) A change in the planned repairs program or other OPLANs, doctrine, policy, or technical criteria may occur anytime during the life of an item. If the change affects the plans or programs for the item's depot maintenance, the factor is updated in the SSN file.

(2) The distribution requirements in the TAEDP are based on the authorized equipment column of the MTOE/TDA. After a unit is activated during peacetime, the availability of assets is determined and distribution plans are prepared. Requirements for RCF are not shown in the TAEDP until a factor is issued.

8-3. IMM of RCF

When an RCF item is selected for integrated materiel management, the IMM —

a. Notifies the appropriate ACOM, ASCC, and DRU 45 days before the date an item is scheduled for depot overhaul that the item must be turned in.

b. Furnishes the following information to the ACOM, ASCC, and DRU 30 days before the date the item is scheduled for depot overhaul:

(1) The delivery point of the end item to be turned in for depot overhaul.

(2) Delivery condition of the item, including required components and basic issue items.

(3) Method of delivery to the overhaul facility, requirements for drivers and crew, and the fund citation.

(4) Details for the issuance of a replacement item from RCF assets.

8-4. Accountability of RCF assets

a. The AMC IMM that has logistic support for an item is accountable for RCF assets. Assign RCF assets purpose code F per AR 725-50 , paragraph C-37 and tables C-59 and C-60; and project code RCF.

b. The DCS, G-4 must approve the use of assets designated as war reserves or decrement stock for float exchange.

8-5. RCF requirements determination

Guidance for computing requirements for RCF is in chapter 12 .

Chapter 9
Identification of Major Items

9-1. Major item designation criteria

a. The following minimum criteria are used in designating an item as a major item:

(1) It is an end item (that is, a final combination of end products, components, or materials ready for use).

(2) It is required to perform a combat or combat support mission requirement.

(3) It is of such importance to the operational readiness of the Army that review and control is required at all levels of management (requirements, procurement, distribution, maintenance, disposal, and asset reporting).

(4) Its worldwide requirements are computed and programmed from generic or modified equipment authorizations or allowances.

(5) It is justified at OSD or congressional level.

(6) It has a unit cost of $3,000 or more.

(7) It is separately type classified.

b. The following are managed as major items without regard to the above criteria:

(1) All motorized tracked, wheeled, and towed vehicles for use on highway and rough terrain.

(2) All weapon and missile end items.

(3) All boats or ships.

(4) All sets, assemblies, or end items that have a major item as a component part.

(5) All ammunition (only during the acquisition process).

(6) Selected construction material assigned SC IV with an ABA code of A through Q. ABA codes are addressed in table 5-2 .

(7) Sets, kits, and outfits that are type classified and authorized per the TOE, TDA, and joint TDAs.

9-2. Major item designation

The following identification numbers and codes are used in the identification of major items:

a. NSN. An NSN will identify an item throughout the item's life. Specific criteria for assigning an NSN and participating in the Federal Catalog System are in AR 708-1, chapter 2 .

b. Line item number (LIN).

(1) A LIN will group all NSNs by the functional capability expressed by the generic nomenclature.

(2) Policy and procedures on LIN assignments are in AR 708-1, chapter 9 .

(3) LIN assignments are listed in SB 700-20.

c. Standard study number (SSN).

(1) Only centrally managed items are covered by an SSN.

(2) An SSN provides a method for collecting data on major items.

(3) Details on SSNs are in chapter 10 .

d. Type classification code.

(1) Major items are type classified so that they are accepted for Service use before expending procurement funds.

(2) Type classification of a major item reflects the degree to which the item is acceptable for its intended mission.

(3) Major items are not classified as standard until all major materiel subsystems (including support equipment) are qualified for the same type classification.

(4) Type Classification Obsolete (OBS) Procedures.

(a) General.

(1) A type classified item will be reclassified to OBS when it is no longer required or acceptable for the intended mission, due to:

(a) Absence of a requirement or authorization.

(b) Its replacement by another STD item.

(c) It has become too costly to repair and support has been replaced by another STD item or no replacement is required ( AR 70-1 ).

(2) The documentation of IPR results for items reclassified to OBS, which will result in eventual disposal or open sale, should address the potential disposal and use hazards posed by any radioactive, explosive, toxic, or other hazards presented by the items. Per AR 73-1 , documentation will include life cycle environmental quality and/or disposal plan. All documentation will specifically address the statutory and regulatory provisions regarding environmental protection.

(3) OBS should not be reissued or reprocured for Army units, but may be made available to support international logistics programs.

(4) Reclassification should include support equipment (for example, components, special tools, training aids and devices, and TMDE). Support equipment also required for use with items not designated OBS, retain the highest designation of the equipment they support.

(b) Procedures.

(1) Anyone can identify proposed candidate items for type classification to obsolete. If the identifier is other than an item manager, the proposal must be sent to the item manager for processing. The item manager will process all candidate items for type classification to obsolete using the procedures outlined in subsequent paragraphs and existing policy regulations.

(2) Once a candidate item has been identified for obsolescence, the item manager will send a request (or by electronic means) to USAFMSA, ATTN: MOFI-FMA-SDA-T1, 9900 Belvoir Road, Suite 120, Fort Belvoir, VA 22060-5587. USAFMSA will perform a LIN analysis against requirements and authorizations to determine if the item is documented in TOE, MTOE, TDA and BOIP. If the item is found to be documented in any of these documents, this information will be provided to the item manager with instructions.

(a) The item manager is responsible for coordination with USAFMSA-RDD, Fort Leavenworth, KS for any requirement listed in TOEs and BOIPs.

(b) The item manager will provide disposition instructions to the proponent of authorization document(s) for the item's removal.

(3) Once the item has been removed from all requirement and authorization documents, the PM/IMMC will conduct an IPR to determine reclassification to OBS.

(4) The item manager, on receipt of concurrence of the IPR member agencies and approval of the PM/IMMC with instructions from USAFMSA, will prepare a Materiel Status Record (MSR) in accordance with DA Pamphlet 70-3 and forward to HQAMC (AMCRD-TE).

(5) Once the MSR is recorded, final cataloging actions will be approved and transmitted by USAFMSA-ADD to LOGSA to ensure the item type classified is removed from SB 700-20.

(c) Annual Review.

(1) HQDA will conduct an annual review of all items not documented in requirement and authorization documents for obsolesence after the close of the Management of Change (MOC) window.

(2) LOGSA will provide a list of items by MSC to USAFMSA-ADD. USAFMSA will staff these items to HQAMC and the Army Staff for final concurrence and approval.

(3) USAFMSA-ADD will provide the final HQDA approval to LOGSA to ensure the items are type classified obsolete and removed from the SB 700-20.

(5) Type Classification Contingency (CON) Procedures.

(a) The Army Systems Acquisition Review Committee (ASARC) may type reclassify a major item to CON concurrently with TC of a new item as STD; otherwise, subsequent type reclassification of major items to CON is delegated to the designated IPR authority.

(b) Items type classified CON may be retained for training or as Mission Essential Contingency Items (MECI) until replaced by STD items. An item should not be reclassified CON unless it is to be replaced. Specific exceptions require HQDA approval.

(c) CON items should not be procured for Active Army or Reserve Component (RC). They are normally supported with repair parts and components on hand in the supply system or by cannibalization. CON items processed by RCs and which accompany the RC deployment (MECI) will be supported based on priority readiness requirements. These items should have full logistics support to the degree that such support can be provided by the logistics system. ODCS, G-3 should identify MECI required for deployment and should monitor readiness conditions of RC units equipped with MECI. Ammunition to support weapon systems type classified CON will be provided according to the approved program.

(d) CON items should not be overhauled without specific program approval by HQDA (ODCS, G-4 in coordination with ASA(ALT)). Exceptions are authorized for support of the approved international logistics programs.

(6) Information on other forms of type classification is in AR 70-1 and DOD 3235.2-R:

(a) Standard (STD).

(b) Generic (GEN).

(c) Low Rate Production (LRP).

(d) Limited Procurement (LP).

e. Logistic control code (LCC).

(1) The LCC is used with the type classification code to provide a basis for the degree of logistical support rendered an item.

(2) The approval authority for type classification assigns the LCC. An LCC is assigned to each major item NSN.

(3) The LCC is revised during an item's life cycle so that valid support decisions and resource allocations are made. Specific codes are explained in DA Pam 708-2, table 3-21 .

f. Reportable Item Control Code (RICC). Specific RICCs are in DA Pam 708-2 .

g. End Item Code (EIC).

(1) Unit level clerks use a three position alphanumeric EIC to identify a request for repair parts to a specific end item NSN. EICs are assigned to major items with an NSN that is type classified and purchased with PA funds (ABA codes A through Q). ABA codes are in table 5-2 . Repair parts do not have an EIC since one part may be used on several end items. The unit level clerks are responsible for providing the correct EIC.

(2) The Army Master Data File (AMDF) is the primary catalog edit for EIC. The AMDF lists the EICs for major end items to the left of the LINs. If the major item NSN is not on the AMDF, no EIC is assigned.

(3) The major item manager must request the assignment of an EIC through the MSC coordinator no later than the development of the BOIP or the development of catalog data records per AR 708-1 .

(4) MSC coordinators will address requests for EIC assignment to Executive Director, LOGSA, ATTN: AMXLS-M, Redstone Arsenal, AL 35898-7466.

(5) An EIC will not change during the total life cycle of the major item. The EIC is structured so that each position has specific meaning. The first position identifies the MSC and the materiel category, which is a broad description of the major item. The second position provides for further identification of the first position. The two-position combination builds a generic family of major items. The third position in combination with the first two identifies a specific major item NSN within the family. For example, in the EIC "AAB," the first position "A" indicates that the item applies to a TACOM LCMC combat vehicle. The second position "A" indicates that the item specifies the M1 main battle tank. The third position "B" specifies the M1E1 120mm gun, NSN 2350-01-087-1095.

(6) Image transactions for individual repair part demands identified with EICs are transceived to LOGSA for input into the Central Demand Data Base (CDDB). CDDB maintains a 24-month history on all demands received from the retail automated systems.

Chapter 10
Standard Study Number System and Replacement Factors

Section I
Overview and Policies

10-1. Scope, standard study number system

This chapter applies to all Army elements that manage aircraft, missiles, weapons, tracked combat vehicles, ammunition, and other procurement appropriations (PA) materiel. The material applies to file maintenance and distribution of the Standard Study Number System (SSNS).

10-2. Application.

a. The SSNS is used to develop the Army portion of the Presidential Budget submission to Congress and resource reports to OSD and Congress. The Standard Study Number (SSN) relates to a budget line within the Presidential Budget submission. SSNs may be used individually as a stand alone budget entry, or they may involve an interrelated structure in which the details, such as programmed funding and quantities of subordinate SSNs aggregate to a major SSN. The SSN is the key data element in maintaining visibility of the funding-through-fielding of major items of materiel. A LIN is assigned to only one major-roll or sub-roll SSN as a Primary (Requirement Category (R-CAT) code = "P"). But a LIN may be found under multiple SSNs, identified with R-CAT code = "G" as applicable, (see paragraph 10-8 .)

b. Data elements from the SSNS are used by various organizations to compute requirements.

(1) HQDA uses SSN data elements to develop and prepare the President's Budget, to compute the Approved Acquisition Objective (AAO), Army Procurement Objective (APO), or force structure based procurement requirements which are used in PA programming and budgeting.

(2) U.S. AMC Logistics Support Activity (LOGSA) uses the SSN data elements to project distribution requirements for maintenance float and to compute hidden assets, Component Major Items (CMI) that are not reported individually, in the Army's Continuing Balance System - Expanded (CBS-X) process and to project equipment or distribution in the TAEDP.

(3) The Army system for automation of preparedness planning uses the SSN cross-reference (SSN X-REF) to validate end items that require mobilization planning.

10-3. Objectives of the SSNS


a. Provides a means to support centralized item management of all PA items and other selected items.

b. Provides a system to collect data on assets, requirements, overhaul, modifications, and procurement for primary and generating items (CMI and end item/assemblages) of equipment, missiles, and ammunition. The system will also compile and identify this data for various studies and reports, such as the Army Procurement Database (PDB), TAEDP, and CBS-X.

c. Provides common data for the President's Budget, for reports to OSD and Congress, for audit trail purposes.

d. Provides a system for exhibiting life expectancy (LE), maintenance float, and replacement factors for items in SB 700-20.

e. Summarizes collected data on requirements, assets, procurement, and distribution for items of equipment and ammunition.

f. Provides a system that reflects SSN, LIN and NSN cross-referenced relationships.

10-4. Processing Requests for SSNs

a. Requests for new SSNs are initiated by either HQDA staff or by an Integrated Materiel Management Center (IMMC) but all are submitted through HQDA ASA(ALT) for coordination and then sent to LOGSA. Requests for updates to data elements related to an existing SSN are also submitted through HQDA ASA(ALT) to LOGSA. HQDA Staff will direct LOGSA to assign either AAO/APR or non-AAO SSNs when the decision is made to procure an item. The AAO/APR refers to major items for which a procurement requirement quantity may be computed based upon force structure documents such as: Table of Equipment (TOE) or BOIP, plus factors.

b. Data for the SSNs reside in the Logistics Integrated Database (LIDB). Paragraph 10-11 lists data elements used in the SSNS and indicates those data elements that are used in HQDA and IMMC requests for SSNs.

c. When a LIN in Supply Bulletin 700-20 is replaced by another LIN, the replacing LIN will automatically overlay the replaced LIN within each applicable SSN in the SSNS.

10-5. Maintaining the Standard Study Number System (SSNS)

a. The SSNS is maintained to support major items and systems, selected secondary items, missiles, and ammunition. The SSNS will contain the following:

(1) SSN. A LIN is listed in SB 700-20 before an Approved Acquisition Objective (AAO) SSN is assigned.

(2) SB 700-20. SB 700-20 data will be loaded to the LOGSA Logistics Integrated Database quarterly in March, June, September, and December. The March and September files will reflect the June and December SB 700-20 publications.

(3) Standard cross-reference data. Identifies end items that require mobilization planning and is produced semiannually (SSN X-REF) in May and November.

(4) Life expectancy, maintenance, and replacement factors used to compute requirements, to plan distribution, and to estimate asset positions, acquisition, and depot maintenance.

(5) Identification of the major item and weapon system or assemblage of which it is a component (component major item (CMI)) or equipment not separately authorized in the same authorization document in which the assemblage item appears.

b. The IMM will notify HQDA ASA(ALT) and LOGSA to update the SSNS if the major item is a component and is not currently identified in the SSNS as a component of a higher assemblage or developmental system.

c. The IMM procuring the CMI will ensure that the assemblage LIN (generating item) is assigned against the applicable SSN.

d. AAO SSNs apply to major items for which a procurement quantity may be computed based on maintenance float factors and on force structure documents (Table of Organizations and Equipment (TOE) and Basis of Issue Plan (BOIP)). See table 10-1 .

e. Non-AAO SSNs are assigned to items or programs that do not require AAO or APR computation. The first two positions of non-AAO SSNs are alphabetic.

f. Non-AAO SSNs are used as a rollup of dollars for spares, repair parts and modification, when the funding category of items is under $2 million.

g. Numeric SSNs are assigned to secondary items for which requirements and distribution data are required. The first position is numeric. The appropriate IMM and SSN (Major Roll Code) are listed in table 10-2 .

h. A major item-planning price is computed and published in LIN sequence in the SSNS&RF available in FEDLOG and LIDB. The price is used by materiel planners to set maintenance expenditure limits (MEL) and may not be used as a new unit or procurement price.

i. Maintenance float factors and replacement factors are reviewed annually. Updates and changes are input annually in April per AR 750-1 .

10-6. Pseudo LINs

Pseudo LINs are being phased out and are no longer authorized for assignment.

10-7. "Z"LINs

A "Z" LIN is assigned to developmental items for inclusion in requirements documents (for example, Required Operational Capability (ROC) documents), in authorization documents prior to classification, and in special studies for developing data required for classification. "Z" series LINs are usually assigned in the developmental stage. Once adopted as an Army item, the "Z" LIN will be re-type classified to a standard LIN.

10-8. Item Category or Type of Item

a. Major items are identified as either primary "P" or generating "G".

(1) A "P" item can be identified as an end item, component, set, assemblage or system. The "P" item LIN is shown in the SSNS only once as a primary.

(2) A primary (R-CAT "P") LIN may also be identified under other SSNs as having an R-CAT code of "G". This indicates that the LIN is also generating requirements for the R-CAT "P" LIN(s) which are cross-referenced to the SSN it is displayed under (table 10-3 ).

b. Tables 10-4 and 10-5 provide examples of the cross-reference relationship of standard study items. The examples also show the interchange that must be recognized by and coordinated between the IMMs.

Section II
Replacement and Maintenance Factors

10-9. Policy

The SSNS provides visibility of approved DA replacement factors (peacetime only) and approved maintenance factors.

10-10. Replacement factors

Replacement factors for new items that have less than the set base period is based on similar items, engineering estimates, and limited loss data.

a. PTRF. The base period for computing peacetime replacement factors (PTRF) is the most recent eight quarters of current experience. A different base period may be used if approved by HQDA. Normally, a peacetime rate will not exceed a wartime active rate. PTRFs are computed using the formula in table 10-6 .

b. WARF. The Wartime Replacement Factor (WARF) is used to project wartime losses under combat conditions. The WARF is expressed as a decimal carried out to four digits. The Concepts and Analysis Agency calculates the WARF based on historical loss data, current threat analysis, results from major training exercises, and data from U.S. allies that use similar items of equipment. The factors are classified and reflect the daily loss rate that is to be applied to the daily theater equipment density.

10-11. Maintenance factors

There are three types of maintenance-related factors; operational readiness float (ORF), repair cycle float (RCF), and unserviceable generations (UGF).

a. Factors for ORF and RCF are based on the level of maintenance and are displayed at LIN level. They are developed as part of the integrated logistics support process per AR 700-127 and DA Pam 700-56 . ORFs and RCFs are computed using the formulae in table 10-7 .

(1) Additions, deletions, or updates are based on changes to maintenance data or input provided to the MSCs by MACOMS per AR 750-1 .

(2) The ORF Annual Demand Data Report for LINs are submitted by the ACOM, ASCC, and DRU to LOGSA for consolidation and calculation of ORF factors. These factors are sent annually by LOGSA, through the MSC and AMC, to HQDA (DALO-SMM and DAMO-FDR) for approval.

(3) Approved factors are forwarded to AMC with an effective date indicating when they will be input to the SSN file.

b. UGF are computed from the quarter containing both generation and density data. Density quantities are the sum of quantities over 12 quarters.

(1) The UGF is the only authorized source for projection of depot level maintenance requirements except for aircraft and other items exempted by AMC.

(2) Unserviceable generation factors are computed using the formula in table 10-7 .

Section III
Data Elements

10-12. SSNS Data Elements

Table 10-19 contains the data elements used in the LOGSA SSNS, by the HQDA staff, and by the IMM.

10-13. Standard Study Number System and Replacement/Requirements Factors Standard Study Number (SSN) Master File Cross Reference List

This file is available on CD-ROM with FEDLOG. It is located in the Army view portion of FEDLOG.

a. Section 1: Introduction. This section provides the purpose of the supply bulletin, definitions, and the authorization for the bulletin.

b. Section 2: SSN and Replacement/Maintenance Factors Cross-Reference Lists. This chapter is organized first by REQ-RIC, then by SSN. Within the SSN, the sequence data will be primary items, then generating items. Displayed with the LINs will be the maintenance float and the replacement factors. For ammunition, the DODAC is displayed instead of the LIN. The data elements reportable item control code (RICC), appropriation and budgetary activity code (ABA), type classification code, logistics control code (LCC), and responsible RIC, LIN, and NSN nomenclature are extracted from the . SB 700-20 is available at Part 1 - Cross-Reference List. Part 2 - ORF/RCF and Life Expectancy.

c. Section 3: LIN/SSN to REQ-RIC Cross-Reference. This chapter provides a cross-reference from LIN or DODAC to every applicable SSN, at the lowest level of roll, whether it is a primary or generating item in the SSN, and identifies the command that is the owner of the SSN.

d. Section 4: Not used.

e. Section 5: Not used.

f. Section 6: Reserved for future usage.

g. Section 7: Major Item Planning Price. This chapter lists, in LIN sequence, the forecasted planning price to calculate maintenance expenditure limits (MEL). Planning prices are derived by multiplying the base price of an item by inflation factors provided by the Comptroller, AMC. Part 1 - Major Item Planning Price. Part 2 - Major Item Planning Prices NSN and Unit Prices.

10-14. Requesting SSN Products and Reports

Requests for SSN products or electronic transmission of the SSN file should be made to Director, LOGSA, ATTN: AMXLS-M, Redstone Arsenal, AL 35898-7466. EM 0007 can be ordered through the local publications control officer.

Table 10-1. Army Appropriations and Standard Study Number Relationship
PA Number PA
Major roll code (position
1-4 of SSN)
IMM using this series
of SSN
1 Aircraft 1 Aircraft and armament subsystem A001-A999 B17
    4 Support equipment to include avionic subsystem J001-J999 B16
2 Missile 1 Anti-ballistic missile system C001-C199 B64
    2/5 Other missiles and support equipment C200-C999
3 Weapons and tracked vehicles 1 Tracked combat vehicles G800-G999
    2 Weapons and other combat vehicles. G001-G799 B14
4 Ammunition 1 Ammunition E001-E999
5 Other 1 Tactical and support vehicles D001-D999 AKZ
    2 Communications and electronics equipment B001-B999
      Communications Security Agency
    3 Other Support equipment Y001-Y999
    3 Medical-USAMMA Q001-Q999 B69

Table 10-2. Numeric SSN Assignment
1000-1499 AMCOM (Air) H
1500-1999 USAMMA C
2000-2999 CECOM LCMC G
3000-3999 AMCOM (Missile) L
4000-4999 TACOM LCMC K
5000-5999 JMC D
6000-6999 ACALA M
7000-7999 SBCCOM (Troop) B
8000-8999 CECOM LCMC G
9000-9499 EMRA P
9500-9999 CSLA U

Table 10-3. Requirement Category Codes
Code Explanation
P - Primary. A primary item is an item of materiel that normally appears in requirements and authorization documents. The primary item can be an end item, component, set, assemblage, or system. A primary LIN is in the SSNS only once as a primary item.
G - Generating. A generating item is an item of materiel that appears as a LIN in authorization documents that generates a requirement (a higher order assembly) for a primary item.

Table 10-4. Cross Reference relationship (generator, stationary, gas engine)
SSN SSN Nomenclature REQ-RIC LIN
R-CAT Item Ratio LIN Nomen
M524 Gen set tri mtd 5kw A12 J47343 P 1 Gen set gas eng
M517 Gen set 5kw A12 J47068 P 1 Gen set
      J47343 G 1 Gas eng 5kw
D062 Tlr. Cargo
3/4 ton
2W W/E
AKZ W95537
Tlr. Cgo

1. This LIN is not inclusive of all LINs assigned to the SSNs listed. It shows that LIN J47343 is a trailer-mounted generator set; LIN J47068 is the generator and W95537 is the trailer.
2. LIN J47343 for SSNs M517 and D062 generates a requirement for the primary item (LIN) in the ratio indicated in addition to requirements for the SSN where J47343 appears as a primary LIN. In this case, the generator and trailer are components of the trailer-mounted generator set.

Table 10-5. Cross Reference relationship (Satellite, communications control AN/MSQ-114)
SSN SSN nomenclature REQ-RIC LIN
R-CAT Item Ratio
K495010 Satellite communications control: AN/MSQ-114 B16 S34509 P 1
B696010 Telephone set: TA-312/PT B16 V31211
B760010 Communication terminal: AN/UGC-74A B16 V35146
D032010 Semi-trailer van Electronics 3-6 ton: AKZ S74353
M895010 Air-condition fl/wall: B17 A25860
P 2

. LIN S34509 (primary LIN) in SSN K495010 generates a requirement for the SSNs in the ration shown. Only LIN S34509 for the satellite communication control appears in authorization documents. The SSNs generated by LIN S34509 also have stand-alone requirements as primary LINs/end items. Initial issue requirements for the generating items consist of the stand-alone requirements plus the requirements for the satellite communications control in the ration indicated. Funds requested in the Army budget for satellite communications control do not include the cost of the telephone set, communications terminal, semi-trailer, or air-conditioner. The costs for these items are included in the funds requested for the SSNs shown (B696, B760, D032, M895).

Table 10-6. Replacement factors
Peacetime Replacement Factor
    {(L DIV Q) / (S DIV Q)}    
    3 =  MONTHLY PTRF  
Total losses to Army
Inventory during last 8 quarters Divided by Sum of 8 quarters in-use densities Divided by 3 months =  Monthly PTRF
(8 quarters) *   (8 quarters) *    
* Losses and densities must be for the same time period
Definition of formula elements:
L  =  losses to the Army inventory
S  =  sum of quarterly in use densities
Q  =  number of quarters in period
3  =  months in a quarter

Table 10-7. Maintenance factors
Unserviceable Generation Factor (UGF)
  {(S1 DIV 12) DIV (S2 DIV 12)}  
  3 =  UGF
Definition of formula elements:
S1 = sum of depot maintenance unserviceable generations for 12 quarters
S2 = sum of in use densities for 12 quarters
12 = 12 quarters in study period
3 = months in a quarter

Operational Readiness Float Factor (ORF)
Step 1: Total ORF downtime (days)    
  (Percentage authorized density) (365) =  ORF %
Step 2: ORF %  
  Readiness Goal (.9) =  ORF Factor
Repair Cycle Float Factor (RCF)
  Mean overhaul cycle time  
  Mean time between overhaul =  RCF

Table 10-8. Procurement Indicator Codes
Code Explanation
A Active
P Parent (for rolling purposes)
I Inactive. History years for OSD requirements
F Future. For program objective memorandum and out-year funding

Table 10-9. OSD Sequence Numbers
Character Position Explanation
1 Appropriation Code
2 Budget activity
3-4 Sub-Budget activity
5-8 OSD sequence number

. 9999 is assigned to each "dummy" SSN

Table 10-10. Identification Codes
Code Explanation
A Service approved
B Not service approved
NA Not applicable

Table 10-11. Major Element (Ammo) Codes
Code Explanation
10 Training Unique
23 Training Standard
30 War Reserve
42 Production Base
50 Non-hardware

Table 10-12. Ammo Category Codes
Code Explanation
1 Small Arms
2 Mortars
3 Tank
4 Artillery
5 Not Used
6 Fuzes
7 Rockets
8 Other
9 Miscellaneous
10 Special
11 Mine/Countermine
12 Missiles - Level of Effort
13 Missiles - Threat
14 Production Base

Table 10-13. PDB Command/Account Codes
Codes Description
D1 Computer generated military pay
N1 First year inflation
N2 Subsequent year inflation
P1 First year inflation
P2 Subsequent year inflation
00 No designated command
03 U.S. Army Information Systems Command (USAISC)
06 The Surgeon General (TSG)
08 Office of the Corps of Engineers (CE)
11 The Adjutant General (TAG)
12 Army Deputy Chief of Staff, G-2 (ODCS, G-2)
13 Office of Chief of Staff, Army (CSA)
17 U.S. Military Academy (USMA)
18 National Guard Bureau (NGB)
21 U.S. Army Criminal Investigation Command (USACID)
22 Office of the Secretary of the Army (OSA)
25 U.S. Army Intelligence Agency (USAIA)
26 U.S. Army Troop Support Agency (TSA)
28 National Defense University (NDU)
32 U.S. Army Finance and Accounting Center (USAFAC)
35 Military Surface Deployment and Distribution Command (SDDC)
36 U.S. Army Strategic Defense Command (USASSDC)
38 U.S. Army Recruiting Command (USAREC)
39 Military Entrance Processing Command (MEP)
40 Military District of Washington (MDW)
41 U.S. Army Operations, Testing and Evaluation Command (USAOPTEC)
57 U.S. Army Training and Doctrine Command (USATRADOC)
5D Program Executive Office Intelligence, Electronic Warfare (IEW)
5E Program Executive Office Aviation
5F Program Executive Office Command, Control, Communications and Computers (C3S)
5L Program Executive Office Tactical Missiles
5M Program Executive Office Communications
5N Program Executive Office Air Defense
5Q Program Executive Office Missile Defense
5R Ground Combat and Support System-Army (GCSS-A)
5T Program Executive Office Standard Army Management Information Systems (PEO STAMIS)
5Y Joint Program Office-Biological Defense (JPO-BioDef)
60 U.S. Army Materiel Command (AMC)
74 U.S. Army Medical Command (USAMEDCOM)
75 U.S. Army Medical Research and Development Command (USAMRDC) (TSG)
76 U.S. Army Forces Command (FORSCOM)
77 U.S. Army Japan (USARJ)
78 Eighth U.S. Army (EUSA)
82 U.S. Army Pacific (USARPAC)
89 U.S. Army Europe (USAREUR)
90 Joint Chiefs of Staff (JCS) (Manpower)
91 Department of Defense (DOD) (Manpower)
94 European Command (EUCOM)

Table 10-14. PEO/PM Codes
PEO/PM Code Description
01Z Air defense non-specific
02 Field artillery systems
02C Sense & Destroy Armor
02Z Field Artillery Systems Non-Specific
03 Aviation
03C Kiowa Warrior
03D Utility Helicopter
03E CH-47D Modernization
03J Avionics
03Z Aviation Non-Specific
04 Tactical Wheeled Vehicles
04B Tactical Veh Specl Pgms
04C Family Of Med Tac Veh
04Z Twv Non-Specific
05 Command, Control, And Communications Systems
05A Air Defense C&Cs
05B All Source Analysis System
05C Cbt Svc Spt Ctrl Sys
05D Cmn Hw/Sw Sys
05G Army Wmmccs Info Sys/Cmd & Ctrl Sys
051 CN/CMS
05L Mob Subscbr Equip
05N Regency Net
05O Satellite Comm
05Y Comm Non-Specific
05Z C&Cs Non-Specific
07 Tactical Missiles
07F TOW Weapon System
07Z TACMIS Non-Specific
08 Armored Systems Modernization
08D Survivability Systems
08H Tank Main Armament Systems
08I Mines-Countermine Warfare
08Z ASM Non-Specific
09 Intelligence, Electronic Warfare & Sensors (IEW&S)
09B JSTARS Gnd Module Station
09D Combat Identification (CID)
09E Signals Warfare
09Z IEW Non-Specific
10 Std Army Mgt Info Systems
10A Integrated Log Sys
10B Joint Computer-Aided Acquisition Log Sys
10C Corps Of Engineers Automation Plan
10D Housing Mgmt Sys
10E Installation Spt Modules
10E Installation Spt Modules
10F Integrated Procurement Sys
10G Personnel Systems
10H Std Army Automated Contracting System
10I Std Depot Systems - Redesigned
10K Tactical Mgt Info System
10L Theater Army Medical Mgt Info Sys
10M Sustaining Base Automation
10N Recruiter 2000
10O Acquisition Info Mgmt
10Z STAMIS Non-Specific
11 Strategic Defense
11A Anti-Satellite
11B Airborne Optical Adjunct
11C Ballistic Missile Def Space Payload
11D Exoatmospheric Reentry-Vehicle Interceptor Subsyst
11E Ground Based Laser
11F Ground Based Radar
11G Ground Based Surveillance And Tracking System
11H High Endoatmospheric Def Interceptor
11I Hypervelocity (Hvl) Interceptor
11J Strategic Target System
11Z Strategic Defense Non-Specific
12 Missile Defense
12D Corps SAM
12Z Missile Defense Non-Specific
13 Ground Combat Systems Support
5R Ground Combat And Support Systems (GCSS)
91 AMC & MSC'S Non-PEO
91P Split AMC CMD
922 Army Res Institute
924 COE
925 TSG
928 SDC
92D Army Digitization Office
99 Inactive SSN/PY PROJ
999 Inactive SSN/PY PROJ

Table 10-15. Ammunition Quantity Multiplier Codes
Code Explanation
E Each
C Hundred
K Thousand
L Hundred thousand
M Million

Table 10-16. Maintenance Float Factors
Date Element Explanation
ORF-FCTR-EUR ORF factor, Europe
ORF-FCTR-PAC ORF factor, USARPAC (includes AK, HI)
ORF-FCTR-KOR ORF factor, Korea
RCF-FCTR-EUR RCF factor, Europe
RCF-FCTR-PAC RCF factor, USARPAC (includes AK, HI)
RCF-FCTR-OTH RCF factor, Other

Table 10-17. Standard Study Number, Deletion Indicator Codes
SSN Deletion Code LIN Deletion Code Description
A A Delete non major SSN or LIN
B B Delete separately authorized
C C Reassignment to another LIN
D D Inactive SSN, LIN or DODAC
E E No study required
F F Logistical transfer
G I Development terminated
H H Delete pseudo data
I J Duplicate LIN assignment
G Not a generating item

Table 10-18. P-1 Classification Codes
Code Explanation
U Unclassified
C Confidential
S Secret

Table 10-19. Standard Study number System Data Elements
SSN Request Data Elements Data Description Valid Values (rules) and References(s) Data Type Field Size
AAO Indicator
Army Acquisition Objective Organizational requirements and authorizations form the basis for determining Army requirements for major end items of equipment. "Y" for Yes if AAO or APR SSN, "N" for No if not AAO or APR SSN Logical 1
ABA Appropriation & Budget Activity Account code Appropriation and budget activity account code is a 1-digit funding code, which is the second position of the Army materiel category structure. See SB 700-20 & DA PAM 708-2, table 3-24 . TXT 1
AMMO CAT CODE Ammunition Category Code A 2-digit numeric code which represents the type of ammunition being requested by weapon system and type. See table 10-12 . # 2
AMMO-QTY-MLPLR Ammunition quantity multiplier Code applicable to ammunition only and indicates unit of measure employed for computational purposes. See table 10-15 . TXT 1
Appropriation A four-letter appropriation code reflecting categories of equipment, such as: aircraft, missiles, weapons and tracked vehicles, ammunition, and other Army procurement, is entered by the Appropriation Sponsor. TXT 4
Appropriation Sponsor's Name Name of Appropriation Sponsor Name of the appropriations sponsor for the SSN request. ASA (FM) determined. TXT 50
Appropriation Sponsor's Phone Number Phone Number of Appropriation Sponsor Phone number of the appropriation sponsor. ASA (FM) determined. # 13
BA Budget Activity Position two (2) of the materiel category structure which identifies the procuring appropriation, and where applicable, the budget activity account or the sub-groupings of materiel managed. The categories relating to Budget Activity are found in Figure 1. # 2
BSA Budget Sub Activity A 3-digit numeric code which refers to specific Office of Secretary of Defense (OSD) categories for reviewing specific cost elements. Valid values found in DoD 7000.14R are: 000 - Undefined, 172 - Space programs, 331 - GIDEP, 335 - FCI, 350 - Information Security, 777 - Budgeted Amounts. (Replaces OSD DU.) # 3
BGFY Beginning Fiscal Year First year that a program is begun and funded. TXT 4
BOS Battlefield Operating System The major functions occurring on the battlefield and performed by the force to successfully execute operations. There are 21 BOSs — 11 wartime and 10 infrastructure. The 11 wartime BOSs are: Maneuver, Fire Support, Air Defense, Command and Control, Intelligence and Electronic Warfare, Mobility and Survivability, Combat Service Support, Nuclear, Biological, and Chemical, Aviation, Ammunition, Horizontal Technology Integration. The infrastructures BOSs are: Base Support, Chemical, Science and Technology Base, Testing, Installations, Manning, Organizing, Sustaining, Training, and Other. ARMY POM source is Mini-POM FY01-05 Handbook TXT 3
Budget_ Nomen HQDA Budget Nomenclature A variable length description of the item being requested. Determined and maintained by ASA (FM). TXT 50
CMC Commodity Management Code A 1-digit alpha code which designates the materiel categories of principal and secondary items. See SB 700-20 & DA PAM 708-2 & table 10-2 . TXT 1
DODAC Department of Defense Ammunition Code An 8-digit alphanumeric code that identifies ammunition and explosive items. The DoDAC is a two-part code. The first four positions consist of the FSC (Federal Supply Class) In-Groups 13 and 14 only. The second four positions consist of alphanumerics assigned to an ammunition generic description within the FSC. FSC+ammo generic DODIC. TXT 8
IDENT_CODE Identification Code A P-1 exhibit code identifying an item as being Service approved or non-Service approved. Identification codes are contained in table 10-10 . Service Approved ="A"; Not Service Approved ="B"; or Not Applicable = "NA". TXT 2
Initial Spares Initial Spares, $, SSN If SSN being requested is for an Initial Spares package, enter the SSN for which initial spares are accumulated. If SSN being requested is not for an Initial Spares package, leave blank. TXT 6
ITEM_CAT_CODE Item Category Code Identifies the item as primary or generating. The primary item can be an end item, component, set, assemblage, or system. A primary LIN is in the SSNS only once as primary. A generating item is a LIN in an authorization document that generates a requirement (a higher order assembly) for a primary item. See table 10-3 . TXT 1
Item_Type Item Type Identifies whether the SSN requested is a "Major" end item (AAO); a "spares/MWO" end item (non-AAO); or "secondary" end item (also non-AAO). TXT 10
LCC Logistics Control Code A 1-digit alpha code assigned to Army adopted items and other items selected for authorization. It is used to provide a basis for logistics support decisions (that is, procurement, overhaul, repair parts, provisioning, requisitioning, and distribution). See DA PAM 708-2, table 3-21 . TXT 1
LIN Line Item Number A 6-digit alphanumeric number that identifies the generic nomenclature of specific types of equipment. Furnished by LOGSA (SB 700-20). TXT 6
MAINT_FLOAT_FCTR Maintenance Float Factors There are two types of maintenance float, repair cycle float (RCF) and operational readiness float (ORF). Maintenance float factors are listed in EM 0007. See table 10-16 . TXT 12
MAJOR_ELEMENT Major Element A 2-digit numeric code which represents the major Army element or purpose to which the ammunition will be assigned. See table 10-11 . # 2
MDEP Management Decision Package A 4-digit text field assigned by HQDA, PAED for grouping program funding and prioritization decision packages. Provided by DA analyst or DASC. TXT 4
NSN National Stock Number A 13-digit number assigned under the Federal Cataloging Program to each approved United States Federal Item Identification. The NSN consists of 4-digit Federal Supply Classification and the 9-digit National Item Identification Number. See SB 700-20 & DA PAM 708-2. TXT 13
NSN National Stock Number Nomenclature The 21-digit NSN nomenclature extracted from the Army Master Data File. See SB 700-20 & DA PAM 708-2. TXT 21
OPR_AGCY Operating Agency Code A 2-digit code that identifies the PDB Command/Account Codes or agency responsible for obligating the funds for the item. Refer to table 10-13 . TXT 2
OSD_SEQ_NO OSD Sequence Number Is comprised of eight numeric characters, used to determine the sequence in which items appear in reports and worksheets. The OSD Sequence Number is assigned by SARDA-SPI. See table 10-9 and fig 10-1 for code numbers and position definitions. # 8
P-1/Ann_Vis P-1/ANN Visibility Normal system rules allow for an item whose Procurement Program does not exceed $5M in any year to be rolled for P1 Display and procurement annex purposes to items less than $5M. Valid values are "Y" for Yes if visibility needed on P-1 exhibit; or "N" for No if not needed for P-1 exhibit. Logical 1
PEG Program Evaluation Group